[go: up one dir, main page]

US20230331016A1 - Digital printing process and method - Google Patents

Digital printing process and method Download PDF

Info

Publication number
US20230331016A1
US20230331016A1 US18/134,190 US202318134190A US2023331016A1 US 20230331016 A1 US20230331016 A1 US 20230331016A1 US 202318134190 A US202318134190 A US 202318134190A US 2023331016 A1 US2023331016 A1 US 2023331016A1
Authority
US
United States
Prior art keywords
itm
aqueous treatment
ink
treatment formulation
weight
Prior art date
Legal status (The legal status is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the status listed.)
Abandoned
Application number
US18/134,190
Inventor
Benzion Landa
Moshe Levanon
Sagi Abramovich
Helena Chechik
On Mero
Einat TIROSH
Ifaa TEREM KOLODKIN
Tatiana Kurtser
Current Assignee (The listed assignees may be inaccurate. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation or warranty as to the accuracy of the list.)
Landa Corp Ltd
Original Assignee
Landa Corp Ltd
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by Landa Corp Ltd filed Critical Landa Corp Ltd
Priority to US18/134,190 priority Critical patent/US20230331016A1/en
Assigned to LANDA CORPORATION LTD. reassignment LANDA CORPORATION LTD. ASSIGNMENT OF ASSIGNORS INTEREST (SEE DOCUMENT FOR DETAILS). Assignors: CHECHIK, HELENA, TIROSH, Einat, MERO, On, ABRAMOVICH, SAGI, LANDA, BENZION, KURTSER, Tatiana, TEREM KOLODKIN, Ifaa, LEVANON, MOSHE
Publication of US20230331016A1 publication Critical patent/US20230331016A1/en
Assigned to WINDER PTE. LTD. reassignment WINDER PTE. LTD. LIEN (SEE DOCUMENT FOR DETAILS). Assignors: LANDA CORPORATION LTD.
Abandoned legal-status Critical Current

Links

Images

Classifications

    • B—PERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
    • B41—PRINTING; LINING MACHINES; TYPEWRITERS; STAMPS
    • B41M—PRINTING, DUPLICATING, MARKING, OR COPYING PROCESSES; COLOUR PRINTING
    • B41M5/00—Duplicating or marking methods; Sheet materials for use therein
    • B41M5/025—Duplicating or marking methods; Sheet materials for use therein by transferring ink from the master sheet
    • B41M5/0256—Duplicating or marking methods; Sheet materials for use therein by transferring ink from the master sheet the transferable ink pattern being obtained by means of a computer driven printer, e.g. an ink jet or laser printer, or by electrographic means
    • B—PERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
    • B41—PRINTING; LINING MACHINES; TYPEWRITERS; STAMPS
    • B41J—TYPEWRITERS; SELECTIVE PRINTING MECHANISMS, i.e. MECHANISMS PRINTING OTHERWISE THAN FROM A FORME; CORRECTION OF TYPOGRAPHICAL ERRORS
    • B41J2/00—Typewriters or selective printing mechanisms characterised by the printing or marking process for which they are designed
    • B41J2/005—Typewriters or selective printing mechanisms characterised by the printing or marking process for which they are designed characterised by bringing liquid or particles selectively into contact with a printing material
    • B41J2/0057—Typewriters or selective printing mechanisms characterised by the printing or marking process for which they are designed characterised by bringing liquid or particles selectively into contact with a printing material where an intermediate transfer member receives the ink before transferring it on the printing material
    • B—PERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
    • B41—PRINTING; LINING MACHINES; TYPEWRITERS; STAMPS
    • B41J—TYPEWRITERS; SELECTIVE PRINTING MECHANISMS, i.e. MECHANISMS PRINTING OTHERWISE THAN FROM A FORME; CORRECTION OF TYPOGRAPHICAL ERRORS
    • B41J2/00—Typewriters or selective printing mechanisms characterised by the printing or marking process for which they are designed
    • B41J2/005—Typewriters or selective printing mechanisms characterised by the printing or marking process for which they are designed characterised by bringing liquid or particles selectively into contact with a printing material
    • B41J2/01—Ink jet
    • B—PERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
    • B41—PRINTING; LINING MACHINES; TYPEWRITERS; STAMPS
    • B41J—TYPEWRITERS; SELECTIVE PRINTING MECHANISMS, i.e. MECHANISMS PRINTING OTHERWISE THAN FROM A FORME; CORRECTION OF TYPOGRAPHICAL ERRORS
    • B41J2/00—Typewriters or selective printing mechanisms characterised by the printing or marking process for which they are designed
    • B41J2/005—Typewriters or selective printing mechanisms characterised by the printing or marking process for which they are designed characterised by bringing liquid or particles selectively into contact with a printing material
    • B41J2/01—Ink jet
    • B41J2/135—Nozzles
    • B41J2/14—Structure thereof only for on-demand ink jet heads
    • B41J2/1433—Structure of nozzle plates
    • B—PERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
    • B41—PRINTING; LINING MACHINES; TYPEWRITERS; STAMPS
    • B41J—TYPEWRITERS; SELECTIVE PRINTING MECHANISMS, i.e. MECHANISMS PRINTING OTHERWISE THAN FROM A FORME; CORRECTION OF TYPOGRAPHICAL ERRORS
    • B41J2/00—Typewriters or selective printing mechanisms characterised by the printing or marking process for which they are designed
    • B41J2/005—Typewriters or selective printing mechanisms characterised by the printing or marking process for which they are designed characterised by bringing liquid or particles selectively into contact with a printing material
    • B41J2/01—Ink jet
    • B41J2/21—Ink jet for multi-colour printing
    • B41J2/2107—Ink jet for multi-colour printing characterised by the ink properties
    • B—PERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
    • B41—PRINTING; LINING MACHINES; TYPEWRITERS; STAMPS
    • B41J—TYPEWRITERS; SELECTIVE PRINTING MECHANISMS, i.e. MECHANISMS PRINTING OTHERWISE THAN FROM A FORME; CORRECTION OF TYPOGRAPHICAL ERRORS
    • B41J2/00—Typewriters or selective printing mechanisms characterised by the printing or marking process for which they are designed
    • B41J2/005—Typewriters or selective printing mechanisms characterised by the printing or marking process for which they are designed characterised by bringing liquid or particles selectively into contact with a printing material
    • B41J2/01—Ink jet
    • B41J2/21—Ink jet for multi-colour printing
    • B41J2/2107—Ink jet for multi-colour printing characterised by the ink properties
    • B41J2/2114—Ejecting specialized liquids, e.g. transparent or processing liquids
    • B—PERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
    • B41—PRINTING; LINING MACHINES; TYPEWRITERS; STAMPS
    • B41M—PRINTING, DUPLICATING, MARKING, OR COPYING PROCESSES; COLOUR PRINTING
    • B41M5/00—Duplicating or marking methods; Sheet materials for use therein
    • B41M5/0011—Pre-treatment or treatment during printing of the recording material, e.g. heating, irradiating
    • B—PERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
    • B41—PRINTING; LINING MACHINES; TYPEWRITERS; STAMPS
    • B41M—PRINTING, DUPLICATING, MARKING, OR COPYING PROCESSES; COLOUR PRINTING
    • B41M5/00—Duplicating or marking methods; Sheet materials for use therein
    • B41M5/0023—Digital printing methods characterised by the inks used
    • B—PERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
    • B41—PRINTING; LINING MACHINES; TYPEWRITERS; STAMPS
    • B41M—PRINTING, DUPLICATING, MARKING, OR COPYING PROCESSES; COLOUR PRINTING
    • B41M5/00—Duplicating or marking methods; Sheet materials for use therein
    • B41M5/025—Duplicating or marking methods; Sheet materials for use therein by transferring ink from the master sheet
    • B41M5/03—Duplicating or marking methods; Sheet materials for use therein by transferring ink from the master sheet by pressure
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C09—DYES; PAINTS; POLISHES; NATURAL RESINS; ADHESIVES; COMPOSITIONS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR; APPLICATIONS OF MATERIALS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
    • C09D—COATING COMPOSITIONS, e.g. PAINTS, VARNISHES OR LACQUERS; FILLING PASTES; CHEMICAL PAINT OR INK REMOVERS; INKS; CORRECTING FLUIDS; WOODSTAINS; PASTES OR SOLIDS FOR COLOURING OR PRINTING; USE OF MATERIALS THEREFOR
    • C09D11/00—Inks
    • C09D11/30—Inkjet printing inks
    • C09D11/32—Inkjet printing inks characterised by colouring agents
    • C09D11/322—Pigment inks
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C09—DYES; PAINTS; POLISHES; NATURAL RESINS; ADHESIVES; COMPOSITIONS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR; APPLICATIONS OF MATERIALS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
    • C09D—COATING COMPOSITIONS, e.g. PAINTS, VARNISHES OR LACQUERS; FILLING PASTES; CHEMICAL PAINT OR INK REMOVERS; INKS; CORRECTING FLUIDS; WOODSTAINS; PASTES OR SOLIDS FOR COLOURING OR PRINTING; USE OF MATERIALS THEREFOR
    • C09D129/00—Coating compositions based on homopolymers or copolymers of compounds having one or more unsaturated aliphatic radicals, each having only one carbon-to-carbon double bond, and at least one being terminated by an alcohol, ether, aldehydo, ketonic, acetal, or ketal radical; Coating compositions based on hydrolysed polymers of esters of unsaturated alcohols with saturated carboxylic acids; Coating compositions based on derivatives of such polymers
    • C09D129/02—Homopolymers or copolymers of unsaturated alcohols
    • C09D129/04—Polyvinyl alcohol; Partially hydrolysed homopolymers or copolymers of esters of unsaturated alcohols with saturated carboxylic acids
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C09—DYES; PAINTS; POLISHES; NATURAL RESINS; ADHESIVES; COMPOSITIONS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR; APPLICATIONS OF MATERIALS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
    • C09D—COATING COMPOSITIONS, e.g. PAINTS, VARNISHES OR LACQUERS; FILLING PASTES; CHEMICAL PAINT OR INK REMOVERS; INKS; CORRECTING FLUIDS; WOODSTAINS; PASTES OR SOLIDS FOR COLOURING OR PRINTING; USE OF MATERIALS THEREFOR
    • C09D7/00—Features of coating compositions, not provided for in group C09D5/00; Processes for incorporating ingredients in coating compositions
    • C09D7/40—Additives
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C09—DYES; PAINTS; POLISHES; NATURAL RESINS; ADHESIVES; COMPOSITIONS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR; APPLICATIONS OF MATERIALS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
    • C09D—COATING COMPOSITIONS, e.g. PAINTS, VARNISHES OR LACQUERS; FILLING PASTES; CHEMICAL PAINT OR INK REMOVERS; INKS; CORRECTING FLUIDS; WOODSTAINS; PASTES OR SOLIDS FOR COLOURING OR PRINTING; USE OF MATERIALS THEREFOR
    • C09D7/00—Features of coating compositions, not provided for in group C09D5/00; Processes for incorporating ingredients in coating compositions
    • C09D7/40—Additives
    • C09D7/65—Additives macromolecular
    • B—PERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
    • B41—PRINTING; LINING MACHINES; TYPEWRITERS; STAMPS
    • B41J—TYPEWRITERS; SELECTIVE PRINTING MECHANISMS, i.e. MECHANISMS PRINTING OTHERWISE THAN FROM A FORME; CORRECTION OF TYPOGRAPHICAL ERRORS
    • B41J2/00—Typewriters or selective printing mechanisms characterised by the printing or marking process for which they are designed
    • B41J2/005—Typewriters or selective printing mechanisms characterised by the printing or marking process for which they are designed characterised by bringing liquid or particles selectively into contact with a printing material
    • B41J2/01—Ink jet
    • B41J2002/012—Ink jet with intermediate transfer member
    • B—PERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
    • B41—PRINTING; LINING MACHINES; TYPEWRITERS; STAMPS
    • B41J—TYPEWRITERS; SELECTIVE PRINTING MECHANISMS, i.e. MECHANISMS PRINTING OTHERWISE THAN FROM A FORME; CORRECTION OF TYPOGRAPHICAL ERRORS
    • B41J29/00—Details of, or accessories for, typewriters or selective printing mechanisms not otherwise provided for
    • B41J29/17—Cleaning arrangements
    • B—PERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
    • B41—PRINTING; LINING MACHINES; TYPEWRITERS; STAMPS
    • B41N—PRINTING PLATES OR FOILS; MATERIALS FOR SURFACES USED IN PRINTING MACHINES FOR PRINTING, INKING, DAMPING, OR THE LIKE; PREPARING SUCH SURFACES FOR USE AND CONSERVING THEM
    • B41N10/00—Blankets or like coverings; Coverings for wipers for intaglio printing

Definitions

  • the present disclosure relates to a digital printing process, aqueous treatment formulations, and related kits and systems.
  • FIG. 1 is a flow chart of a conventional printing process where an intermediate transfer member (ITM) is pre-treated before deposition of an ink image thereto.
  • ITM intermediate transfer member
  • treatment solution is applied to a surface of a hydrophobic ITM to pretreat the ITM surface.
  • step S 9 droplets of aqueous ink are ink-jetted onto the pretreated ITM surface to form an ink image thereon.
  • step S 13 the ink image dries while on the ITM surface.
  • the dried ink-image is transferred to substrate.
  • aspects of the present invention relate to improved printing processes, to improved ITM (or portions thereof) and to improved compositions used for pre-treating the ITM before deposition of droplets of aqueous ink.
  • a method of printing comprising: a. providing an aqueous ink, an aqueous treatment formulation, and an intermediate transfer member (ITM) having a release surface; b. applying the aqueous treatment formulation to the release surface of the ITM to form a wet treatment layer thereon; c. subjecting the wet treatment layer to a drying process to form a dried treatment film from the wet treatment layer and on the ITM; d. depositing droplets of the aqueous ink onto the dried treatment film to form an ink image thereon; e. drying the ink image to leave an ink-image residue on the release surface of the ITM; and f. transferring the ink-image residue onto a printing substrate by pressured contact between the ITM and the substrate.
  • ITM intermediate transfer member
  • a method of printing comprising: a. providing an aqueous ink, an aqueous treatment formulation, and an intermediate transfer member (ITM) having a release surface, the aqueous treatment formulation including
  • a system comprising: an intermediate transfer member (ITM) having a release layer surface of the ITM, an aqueous treatment formulation, a treatment station for applying the aqueous treatment formulation to the release layer surface of the ITM to produce a wet treatment layer, a drying station for drying the aqueous treatment formulation; at least one ink jet nozzle positioned proximate the intermediate transfer member and configured for jetting ink droplets onto the aqueous treatment formulation formed on the intermediate transfer member, an ink processing station configured to at least partially dry the ink on the aqueous treatment formulation formed on the intermediate transfer member to produce an ink-image residue, and an ink-image residue transfer mechanism for transferring the ink-image residue onto a printing substrate by pressured contact between the ITM and the printing substrate.
  • ITM intermediate transfer member
  • the aqueous treatment formulation contains at most 2%, at most 1%, at most 0.5%, at most 0.1% by weight of a non-ionic, silicone-containing surfactant or is devoid a non-ionic, silicone-containing surfactant.
  • a system for indirect printing comprising:
  • the aqueous treatment formulation further comprises a second non-ionic, silicone-containing surfactant having a solubility in water of at least 1%, at 25° C.
  • the release layer surface of the ITM is a silicone-based release layer surface.
  • the release layer surface is sufficiently hydrophilic such that a receding contact angle of a drop of distilled water deposited on the silicone-based release layer surface is at most 60°.
  • the release layer surface is sufficiently hydrophilic such that a 10-second dynamic contact angle (DCA) of a drop of distilled water deposited on the silicone-based release layer surface is at most 108°.
  • DCA 10-second dynamic contact angle
  • the aqueous treatment formulation has a static surface tension within a range of 2-20 mN/m at 25° C. In some embodiments of the present aspect or embodiments thereof, the aqueous treatment formulation has a 25° C. dynamic viscosity of at least 10 cP. In some embodiments of the present aspect or embodiments thereof, the aqueous treatment formulation has a 60° C. evaporation load of at most 7.5:1, by weight.
  • the aqueous treatment formulation has a 60° C. evaporation load of at most 5:1, by weight. In some embodiments of the present aspect or embodiments thereof, the wet treatment layer has a thickness of at most 0.8 ⁇ m. In some embodiments of the present aspect or embodiments thereof, the aqueous treatment formulation further comprises a water absorbing agent. In some embodiments of the present aspects or embodiments thereof, the aqueous treatment formulation further comprises a polyethyleneimine.
  • a system of indirect printing comprising:
  • the aqueous treatment formulation has a 60° C. evaporation load of at most 5:1, by weight.
  • the polyethyleneimine has an average molecular weight of 200,000 to 2,000,000 g/mol
  • a method of indirect printing comprising:
  • a system for indirect printing comprising:
  • a method of indirect printing comprising: a. providing an intermediate transfer member (ITM) having a release layer surface; b. providing an aqueous treatment formulation comprising: i. at least 1.5%, by weight, of at least one water soluble polymer having a solubility in water of at least 5% at 25° C.; ii. at least 5%, by weight, of a first non-ionic surfactant having a solubility in water of at least 7%, at 25° C.; and iii. a second non-ionic, silicone-containing surfactant having a solubility in water of at least 1%, at 25° C. and; iv.
  • ITM intermediate transfer member
  • the release layer surface of the ITM is a silicone-based release layer surface.
  • the method comprises an intermediate transfer member comprising a silicone-based release layer surface.
  • the method comprises a release layer surface which is sufficiently hydrophilic such that a receding contact angle of a drop of distilled water deposited on the silicone-based release layer surface is at most 60°.
  • the release layer surface is sufficiently hydrophilic such that a 10-second dynamic contact angle (DCA) of a drop of distilled water deposited on the silicone-based release layer surface is at most 108°.
  • DCA dynamic contact angle
  • the aqueous treatment formulation has a static surface tension within a range of 2-20 mN/m at 25° C. In some embodiments of the above aspects or embodiments thereof, the aqueous treatment formulation has a 25° C. dynamic viscosity of at least 10 cP. In some embodiments of the above aspects or embodiments thereof, the aqueous treatment formulation has a 60° C. evaporation load of at most 7.5:1, by weight. In some embodiments of the above aspects or embodiments thereof, the aqueous treatment formulation has a 60° C. evaporation load of at most 5:1, by weight.
  • the wet treatment layer has a thickness of at most 0.8 ⁇ m.
  • the aqueous treatment formulation further comprises a water absorbing agent.
  • the aqueous treatment formulation further comprises a polyethyleneimine.
  • a method of indirect printing comprising: a. providing an intermediate transfer member (ITM) comprising a silicone-based release layer surface that is sufficiently hydrophilic to satisfy at least one of the following properties: (i) a receding contact angle of a drop of distilled water deposited on the silicone-based release layer surface is at most 60°; and (ii) a 10-second dynamic contact angle (DCA) of a drop of distilled water deposited on the silicone-based release layer surface is at most 108°; b. providing an aqueous treatment formulation including: i. at least 1.5%, by weight, of at least one water soluble polymer having a solubility in water of at least 5% at 25° C.; ii.
  • ITM intermediate transfer member
  • DCA 10-second dynamic contact angle
  • a first non-ionic surfactant having a solubility in water of at least 7%, at 25° C.
  • a second non-ionic, silicone-containing surfactant having a solubility in water of at least 1%, at 25° C.
  • a carrier liquid containing water said water making up at least 55%, by weight of the aqueous treatment formulation; said aqueous treatment formulation optionally including at least one of, or both of: v. a water absorbing agent; and vi. polyethyleneimine (PEI), said aqueous treatment formulation having the following properties: i.
  • PEI polyethyleneimine
  • the water soluble polymer is a polyvinyl alcohol and the aqueous treatment formulation additionally comprises a polyethyleneimine (PEI) having an average molecular weight of 200,000 to 2,000,000 g/mol.
  • PEI polyethyleneimine
  • said aqueous treatment formulation contains at least 6%, at least 7%, at least 8%, at least 9%, or at least 10%, by weight, of said first non-ionic surfactant. In some embodiments of the present aspect or embodiments thereof, said aqueous treatment formulation contains at most 18%, at most 16%, at most 15%, at most 14%, or at most 13%, by weight, of said first non-ionic surfactant.
  • a system for indirect printing comprising:
  • a system for printing comprising: a. an intermediate transfer member (ITM) comprising a silicone-based release layer surface that is sufficiently hydrophilic to satisfy at least one of the following properties: (i) a receding contact angle of a drop of distilled water deposited on the silicone-based release layer surface is at most 60°; and (ii) a 10-second dynamic contact angle (DCA) of a drop of distilled water deposited on the silicone-based release layer surface is at most 108°; and b. a quantity of an aqueous treatment formulation including: i.
  • ITM intermediate transfer member
  • DCA 10-second dynamic contact angle
  • PEI polyethyleneimine
  • said aqueous treatment formulation having the following properties: i. a static surface tension within a range of 20 and 40 mN/m at 25° C.; ii. a 25° C. dynamic viscosity that is at least 10 cP; and iii. a 60° C. evaporation load of at most 7.5:1, by weight; c. a treatment station for applying the aqueous treatment formulation to the silicone-based release layer surface of the ITM to form thereon a wet treatment layer; d.
  • PEI polyethyleneimine
  • an image forming station for forming ink images on the ITM by depositing droplets of an aqueous ink upon the silicone-based release layer surface after the wet treatment layer has dried into a dried treatment film so that the droplets are applied to the dried treatment film; and e. a transfer station for transferring the ink images from the ITM to substrate.
  • an ITM aqueous treatment formulation comprising: i. at least 1.5%, by weight, of at least one water soluble polymer having a solubility in water of at least 5% at 25° C.; ii. at least 5%, by weight, of a first non-ionic surfactant having a solubility in water of at least 7%, at 25° C.; and iii. a second non-ionic, silicone-containing surfactant having a solubility in water of at least 1%, at 25° C.; iv.
  • a carrier liquid containing water said water making up at least 55%, by weight of the aqueous treatment formulation; said aqueous treatment formulation optionally including at least one or both of: v. a water absorbing agent; and vi. polyethyleneimine (PEI).
  • PEI polyethyleneimine
  • an ITM aqueous treatment formulation comprising: i. 1.5-10%, by weight, of at least one water soluble polymer having a solubility in water of at least 5% at 25° C.; ii. 5-15%, by weight, of a first non-ionic surfactant having a solubility in water of at least 7%, at 25° C.; and iii. 0.1-3% of a second non-ionic, silicone-containing surfactant having a solubility in water of at least 1%, at 25° C.; iv.
  • a carrier liquid containing water said water making up at least 55%, by weight of the aqueous treatment formulation; said aqueous treatment formulation optionally including at least one or both of: v. a water absorbing agent; and vi. polyethyleneimine (PEI).
  • PEI polyethyleneimine
  • an ITM aqueous treatment formulation comprising: i. 1.5-5%, by weight, of at least one water soluble polymer having a solubility in water of at least 5% at 25° C.; ii. 5-15%, by weight, of a first non-ionic surfactant having a solubility in water of at least 7%, at 25° C.; and iii. 0.8-1.8% of a second non-ionic, silicone-containing surfactant having a solubility in water of at least 1%, at 25° C.; iv.
  • a carrier liquid containing water said water making up at least 55%, by weight of the aqueous treatment formulation; said aqueous treatment formulation optionally including at least one or both of: v. a water absorbing agent; and vi. polyethyleneimine (PEI).
  • PEI polyethyleneimine
  • the aqueous treatment formulation contains at least 6%, at least 7%, at least 8%, at least 9%, or at least 10%, by weight, of said first non-ionic surfactant.
  • the aqueous treatment formulation contains at most 18%, at most 16%, at most 15%, at most 14%, or at most 13%, by weight, of said first non-ionic surfactant.
  • the first non-ionic surfactant within said aqueous treatment formulation has a concentration within a range of 5.5-18%, 5.5-16%, 6.5-18%, 6.5-16%, 7.5-18%, 7.5-16%, 8.5-18%, 8.5-16%, 9.5-18%, 9.5-16%, 10.5-18%, or 10.5-16%.
  • the first non-ionic surfactant within the aqueous treatment formulation by weight, is within the range of 7.5-18%.
  • the first non-ionic surfactant within the aqueous treatment formulation, by weight is within the range of 8.5-16%.
  • the first non-ionic surfactant within the aqueous treatment formulation, by weight is within the range of 9.5-16%.
  • the second, non-ionic silicone-containing surfactant includes a polysiloxane-polyoxyalkylene copolymer, and wherein optionally, a concentration of said polysiloxane-polyoxyalkylene copolymer is at least 0.3%, at least 0.5%, at least 0.75%, or at least 1.0%, by weight, and further optionally, at most 5%, at most 4%, at most 3%, at most 2.5%, at most 2%, or at most 1.75%, by weight.
  • the second, non-ionic silicone-containing surfactant includes or is a polysiloxane-polyoxyalkylene copolymer.
  • the aqueous treatment formulation contains at least 0.3%, at least 0.5%, at least 0.75%, or at least 1.0%, by weight and optionally, at most 5%, at most 4%, at most 3%, at most 2.5%, at most 2%, or at most 1.75%, by weight, of said second, non-ionic silicone-containing surfactant. In some embodiments of any of the above aspects or embodiments thereof, the aqueous treatment formulation contains 0.3%-5% by weight, of said second, non-ionic silicone-containing surfactant. In some embodiments of any of the above aspects or embodiments thereof, the aqueous treatment formulation contains 0.5%-4% by weight, of said second, non-ionic silicone-containing surfactant. In some embodiments, the aqueous treatment formulation contains 0.75%-2% by weight, of said second, non-ionic silicone-containing surfactant.
  • a cloud point temperature of said first non-ionic surfactant is at least 60° C., at least 70° C., at least 80° C., at least 90° C., at least 100° C., at least 105° C., at least 110° C., at least 115° C., at least 120° C., or at least 130° C., optionally as determined by the ASTM D7689-11 test method.
  • the aqueous treatment formulation further includes at least one of, or both of: i. a water absorbing agent; and ii. a polyethyleneimine (PEI).
  • the aqueous treatment formulation includes a water absorbing agent.
  • the aqueous treatment formulation includes a polyethyleneimine (PEI).
  • the aqueous treatment formulation includes both a water absorbing agent and said polyethyleneimine (PEI).
  • the concentration of quaternary ammonium salt within said aqueous treatment formulation, by weight is at most 1%, at most 0.8%, at most 0.6%, at most 0.4%, at most 0.2%, at most 0.1%, at most 0.05%, or wherein the provided aqueous treatment formulation is devoid of said quaternary ammonium salt.
  • the concentration of quaternary ammonium salt within the aqueous treatment formulation, by weight is at most 1%.
  • the concentration of quaternary ammonium salt within the aqueous treatment formulation, by weight is at most 0.1%.
  • the aqueous treatment formulation is devoid of quaternary ammonium salt.
  • the water-soluble polymer is selected from at least one of the groups consisting of polyvinyl alcohol, water-soluble cellulose, polyvinylpyrrolidone (PVP), polyethylene oxide, and water-soluble acrylates.
  • PVP polyvinylpyrrolidone
  • the desired weight % concentration in the aqueous treatment formulation for example, to achieve an end concentration of water-soluble polymer of 2.0 to 8.0% by weight.
  • the water-soluble polymer is a polyvinyl alcohol. In some embodiments, the water-soluble polymer is a water-soluble cellulose. In some embodiments, the water-soluble polymer is a polyvinylpyrrolidone (PVP). In some embodiments, the water-soluble polymer is a polyethylene oxide. In some embodiments, the water-soluble polymer is a is water-soluble acrylate.
  • the concentration of polyethyleneimine within said aqueous treatment formulation, by weight is within a range of 0.1 to 1%, 0.1 to 0.8%, 0.1 to 0.7%, 0.1 to 0.6%, 0.1 to 0.5%, 0.2 to 0.7%, 0.2 to 0.6%, or 0.2 to 0.5%, or wherein an average molecular weight of said polyethyleneimine is at least 200,000, at least 350,000, at least 500,000, at least 700,000, and optionally, at most 3,000,000, at most 2,500,000, or at most 2,000,000 g/mol. In some embodiments, the concentration of polyethyleneimine within said aqueous treatment formulation, by weight, is within the range of 0.1 to 1%.
  • the concentration of polyethyleneimine within said aqueous treatment formulation, by weight is within the range of 0.1 to 0.8%. In some embodiments, the concentration of polyethyleneimine within said aqueous treatment formulation, by weight, is within the range of 0.1 to 0.7%. In some embodiments, the concentration of polyethyleneimine within said aqueous treatment formulation, by weight, is within the range of 0.1 to 0.6%. In some embodiment of any of the above aspects or embodiments thereof, the concentration of polyethyleneimine within said aqueous treatment formulation, by weight, is within the range of 0.1 to 0.5%.
  • the concentration of polyethyleneimine within said aqueous treatment formulation, by weight is within the range of 0.2 to 0.7%. In some embodiments of any of the above aspects or embodiments thereof, the concentration of polyethyleneimine within said aqueous treatment formulation, by weight, is within the range of 0.2 to 0.6%. In some embodiments of any of the above aspects or embodiments thereof, the concentration of polyethyleneimine within said aqueous treatment formulation, by weight, is within the range of 0.2 to 0.5%.
  • the average molecular weight of the polyethyleneimine is 200,000 to 3,000,000 g/mol. In some embodiments, the average molecular weight of the polyethyleneimine is 350,000 to 2,000,000 g/mol. In some embodiments, the average molecular weight of the polyethyleneimine is 500,000 to 2,000,000 g/mol. In some embodiments, the concentration of polyethyleneimine within said aqueous treatment formulation, by weight, is within the range of 0.1 to 1% and the average molecular weight of the polyethyleneimine is 200,000 to 3,000,000 g/mol.
  • the concentration of polyethyleneimine within said aqueous treatment formulation, by weight is within the range of 0.1 to 1% and the average molecular weight of the polyethyleneimine is 350,000 to 2,000.00 g/mol. In some embodiments of any of the above aspects or embodiments thereof, the concentration of polyethyleneimine within said aqueous treatment formulation, by weight, is within the range of 0.1 to 1% and the average molecular weight of the polyethyleneimine is 500,000 to 2,000,000 g/mol.
  • the concentration of polyethyleneimine within said aqueous treatment formulation, by weight is within the range of 0.1 to 1% and the average molecular weight of the polyethyleneimine is 200,000 to 3,000,000 g/mol. In some embodiments of any of the above aspects or embodiments thereof, the concentration of polyethyleneimine within said aqueous treatment formulation, by weight, is within the range of 0.1 to 0.5% and the average molecular weight of the polyethyleneimine is 350,000 to 2,000,000 g/mol.
  • the concentration of polyethyleneimine within said aqueous treatment formulation, by weight is within the range of 0.1 to 0.5% and the average molecular weight of the polyethyleneimine is 500,000 to 2,000,000 g/mol. In some embodiments of any of the above aspects or embodiments thereof, the concentration of polyethyleneimine within said aqueous treatment formulation, by weight, is within the range of 0.1 to 0.5% and the average molecular weight of the polyethyleneimine is 200,000 to 3,000,000 g/mol.
  • the concentration of polyethyleneimine within said aqueous treatment formulation, by weight is within the range of 0.2 to 0.5% and the average molecular weight of the polyethyleneimine is 350,000 to 2,000,000 g/mol. In some embodiments of any of the above aspects or embodiments thereof, the concentration of polyethyleneimine within said aqueous treatment formulation, by weight, is within the range of 0.2 to 0.5% and the average molecular weight of the polyethyleneimine is 500,000 to 2,000,000 g/mol.
  • the concentration of polyethyleneimine within said aqueous treatment formulation, by weight is within the range of 0.2 to 0.5% and the average molecular weight of the polyethyleneimine is 200,000 to 3,000,000 g/mol.
  • the concentration of polyethyleneimine within said aqueous treatment formulation and having an average molecular weight of 500,000 to 1,000,000 g/mol is within the range of 0.1 to 1%, by weight.
  • the concentration of polyethyleneimine within said aqueous treatment formulation and having an average molecular weight of 500,000 to 1,000,000 g/mol is within the range of 0.1 to 0.8%. In some embodiments of any of the above aspects or embodiments thereof, the concentration of polyethyleneimine within said aqueous treatment formulation and having an average molecular weight of 500,000 to 1,000,000 g/mol is within the range of 0.1 to 0.7%. In some embodiments of any of the above aspects or embodiments thereof, the concentration of polyethyleneimine within said aqueous treatment formulation and having an average molecular weight of 500,000 to 1,000,000 g/mol, is within the range of 0.1 to 0.6%.
  • the concentration of polyethyleneimine within said aqueous treatment formulation and having an average molecular weight of 500,000 to 1,000,000 g/mol is within the range of 0.1 to 0.5%. In some embodiments of any of the above aspects or embodiments thereof, the concentration of polyethyleneimine within said aqueous treatment formulation and having an average molecular weight of 500,000 to 1,000,000 g/mol is within the range of 0.2 to 0.7%. In some embodiments of any of the above aspects or embodiments thereof, the concentration of polyethyleneimine within said aqueous treatment formulation and having an average molecular weight of 500,000 to 1,000,000 g/mol is within the range of 0.2 to 0.6%. In some embodiments of any of the above aspects or embodiments thereof, the concentration of polyethyleneimine within said aqueous treatment formulation and having an average molecular weight of 500,000 to 1,000,000 g/mol is within the range of 0.2 to 0.5%.
  • the first non-ionic surfactant is, mainly includes, or includes a polyethoxylated sorbitan ester. In some embodiments of any of the above aspects or embodiments thereof, the first non-ionic surfactant is a polyethoxylated sorbitan ester. In some embodiments of any of the above aspects or embodiments thereof, the first non-ionic surfactant is mainly a polyethoxylated sorbitan ester. In some embodiments of any of the above aspects or embodiments thereof, the first non-ionic surfactant includes a polyethoxylated sorbitan ester.
  • the polyethoxylated sorbitan ester includes at least one species or at least two species selected from the group consisting of PEG- 4 sorbitan monolaurate, PEG- 20 sorbitan monolaurate, PEG- 20 sorbitan monopalmitate, PEG- 20 sorbitan monostearate, and PEG- 20 sorbitan monooleate.
  • an HLB number of said first non-ionic surfactant is at least 11, at least 12, at least 13, at least 14, or at least 14.5, and optionally, at most 22, at most 21, at most 20, at most 19, at most 18, or at most 17, and further optionally, within a range of 11 to 25, 11 to 23, 11.5 to 21, 11.5 to 20, 11.5 to 18, 12.5 to 21, 12.5 to 20, 12.5 to 18, 13.5 to 21, 13.5 to 20, 13.5 to 18, 14 to 20.5, 14 to 18.5, 14.5 to 20, 14.5 to 19, 14.5 to 18, or 14.5 to 17.5.
  • the HLB number of said first non-ionic surfactant is within the range of 11 to 25.
  • the HLB number of said first non-ionic surfactant is within the range of 14.5 to 20.
  • the a 60° C. evaporation load is at most 7.5:1, 7:1, 6:1, 5.5:1, 5:1, 4.5:1, 4:1, or 3.5:1, by weight, and optionally, wherein said evaporation load is at least 2:1, at least 2.2:1 or at least 2.5:1, and further optionally, wherein said evaporation load is within a range of 2:1 to 8:1, 2:1 to 6.5:1, 2.3:1 to 7:1, 2.3:1 to 5:1, 2.3:1 to 8:1, 2.3:1 to 6:1, 2.3:1 to 5:1, 2.3:1 to 4.5:1, 2.3:1 to 4:1, 2.3:1 to 3.5:1, 2.5:1 to 8:1, 2.5:1 to 6:1, 2.5:1 to 5:1, 2.5:1 to 4.5:1, 2.5:1 to 4:1, or 2.5:1 to 3.5:1.
  • the a 60° C. evaporation load is within a range of 2:1 to 6.5:1. In some embodiments of any of the above aspects or embodiments thereof, the a 60° C. evaporation load is within a range of 2.3:1 to 6:1. In some embodiments of any of the above aspects or embodiments thereof, the a 60° C. evaporation load is within a range of 2.3:1 to 5:1. In some embodiments of any of the above aspects or embodiments thereof the a 60° C. evaporation load is within a range of 2.3:1 to 4:1.
  • the concentration of said water soluble polymer is within a range of 2.0 to 8%, 2.5 to 6.5%, 2.5 to 6%, 2.5 to 5.5%, or 2.5 to 5%, by weight, and wherein said evaporation load is within a range of 2.3:1 to 4.5:1, 2.3:1 to 4:1, 2.5:1 to 4.2:1, 2.5:1 to 4:1, 2.5:1 to 3.8:1, or 2.5:1 to 3.6:1.
  • the concentration of the water soluble polymer is within the range of 2.0 to 8%, by weight.
  • the concentration of the water-soluble polymer is within the range of 2.5 to 5.5% by weight.
  • the concentration of the water-soluble polymer is within the range of 2.3:1 to 4.5:1% by weight.
  • the aqueous treatment formulation has a total surfactant concentration of at least 6%, at least 7%, at least 8%, at least 10%, or at least 12%, and optionally, within a range of 6 to 40%, 6 to 30%, 6 to 20%, 7 to 30%, 7 to 20%, 7 to 15%, 8 to 25%, 8 to 20%, 8 to 15%, 8 to 13%, 9 to 25%, 9 to 20%, 9 to 15%, 9 to 13%, 10 to 25%, 10 to 20%, 10 to 15%, or 10 to 13% by weight.
  • the aqueous treatment formulation has a total surfactant concentration within the range of 6 to 20% by weight.
  • the aqueous treatment formulation has a total surfactant concentration within the range of 8 to 20% by weight. In some embodiments, the aqueous treatment formulation has a total surfactant concentration within the range of 10 to 20% by weight. In some embodiments, the aqueous treatment formulation has a total surfactant concentration within the range of 10 to 15% by weight.
  • the solubility in water of said at least one water soluble polymer, at 25° C. is at least 7%, at least 10%, at least 12%, at least 15%, at least 20%, or at least 25%, and optionally, at most 80% or at most 60% by weight.
  • the solubility in water of said at least one water soluble polymer, at 25° C. is at least 10%, by weight.
  • the solubility in water of said at least one water soluble polymer, at 25° C. is at least 15%, by weight.
  • the solubility in water of at least one water soluble polymer, at 25° C. is at least 7%.
  • the solubility in water of said first non-ionic surfactant, at 25° C. is at least 8%, at least 10%, at least 12%, at least 15%, at least 20%, at least 25%, or at least 30%, and optionally, at most 80% or at most 60% by weight. In some embodiments of any of the above aspects or embodiments thereof, the solubility in water of said first non-ionic surfactant, at 25° C., is at least 12% by weight. In some embodiments of any of the above aspects or embodiments thereof, the solubility in water of said first non-ionic surfactant, at 25° C., is at least 20% by weight.
  • the formulation further comprises said water absorbing agent, selected whereby, when said aqueous treatment solution is evaporated to form a solid film, said water absorbing agent acts as a water absorber that absorbs water from said aqueous treatment solution.
  • the 25° C. viscosity is within a range of 10 cP to 100 cP, 10 cP to 80 cP, 10 cP to 50 cP, 10 cP to 30 cP, 13 cP to 100 cP, 13 cP to 80 cP, 13 cP to 50 cP, 13 cP to 30 cP, 15 cP to 100 cP, 15 cP to 80 cP, 15 cP to 50 cP, cP to 30 cP, 15 cP to 28 cP, 15 cP to 27 cP, or 15 cP to 26 cP.
  • the formulation further comprises said water absorbing agent.
  • the water absorbing agent is a solid, in a pure state, at least within a range of 25° C. to 60° C., whereby, when said aqueous treatment solution is evaporated to form a solid film, said water absorbing agent acts as a water absorber.
  • the concentration of said second non-ionic surfactant within said aqueous treatment formulation, by weight is within a range of 1-18%, 1-15%, 1-12%, 1-10%, 1-8%, 2-18%, 2-15%, 2-12%, 2-10%, 2-8%, 3-18%, 3-15%, 3-12%, 3-10%, 3-8%, or 4-18%, 4-15%, 4-12%, 4-10%, or 4-8%.
  • the aqueous treatment formulation has a static surface tension within the range of 22 to 36 dynes/cm, 22 to 32 dynes/cm, 22 to 30 dynes/cm, 22 to 28 dynes/cm, 24 to 36 dynes/cm, 24 to 32 dynes/cm, 24 to dynes/cm, or 24 to 28 dynes/cm at 25° C.
  • the static surface tension is within a range of 22 to 36 dynes/cm at 25° C.
  • the static surface tension is within a range of 24 to 32 dynes/cm at 25° C.
  • the total concentration of organic solvents within the provided aqueous treatment formulation is at most 3%, at most 2%, at most 1%, or at most 0.5% by weight or organic-solvent-free. In some embodiments of any of the above aspects or embodiments thereof, the formulation is organic-solvent-free. In some embodiments of any of the above aspects or embodiments thereof, the total concentration of organic solvents within the provided aqueous treatment formulation is at most 3% by weight. In some embodiments of any of the above aspects or embodiments thereof, the formulation is organic-solvent-free. In some embodiments of any of the above aspects or embodiments thereof, the total concentration of organic solvents within the provided aqueous treatment formulation is at most 1% by weight. In some embodiments of any of the above aspects or embodiments thereof, the aqueous treatment formulation is organic-solvent-free.
  • the silicone-based release layer surface is sufficiently hydrophilic such that: a receding contact angle of a drop of distilled water deposited on the silicone-based release layer surface is at most 60°. In some embodiments of the present invention, the silicone-based release layer surface is sufficiently hydrophilic such that: a 10-second dynamic contact angle (DCA) of a drop of distilled water deposited on the silicone-based release layer surface is at most 108°.
  • DCA dynamic contact angle
  • the silicone-based release layer surface is sufficiently hydrophilic such that both: a receding contact angle of a drop of distilled water deposited on the silicone-based release layer surface is at most 60° and a 10-second dynamic contact angle (DCA) of a drop of distilled water deposited on the silicone-based release layer surface is at most 108°.
  • DCA dynamic contact angle
  • the ITM comprises a support layer and a release layer having a silicone-based release layer surface and a second surface that (i) opposes said silicone-based release layer surface, and (ii) is attached to said support layer, and wherein said release layer is formed of an addition-cured silicone material, and wherein a thickness of said release layer being at most 500 micrometers ( ⁇ m).
  • the addition-cured silicone material consists essentially of an addition-cured silicone, or contains, by weight, at least 95% of said addition-cured silicone.
  • the functional groups within said silicone-based release layer surface of the provided ITM make up at most 3%, by weight, of said addition-cured silicone material.
  • a polyether glycol functionalized polydimethyl siloxane is impregnated in said addition-cured silicone material of the provided ITM.
  • the release layer of the provided ITM is adapted such that polar groups of the ink reception surface have an orientation away from or opposite from the second surface.
  • a surface hydrophobicity of the silicone-based release layer surface of the provided ITM is less than a bulk hydrophobicity of the cured silicone material within the release layer, the surface hydrophobicity being characterized by a receding contact angle of a droplet of distilled water on the ink reception surface, the bulk hydrophobicity being characterized by a receding contact angle of a droplet of distilled water disposed on an inner surface formed by exposing an area of the cured silicone material within the release layer to form an exposed area.
  • the aqueous treatment formulation is applied to the silicone-based release layer surface such that the thickness of the wet treatment layer is at most 0.5 ⁇ m, at most 0.4 ⁇ m, at most 0.3 ⁇ m, at most 0.2 ⁇ m, or at most 0.15 ⁇ m. In some embodiments of any of the above aspects or embodiments thereof the aqueous treatment formulation is applied to the silicone-based release layer surface such that the thickness of the wet treatment layer is at most 0.5 ⁇ m. In other embodiments, the aqueous treatment formulation is applied to the silicone-based release layer surface such that the thickness of the wet treatment layer is at most 0.3 ⁇ m.
  • the wet treatment layer is formed and/or thinned by urging a rounded surface towards the ITM or vice versa, wherein:
  • the formation of the wet treatment layer or thinning thereof comprises forcing the aqueous treatment formulation to flow such that a velocity gradient normal to the ITM is established, a magnitude of the velocity gradient being at least 10 6 sec ⁇ 1 or at least 2 ⁇ 10 6 sec ⁇ 1 .
  • the drying process of the wet treatment layer is sufficiently rapid such that the viscosity of the aqueous treatment formulation increases rapidly enough to inhibit surface-tension-driven beading such that the dried treatment film has a smooth upper surface.
  • the upper surface of the dried treatment film is characterized by an average roughness R a of at most 12 nanometers, or at most 10 nanometers, or at most 9 nanometers, or at most 8 nanometers, or at most 7 nanometers, or at most 4 nanometers, or at most 3 nanometers, and optionally, at least 1 nanometer, or at least 2 nanometers.
  • the drying of the treatment solution is performed sufficiently rapidly so as to prevent beading and so as leave a continuous hydrophilic and cohesive polymer treatment film having a thickness of at most 200 nm, or at most 150 nm, or at most 120 nm, or at most 100 nm, or at most 80 nm, or at most 70 nm, or at most 60 nm, or at most 50 nm, or at most 40 nm, or at most 30 nm.
  • the thickness of the dried treatment film to which the aqueous ink droplets are deposited is at most 200 nm, or at most 120 nm, or at most 100 nm, at most 80 nm, at most 70 nm, at most 60 nm, at most 50 nm, at most 45 nm, or at most 40 nm.
  • the thickness of the dried treatment film to which the aqueous ink droplets are deposited is at least 15 nm, or at least 20 nm, or at least 25 nm, or at least 30 nm. In some embodiments of any of the above aspects or embodiments thereof the dried treatment film is at most 120 nm. In some embodiments of any of the above aspects or embodiments thereof the dried treatment film is at most 80 nm. Thus, In some embodiments of any of the above aspects or embodiments thereof the thickness of the dried treatment film to which the aqueous ink droplets are deposited is at least 15 nm. In some embodiments of any of the above aspects or embodiments thereof the thickness of the dried treatment film to which the aqueous ink droplets are deposited is at least 25 nm.
  • the dried treatment film is continuous over an entirety of a rectangle of the release surface of the ITM, wherein said rectangle has a width of at least 10 cm and a length of at least 10 meters.
  • the dried treatment film for at least 50% or at least 75% or at least 90% or at least 95% at least 95% or at least 99% or 100% of an area of the rectangle, a thickness of the dried treatment film does not deviate from an average thickness value within the rectangle by more than 50% or more than 40% or more than 30%.
  • a dynamic viscosity thereof increases by at least a factor of 100 within a period of time of at most 250 milliseconds.
  • the ink-image residue is transferred together with non-printed areas of the dried treatment film onto the printing substrate.
  • the thickness of the dried treatment film is at most 120 nm.
  • the dried treatment film is sufficiently cohesive such that during transfer of the ink-image residue, the dried treatment film completely separates from the ITM and transfers to the printing substrate with the dried ink image, both in printed and non-printed areas.
  • the method is performed such that: i. an ink dot set IDS of ink substrate-residing ink dots is formed; ii. a droplet plurality DP of the aqueous ink droplets that are deposited the deformed droplets over the surface of the ITM has a maximum impact radius value R MAX_IMPACT ; iii. subsequent to impact, physiochemical forces spread the deformed droplets such that each ink dot of substrate-residing ink-dot set IDS has a dried-dot radius R DRIED_DOT_ onto the ITM-residing dried treatment film forms the ink dot set IDS of ink substrate-residing ink dots such that there is a correspondence between: A.
  • the method is performed such that: i. a droplet plurality DP of the droplets that are deposited onto the ITM-residing dried treatment film generates an ink-dot set IDS of substrate-residing ink dots (i.e. fixedly adhered to a top substrate surface), each droplet of the droplet plurality DP corresponding to a different respective substrate-residing ink-dot of the ink-dot set IDS; ii. each ink droplet of the droplet plurality DP is deposited, according to jetting parameters, onto the substrate; iii.
  • the jetting parameters together with the physicochemical properties of ink droplets of the droplet plurality DP collectively define an ink-jet-paper dot-radius R DIRECT-JETTING-ONTO-INK-JET-PAPER-THEORETICAL which is the radius of the ink-dot obtained if the ink droplets were directly ink-jetted onto ink-jet-paper instead of the dried treatment film; and iv.
  • a ratio between (A) the dried-dot radius R DRIED_DOT_ON_SUBSTRATE of the dots of the ink-dot set IDS and the (B) ink-jet-paper dot-radius R DIRECT-JETTING-ONTO-INK-JET-PAPER-THEORETICAL is at least 1.1.
  • the cardinality of the ink dot set is at least 5 or at least 10 or at least 20 or at least 50 or at least 100, each ink dot of the ink dot set being distinct on the substrate.
  • the ink dots of the ink dot set are contained within a square geometric projection projecting on the printing substrate, each ink-dot of the ink dot set being fixedly adhered to the surface of the printing substrate, all said ink dots within said square geometric projection being counted as individual members of the ink dot set IDS.
  • the method is performed such that: i. an ink dot set IDS of ink substrate-residing ink dots is formed; ii. a cardinality of the ink dot set is at least 5 or at least 10 or at least 20 or at least 50 or at least 100, each ink dot of the ink dot set being distinct on the substrate; iii. the ink dots of the ink dot set are contained within a square geometric projection projecting on the printing substrate, each ink-dot of the ink dot set being fixedly adhered to the surface of the printing substrate, all said ink dots within said square geometric projection being counted as individual members of the ink dot set IDS; iv.
  • each of said ink dots contains at least one colorant dispersed in an organic polymeric resin, each of said dots has an average thickness of less than 2,000 nm, and a diameter of 5 to 300 micrometers;
  • a mean deviation from convexity (DC dot mean ) of said ink dot set is at most 0.05, at most 0.04, at most 0.03, at most 0.025, at most 0.022, at most 0.02, at most 0.018, at most 0.017, at most 0.016, at most 0.015, or at most 0.014.
  • the aqueous treatment formulation is applied to at least portion(s) of the ITM that are in-motion at a velocity of at least 1 meters/second, at least 1.5 meters/second, at least 2 meters/second, at least 2.5 meters/second, at least 3 meters/second, and optionally at most 5.5 meters/second, at most 5.0 meters/second, at most 4.5 meters/second, or at most 4.0 meters/second, to form the wet treatment layer thereon.
  • the water-soluble-polymer concentration, by weight, within the provided aqueous treatment formulation is at most 10% or at most 8% or at most 6% or at most 5%.
  • the dried treatment film to which the aqueous ink droplets are deposited and a surface of the dried treatment film are characterized by a dimensionless ratio between (i) an average roughness R a and (ii) a thickness of the dried treatment layer, wherein said dimensionless ratio is at most 0.5, at most 0.4, at most 0.3, at most 0.25, at most 0.2, at most 0.15, or at most 0.1, and optionally, at least 0.02 or at least 0.03 or at least 0.04 or at least 0.05 or at least 0.06 or at least 0.07 or at least 0.08.
  • the method utilizes any of the blanket features provided herein.
  • the aqueous treatment formulation is applied to the ITM while the ITM is in motion, so that at least portion(s) thereof move at a velocity of at least 0.5 or at least 1 or at least 1.5 or at least 2 or at least 2.5 or at least 3 meter/sec (optionally at most 5.5 meter/sec, at most 5.0 meter/sec, at most 4.5 meter/sec, at most 4.0 meter/sec, or at most 3.8 meter/sec, and typically within a range of 0.5 to 5 meter/sec, 1 to 5 meter/sec, 1 to 4.5 meter/sec, 1 to 4 meter/sec, 1.5 to 5 meter/sec, 1.5 to 4.5 meter/sec, 1.5 to 4 meter/sec, 2 to 5 meter/sec, 2 to 4.5 meter/sec, 2.5 to 4.5 meter/sec, or 3 to 4.5 meter/sec; and (ii) the aqueous treatment formulation is applied to the in-motion portion(s)
  • the wet treatment layer is formed by applying force to the ITM from a highly-rounded surface having a radius of curvature of at most 5 mm or at most 3 mm or at most 2.5 mm or at most 2 mm or at most 1.75 mm or at most 1.5 mm or at most 1.25 mm or at most 1 mm.
  • the highly-rounded surface is a surface of a doctor blade.
  • the doctor blade is oriented in the cross-print direction and is urged against the ITM with a force density in the cross-print direction of at least 250 g/cm or at least 350 g/cm or at least 400 gm/cm and/or at most 1 kg/cm or at most 750 g/cm or at most 600 g/cm.
  • the urging is performed by applying a pressure between the substrate and the ITM, a magnitude of the pressure being at least 0.1 bar or at least 0.25 bar or at least 0.35 bar or at least 0.5 bar, and optionally at most 2 bar or at most 1.5 bar, or at most 1 bar.
  • the washing of the release surface of the ITM is performed using the aqueous treatment solution to dissolve any dry treatment film on the release layer.
  • a thickness of the wet treatment layer is at most 2 ⁇ m or at most 1.5 ⁇ m or at most 1 ⁇ m or at most 0.9 ⁇ m or at most 0.8 ⁇ m or at most 0.7 ⁇ m or at most 0.6 ⁇ m or at most 0.5 ⁇ m or at most 0.5 ⁇ m or at most 0.4 ⁇ m or at most 0.3 ⁇ m or at most 0.2 ⁇ m or at most 0.15 ⁇ m. In some embodiments of any of the above aspects or embodiments thereof, the thickness of the wet treatment layer is at most 0.5 ⁇ m. In some embodiments of any of the above aspects or embodiments thereof the aqueous treatment formulation has a thickness of at most 0.3 ⁇ m.
  • the wet treatment layer has a uniform thickness.
  • an entirety of the rectangle is covered by the wet treatment film such that thickness of the wet treatment film does not deviate from an average thickness value within the rectangle by more than 50% or more than 40% or more than 30% or more than 20% or more than 10% or more than 5% or more than 2.5% or more than 1%, wherein (i) a value of w is at least 10 or at least 20 or at least 30 and/or at most 100 or at most 80 or at most 60 and (ii) a value of/is at least 50 or at least 100 or at least 250 or at least 500 or at least 1000.
  • the drying of the treatment solution is performed sufficiently rapidly to prevent beading and leave a continuous hydrophilic and cohesive polymer treatment film having a thickness (e.g. a substantially uniform thickness) of at most 150 nm, or at most 120 nm, or at most 100 nm, or at most 80 nm, or at most 70 nm, or at most 60 nm, or at most 50 nm, or at most 40 nm, or at most nm.
  • a thickness e.g. a substantially uniform thickness
  • a thickness of the dried treatment layer may be at least 20 nanometers or at least nanometers or at least 40 nanometers or at least 50 nanometers.
  • a thickness of the dried treatment layer may be at least 20 nanometers or at least nanometers or at least 40 nanometers or at least 50 nanometers.
  • providing this much ‘bulk’ i.e. minimum thickness features—e.g. together with other feature(s) described below
  • a thickness of the dried treatment film to which ink droplets are deposited is at most 200 nm, or at most 150 nm, or at most 100 nm, or at most 90 nm, or at most 80 nm, or at most 70 nm, or at most 60 nm, or at most 50 nm or at most 30 nm.
  • the aqueous treatment formulation is applied to the silicone-based release layer surface such that the thickness of the wet treatment layer is at most 50 nm.
  • the aqueous treatment formulation is applied to the silicone-based release layer surface such that the thickness of the wet treatment layer is at most nm.
  • a thickness of the dried treatment film to which ink droplets are deposited is at least 15 nm or at least 20 nm or at least 30 nm or at least 50 nm or at least 75 nm.
  • the dried treatment film is continuous over an entirety of a rectangle of the release surface of the ITM, wherein the rectangle has a width of at least w cm and a length of at least l cm, wherein (i) a value of w is at least 10 or at least 20 or at least 30 and/or at most 100 or at most 80 or at most 60 and (ii) a value of l is at least 50 or at least 100 or at least 250 or at least 500 or at least 1000.
  • the dried treatment film is continuous, so that for at least 50% or at least 75% or at least 90% or at least 95% or at least 99% or 100% of an area of the rectangle, a thickness of the dried treatment film does not deviate from an average thickness value within the rectangle by more than 50% or more than 40% or more than 30% or more than 20% or more than 10% or more than 5% or more than 2.5% or more than 1%.
  • a dynamic viscosity thereof increases by at least a factor of 100, within a period of time that is at most 1 second or at most 500 milliseconds or at most 250 milliseconds or at most 150 milliseconds, or at most 100 milliseconds or at most 75 milliseconds or at most 50 milliseconds or at most 25 milliseconds or at most 15 milliseconds or at most 10 milliseconds.
  • a liquid content of the dried treatment film is at most 10% wt/wt or at most 7.5% wt/wt or at most 5% wt/wt or at most 2.5% wt/wt or at most 1.5% wt/wt or at most 1% wt/wt.
  • the drying process removes at least 80% wt/wt or at least 90% wt/wt or at least 95% wt/wt of water in the wet treatment layer (e.g. within a period of time that is at most 1 second or at most 0.5 seconds or at most 100 milliseconds or at most 50 milliseconds or at most 25 milliseconds or at most 10 milliseconds) so as to form the dried treatment film.
  • the drying process removes at least 80% wt/wt or at least 90% wt/wt or at least 95% wt/wt of 60 degrees C./one atm liquid of the wet treatment layer so as to form the dried treatment film.
  • a surface e.g. upper surface of
  • the dried treatment film to which the aqueous ink droplets are deposited is characterized by an average roughness R a (a commonly used one-dimensional average roughness parameter) of at most 30 nanometers or at most 25 nanometers or at most 20 nanometers or at most 18 nanometers or at most 16 nanometers or at most 15 nanometers or at most 14 nanometers or at most 12 nanometers or at most 10 nanometers or at most 9 nanometers or at most 8 nanometers or at most 7 nanometers or at most 5 nanometers, and/or at least 3 nanometers or at least 5 nanometers.
  • R a a commonly used one-dimensional average roughness parameter
  • the dried treatment film to which the aqueous ink droplets are deposited and a surface (e.g. upper surface of) of the dried treatment film are characterized by a dimensionless ratio between (i) an average roughness R a and (ii) a thickness of the dried treatment layer, wherein the dimensionless ratio is at least 0.02 or at least 0.03 or at least 0.04 or at least 0.05 or at least 0.06 or at least 0.07 or at least 0.08 or at least 0.09 or at least 0.10 or at least 0.11 or at least 0.12 or at least 0.13 or at least 0.14 or at least 0.15 or at least 0.16 or at least 0.17 or at least 0.18 or at least 0.19 or at least 0.2.
  • the dried treatment film to which the aqueous ink droplets are deposited and a surface (e.g. upper surface of) of the dried treatment film are characterized by a dimensionless ratio between (i) an average roughness R a and (ii) a thickness of the dried treatment layer, wherein the dimensionless ratio is at most 0.5, at most 0.4, at most 0.3, at most 0.25, at most 0.2, at most 0.15, or at most 0.1, and optionally, at least 0.02 or at least 0.03 or at least 0.04 or at least 0.05 or at least 0.06 or at least 0.07 or at least 0.08.
  • the aqueous treatment formulation is provided in the form of a solution.
  • the aqueous treatment formulation is provided in the form of a dispersion.
  • solids (e.g. nano-pigments and/or resins) of the aqueous ink migrate into the bulk of the dried treatment film to interact with non-ionic surfactants such as polyethoxylated sorbitan ester residing within the dried treatment film (e.g. so as to promote droplet spreading).
  • the substrate is selected from the group consisting of an uncoated fibrous printing substrate, a commodity coated fibrous printing substrate, and a plastic printing substrate.
  • the printing substrate is a paper, optionally selected from the group of papers consisting of bond paper, uncoated offset paper, coated offset paper, copy paper, groundwood paper, coated groundwood paper, freesheet paper, coated freesheet paper, and laser paper.
  • the transfer is performed at a transfer-temperature of at most 120° C., or at most 110° C., or at most 100° C., or at most 90° C. or most 80° C.
  • the method is performed so as to form an ink dot set IDS of ink substrate-residing ink dots.
  • the method is performed so that a droplet plurality DP of the aqueous ink droplets that are deposited onto the ITM-residing dried treatment film forms the ink dot set IDS of ink substrate-residing ink dots such that there is a correspondence between (i) each given droplet of the droplet plurality DP and (ii) a respective given substrate-residing ink-dot of the ink-dot set such that the given droplet results in and/or evolves into the given substrate-residing ink-dot.
  • the method is performed so that during deposition, whenever a droplet of the droplet plurality collides with the dried treatment film on the ITM, kinetic energy of the colliding droplet deforms the droplet.
  • the method is performed so that: (i) a maximum impact radius of each of the deformed droplets over the surface of the ITM has a maximum impact radius value R MAX_IMPACT and (ii) subsequent to impact and/or during transfer and/or after transfer, physiochemical forces spread the deformed droplets or dots derived therefrom so that each ink dot of substrate-residing ink-dot set IDS has a dried-dot radius R DRIED_DOT_ON_SUBSTRATE ;
  • the method is performed such that: i. a droplet plurality DP of the droplets that are deposited onto the ITM-residing dried treatment film generates an ink-dot set IDS of substrate-residing ink dots (i.e. fixedly adhered to a top substrate surface), each droplet of the droplet plurality DP corresponding to a different respective substrate-residing ink-dot of the ink-dot set IDS; ii. each ink droplet of the droplet plurality DP is deposited, according to jetting parameters, onto the substrate; iii.
  • the jetting parameters together with the physicochemical properties of ink droplets of the droplet plurality DP collectively define an ink-jet-paper dot-radius R DIRECT-JETTING-ONTO-INK-JET-PAPER-THEORETICAL which is the radius of the ink-dot obtained if the ink droplets were directly inn-jetted onto ink-jet-paper instead of the dried treatment film; and iv.
  • a ratio between (A) the dried-dot radius R DRIED_DOT_ON_SUBSTRATE of the dots of the ink-dot set IDS and the (B) ink-jet-paper dot-radius R DIRECT-JETTING-ONTO-INK-JET-PAPER-THEORETICAL is at least 1 or at least 1.01 or at least 1.02 or at least 1.03 or at least 1.04 or at least 1.05 or at least 1.1 or at least 1.15 or at least 1.2 or at least 1.25 or at least 1.3 or at least 1.35 or at least 1.4 or at least 1.45 or at least 1.5 and optionally, at most 2, at most 1.8, at most 1.7, at most 1.6, or at most 1.55.
  • a cardinality of the ink dot set is at least 5 or at least 10 or at least 20 or at least 50 or at least 100, each ink dot of the ink dot set being distinct on the substrate.
  • the method is performed so that: the ink dots of the ink dot set are contained within a square geometric projection projecting on the printing substrate, each ink-dot of the ink dot set being fixedly adhered to the surface of the printing substrate, all the ink dots within the square geometric projection being counted as individual members of the ink dot set IDS.
  • each of the ink dots contains at least one colorant dispersed in an organic polymeric resin, each of the dots having an average thickness of less than 2,000 nm, and a diameter of 5 to 300 micrometers.
  • the method is performed such that the aspect ratio is at most 400, at most 350, or at most 325.
  • the method is performed so that: at least one (or at least a majority of or all of) of the ink dots of the ink dot set IDS contains less than 2% of charge directors.
  • the method is performed so that: at least one (or at least a majority of or all of) of the ink dots of the ink dot set IDS being devoid of charge directors.
  • the method is performed so that: at least one (or at least a majority of or all of) the ink dots of the ink dot set IDS has a thickness being at most at most 1,500 nm or at most 1000 nm or at most 800 nm or at most 600 nm or at most 400 nm or at most 350 nm or at most 300 nm or at most 250 nm.
  • the method is performed so that: at least one (or at least a majority of or all of) the ink dots of the ink dot set IDS contains at least 1.2% of the colorant, by weight.
  • the method is performed so that: at least one (or at least a majority of or all) of the ink dots of the ink dot set IDS contains at least 5% of the resin, by weight.
  • the method is performed so that: at least one (or at least a majority of or all) of the ink dots of the ink dot set IDS is such that a total concentration of the colorant and the resin within the ink dots is at least 40%.
  • the method is performed so that the weight ratio of the resin to the colorant within the ink dots is at least 1:1.
  • the method is performed so that the ink dots of the ink drop set has a first dynamic viscosity within a range of 10 6 cP to 3 ⁇ 10 8 cP for a temperature within a range of 90° C. to 195° C.
  • the method is performed so that the first dynamic viscosity is at most 7 ⁇ 10 7 cP.
  • the method is performed so that: the first dynamic viscosity is within a range of 10 6 cP to 10 8 cP. In some embodiments of any of the above aspects or embodiments thereof, the method is performed so that: the first dynamic viscosity is at least 4 ⁇ 10 6 cP.
  • the method is performed so that at least one ink dot (or at least a majority of or all of the ink dots) is a plurality of continuous ink dots.
  • the method is performed so that: for at least one ink dot (or at least a majority of or all of the ink dots), a dot thickness is at most 1,200 nm, or at most 1,000 nm, or at most 800 nm or at most 650 nm or at most 500 nm or at most 450 nm or at most 400 nm.
  • the method is performed so that the ITM is any ITM disclosed herein and/or the aqueous conditioning solution is any aqueous conditioning solution disclosed herein.
  • the aqueous ink comprises a pigment, binder, dispersant and at least one additive.
  • FIG. 1 is a flow chart of a prior art printing process
  • FIGS. 2 and 12 are flow charts of a printing process in accordance with some embodiments of the invention.
  • FIGS. 3 A- 3 D, 4 A- 4 B, 5 , 6 - 9 , 10 A- 10 B and 11 A- 11 C illustrate printing systems or components thereof;
  • FIG. 11 D illustrates shear intensity as a function of location
  • FIGS. 13 A- 13 E schematically describe a process whereby an ink droplet is deposited on an ITM (e.g. a release surface thereof);
  • FIG. 14 schematically shows a section through a carrier
  • FIGS. 15 to 19 schematically exhibit different stages in the manufacture of an ITM, according to the present method
  • FIG. 20 is a section through a finished ITM after installation in a printing system
  • FIGS. 21 A and 21 B schematically illustrate a cross section through a release layer prepared according to the prior art
  • FIG. 21 C schematically illustrates a cross section through a release layer prepared according to the present method.
  • FIGS. 22 A to 22 D schematically display an apparatus in which some embodiments of the present method can be implemented, different manufacturing stages being illustrated.
  • FIG. 2 is a flow-chart of a method of indirect printing by an aqueous ink onto a silicone-based release later surface of an intermediate transfer member (ITM).
  • the method of FIG. 2 (or any combination of steps thereof) may be performed using apparatus (or component(s) thereof) disclosed in FIGS. 3 A- 3 B, 4 A- 4 B, 5 - 9 , 10 A- 10 B and 11 A- 11 C .
  • embodiments of the invention relate to methods and apparatus useful for producing a wet treatment layer of uniform sub-micron thickness over large areas of the ITM and/or at high print speeds.
  • FIG. 2 may be performed to produce an ink image characterized by any combination of the following features: uniform and controlled dot gain, good and uniform print gloss, and good image quality due to high quality dots having consistent dot convexity and/or well-defined boundaries.
  • Steps S 201 -S 205 relate to the ingredients or components or consumables used in the printing process of FIG. 2 , while steps S 209 -S 225 relate to the process itself.
  • an ITM i.e. comprising a silicone-based release layer surface
  • an aqueous treatment formulation e.g. a solution
  • the aqueous treatment formulation is applied to the release layer surface of the ITM to form thereon a wet treatment layer.
  • the wet treatment layer is subjected to a drying process to form therefrom a dried treatment film on the ITM.
  • step S 217 droplets of aqueous ink are deposited onto this dried treatment film to form an ink image on the ITM surface.
  • this ink image is dried to leave an ink-image residue on the ITM surface, and in step S 225 this ink-image residue is transferred to the printing substrate.
  • Embodiments of the invention relate to methods, apparatus and kits for achieving the potentially-competing goals of dot gain, image gloss and dot quality, preferably in a production environment in which high print speed is paramount. According to some embodiments, the inventors have found that it is useful to perform the method of FIG. 2 so that the dried treatment film formed in step S 213 is very thin (e.g.
  • non-ionic surfactants such as polyethoxylated sorbitan esters (e.g. to promote dot gain) and/or having properties (i.e. properties of the film per se, or of the film relative to the ITM surface) that promote good transfer from the ITM to substrate.
  • thicker treatment films may negatively impact gloss or a uniformity thereof, since after transfer the dried ink residue may reside beneath the treatment film and on the substrate surface. Therefore, it may be preferred to produce a treatment film that is very thin.
  • discontinuities in the treatment film and/or treatment film of varying thickness may yield images of a non-uniform gloss on the substrate or may produce an ink-image residue (in step S 113 ) that loses its mechanical integrity upon transfer to substrate. Therefore, it may be preferred to produce a treatment film that is continuous over large areas—preferably, sufficiently cohesive to retain structural integrity when to the printing substrate and/or having thermorheological properties so the treatment film is tacky at transfer temperatures between 75 degrees and 150 degrees Celsius.
  • Embodiments of the invention relate to techniques for achieving these results simultaneously, even if they entail potentially-competing goals.
  • the need for the treatment film to be very thin makes it more challenging to form a treatment film that is continuous over a large area and/or sufficiently cohesive for good transfer to substrate and/or having a very smooth and uniform upper surface.
  • the release surface thereof may be less hydrophobic or appreciably less hydrophobic than many conventional silicone based release layers. This structural property can be measured and characterized in various ways.
  • the intermediate transfer member (ITM) comprises a silicone-based release layer surface that is sufficiently hydrophilic to satisfy at least one of the following properties: (i) a receding contact angle of a drop of distilled water deposited on the silicone-based release layer surface is at most 60′; and (ii) a 10-second dynamic contact angle (DCA) of a drop of distilled water deposited on the silicone-based release layer surface is at most 108°.
  • Any one of a number of techniques for reducing the hydrophobicity of the silicone based release layer may be employed.
  • polar functional groups are introduced into and/or generated in the silicone based release layer.
  • functional groups may be added to the pre-polymeric batch (e.g. monomers in solution)—these functional groups may, upon curing, become integral part of the silicone polymer network.
  • the silicone-based release layer is pre-treated (e.g. by a corona discharge, or by an electron beam), thereby increasing a surface energy thereof.
  • the silicone based release layer may be manufactured to have a reduced hydrophobicity, even when substantially devoid of functional groups.
  • the silicone polymer backbone of the release layer may be structured so that the polar groups thereof (e.g., O—Si—O) are oriented in a direction that is generally normal to the local plane of the ITM surface and facing ‘upwards’ towards the release layer surface.
  • step S 225 the inventors believe that the technique of the previous paragraph may provide superior image-transfer (step S 225 ).
  • a static surface tension of the aqueous treatment formulation is within a range of 20 and 40 dynes/cm.
  • the aqueous treatment formulation comprises one or more surfactants.
  • the aqueous treatment formulation of step S 205 is less hydrophilic than many conventional treatment solutions, and significantly less hydrophilic than water.
  • the combination of (i) a silicone based release layer having a reduced hydrophobicity (step S 201 ) and (ii) an aqueous treatment formulation having a reduced hydrophilicity reduces (but does not necessarily eliminate) surface-tension effects which promote beading of the conventional aqueous treatment solution.
  • the aqueous treatment formulation provided in step S 205 has the following properties:
  • the 25° C. dynamic viscosity of initial aqueous treatment formulation may be at least 12 cP or at least 14 cP—for example, within a range of 10 to 100 cP, 12 to 100 cP, 14 to 100 cP, 10 to 60 cP, or 12 to 40 cP.
  • the aqueous treatment formulation comprises a carrier liquid containing water, the water making up at least 65% (e.g. at least 70% or at least 75%), by weight of the aqueous treatment formulation;
  • step S 209 the aqueous treatment formulation is applied to the silicone-based release layer surface of the ITM to form thereon a wet treatment layer having a thickness of at most 0.8 ⁇ m (e.g. at most 0.7 ⁇ m, or at most 0.6 ⁇ m, or at most 0.5 ⁇ m).
  • the “thickness of a wet layer” is defined as follows—when a volume of material vol covers a surface area of a surface having an area SA with a wet layer, the thickness of the wet layer is assumed to be vol/SA.
  • step S 209 is performed so that the wet treatment layer has a uniform thickness and is defect free, preferably over a large area such as over the entire area of the release layer. This may be particularly challenging when the wet treatment layer is of sub-micron thickness.
  • the aqueous treatment formulation it is useful for the aqueous treatment formulation to have at least ‘moderate viscosity’ (e.g. a 25° C. dynamic viscosity that is at least 10 cP) in order to counteract beading. Nevertheless, there may be challenges associated with obtaining a layer of uniform, sub-micron thickness of the aqueous treatment formulation at such viscosities.
  • moderate viscosity e.g. a 25° C. dynamic viscosity that is at least 10 cP
  • step S 209 an aqueous treatment formulation is applied to the silicone-based release layer surface to form a wet treatment layer having a thickness of at most 0.8 ⁇ M.
  • Embodiments of the invention relate to apparatus and methods for applying this wet treatment layer so that the thickness is uniform, preferably over large areas of the ITM.
  • excess treatment formulation may be removed from the initial coating or obtain a wet treatment layer having a uniform thickness of at most 0.8 ⁇ M.
  • this may be accomplished by urging a highly-rounded surface (e.g. of a doctor blade) towards the ITM or vice versa.
  • a radius of curvature of the highly-rounded surface may be at most 1.5 mm or at most 1.25 mm or at most 1 mm.
  • the removing of excess liquid to form the treatment layer having a sub-micron thickness may entail establishing a relatively large velocity gradient (i.e. shear) in the gap region (e.g. the velocity gradient is normal to the ITM surface) in the between the highly surface and the ITM—e.g. a velocity gradient of at least 10 6 sec ⁇ 1 or at least 2 ⁇ 10 6 sec ⁇ 1 .
  • a relatively large velocity gradient i.e. shear
  • the 25° C. dynamic viscosity of treatment formulation may be at least 10 cP. Even if step S 209 is performed at a higher temperature, the dynamic viscosity at these higher temperatures may be at least 3 cP or at least 5 cP or at least 10 cP.
  • a relatively large force is required (e.g. force to urge the highly-rounded surface towards the ITM or vice versa) to achieve the requisite uniform sub-0.8 ⁇ M (preferably) uniform thickness.
  • the rounded surface is urged to the ITM or vice versa, at a force density in the cross-print direction of at least 250 g/cm or at least 350 g/cm or at least 400 gm/cm and/or at most 1 kg/cm or at most 750 g/cm or at most 600 g/cm.
  • the wet treatment layer is formed by applying a pressure between an applicator and the ITM, a magnitude of the pressure being at least 0.1 bar or at least 0.25 bar or at least 0.35 bar or at least 0.5 bar, and optionally at most 2 bar or at most 1.5 bar, or at most 1 bar.
  • step S 213 the wet treatment layer is subjected to a drying process form a dried treatment film therefrom.
  • a dynamic viscosity thereof increases by at least a factor of 1000 within a period of time of at most 0.5 seconds or at most 0.25 seconds.
  • a thickness of the dried treatment film is at most 150 nanometers, or at most 120 nanometers, or at most 100 nanometers, or at most 80 nanometers, or at most 60 nanometers.
  • the dried treatment film has a smooth upper surface.
  • the drying process of the wet treatment layer is sufficiently rapid such that the viscosity of the aqueous treatment formulation increases rapidly enough to inhibit surface-tension-driven beading such that the dried treatment film has a smooth upper surface.
  • the smooth upper surface of the dried treatment film is characterized by an average roughness R a of at most 12 nanometers or at most 10 nanometers or at most 9 nanometers or at most 8 nanometers or at most 7 nanometers or at most 5 nanometers.
  • R a average roughness
  • the dried treatment film is continuous over an entirety of a rectangle of the release surface of the ITM, wherein the rectangle has a width of at least 10 cm and a length of at least 10 meters.
  • the treatment film is transparent.
  • One of the purposes of the dried treatment film is to protect the ITM surface from direct contact with droplets of aqueous ink deposited on the treatment film.
  • droplets of aqueous inks could ‘erode through’ a thickness of the dried treatment film, especially when the dried treatment film is thin (e.g. at most 150 or at most 120 or at most 100 or at most 80 nanometers).
  • a water-soluble-polymer concentration, by weight, of water soluble polymer within the provided aqueous treatment formulation is at most 10% or at most 8% or at most 6% or at most 5% by weight.
  • step S 217 droplets of aqueous ink are deposited (e.g. by ink-droplet deposition) onto the dried treatment film to form an ink image on the ITM surface.
  • this ink image is dried to leave an ink-image residue on the ITM surface.
  • a presence of non-ionic surfactants such as in the dried treatment film is useful for promoting dot spreading and/or dot gain (e.g. uniform dot spreading and/or dot gain) when the droplets are deposited or immediately thereafter—the skilled artisan is directed to the discussion below with reference to FIGS. 12 A- 12 E .
  • the formation (in step S 213 ) of a dried treatment film of uniform thickness and/or free of defects and/or having a very smooth upper surface may facilitate uniform flow of aqueous ink on the film upper surface.
  • step SS 25 the ink-image residue is transferred to substrate.
  • the ink-image residue may be transferred together with non-printed areas of the dried treatment film onto the printing substrate.
  • the dried treatment film is sufficiently cohesive such that during transfer of the ink-image residue, the dried treatment film completely separates from the ITM and transfers to the printing substrate with the dried ink image, both in printed and non-printed areas.
  • a temperature of the ITM during transfer is in the range between 80° C. and 120° C. In some embodiments, the ITM temperature is at most 100° C. or at most 90° C. In some embodiments, the ITM temperature is at least 100° C. or at least 110° C. or at least 120° C.
  • a presence of water-soluble polymers in the aqueous treatment solution provided in step S 205 helps to ensure (i.e. by forming a polymer film or matrix) that the dried treatment film formed in step S 213 is sufficiently cohesive during transfer.
  • the substrate to which the ink image residue is glossy paper—e.g. glossy coated paper.
  • the transfer may be perfect (i.e. an entirety of the ink image residue and the dried treatment film is transferred to substrate). Alternatively, the transfer may be less than perfect—towards this end, a cleaning station may clean away material remaining on the ITM surface after the transfer step of S 225 .
  • FIG. 3 A is a schematic diagram of a system for indirect printing according to some embodiments of the present invention.
  • the system of FIG. 3 A comprises an intermediate transfer member (ITM) 210 comprising a flexible endless belt mounted over a plurality of guide rollers 232 , 240 , 250 , 253 , 242 .
  • the ITM 220 is a drum or a belt wrapped around a drum.
  • the ITM 210 moves in the clockwise direction.
  • the direction of belt movement defines upstream and downstream directions.
  • Rollers 242 , 240 are respectively positioned upstream and downstream of the image forming station 212 —thus, roller 242 may be referred to as a “upstream roller” while roller 240 may be referred to as a “downstream roller”.
  • the system of FIG. 3 A further comprises:
  • impression station 216 comprises an impression cylinder 220 and a blanket cylinder 218 that carries a compressible blanket 219 .
  • a heater 231 may be provided shortly prior to the nip between the two cylinders 218 and 220 of the image transfer station to assist in rendering the ink film tacky, so as to facilitate transfer to the substrate (e.g. sheet substrate or web substrate).
  • the substrate feed is illustrated schematically.
  • FIG. 3 B illustrates a plurality of ‘locations’ LOC A -Loc J . that are fixed in space—Loc A is at roller 242 , Loc B is at the ‘beginning’ of image station 212 , Loc C is at the ‘end’ of image station 212 , and so on.
  • ink images e.g. in step S 217 of FIG. 2
  • the ink images are dried (e.g. see step S 221 of FIG. 2 or step S 105 of FIG.
  • step S 225 of FIG. 2 or step S 117 of FIG. 12 Material remaining on the surface of the ITM 210 after transfer of the ink image residues may be cleaned from the surface of the ITM 210 at cleaning station 258 between Loc G and Loc H .
  • a wet treatment layer may be formed in step S 209 of FIG. 2 (or step S 101 of FIG.
  • the portion of the ITM between locations Loc A and Loc D are an upper run of the ITM 210 (i.e of a belt thereof).
  • This upper run (illustrated in FIG. 3 C ) is between (i) an upstream guide roller 242 that is upstream to image forming station 212 and (ii) a downstream guide roller 240 that is downstream to image forming station.
  • the upper run passes though the image forming station 212 .
  • a lower run of the ITM is between locations Loc D and Loc A of ITM 210 and is illustrated in FIG. 3 D .
  • This lower run passes through impression station 216 , cleaning station 258 and treatment station 260 .
  • FIG. 4 A One example of a treatment station is shown in FIG. 4 A .
  • the ITM 210 is moved from right to left as viewed, as represented by an arrow 2012 , over a doctor blade that is generally designated 2014 and is suitably mounted within a tank 2016 .
  • the doctor blade 2014 is of the doctor rod type and is formed of a rigid bar or holder 2020 that extends across the entire width of the ITM 210 .
  • the bar 2020 is formed with a channel or groove 24 within which there is supported a rod 2022 made of fused quartz and having a smooth and regular cylindrical surface with a roughness of no more than a few microns, preferably less than 10 microns and in particular less than 0.5 microns.
  • the underside of the ITM 210 Prior to passing over the doctor blade 2014 , the underside of the ITM 210 (or lower run) is coated with an excess of treatment formulation (e.g. solution) 2030 (e.g. provided in step S 205 of FIG. 2 or step S 95 of FIG. 12 ).
  • an excess of treatment formulation e.g. solution
  • the manner in which the excess of treatment formulation (e.g. solution) is applied to the ITM 210 is described below by reference to FIG. 5 , but is not of fundamental importance to the present invention.
  • the ITM 210 may for example simply be immersed in a tank containing the liquid, passed over a fountain of the treatment formulation (e.g. solution), or, as shown in FIG. 5 , sprayed with an upwardly directed jet 1128 .
  • a liquid-permeable cloth is placed above upwardly directed spray heads, so that the liquid seeps through the cloth and forms a layer on the side of the cloth facing the surface to be coated.
  • the spray heads will act to urge the cloth towards the surface, but it will be prevented by the liquid seeping through it from contacting the surface, the liquid acting in the same manner as in a hydrodynamic bearing.
  • the ITM 210 As shown in the drawing, as the ITM 210 approaches the doctor blade 2014 it has a coating 2030 of liquid that is significantly greater than the desired thickness of the thin film that is to be applied to the ITM 210 .
  • the function of the doctor blade 2014 is to remove excess liquid 2030 from the ITM 210 and ensure that the remaining liquid is spread evenly and uniformly over the entire surface of the ITM 210 .
  • the ITM 210 is urged towards the doctor blade 2014 , for example by means of air pressure (NOT SHOWN).
  • the force urging the ITM 210 towards the doctor blade 2014 may be a backing roller 2014 , such as a compressible (e.g. sponge) roller in some embodiments, pressing down on the upper or opposite side of the web, either by virtue of its own weight or by the action of springs.
  • the doctor blade 2014 may itself be urged towards the ITM 210 while the latter is maintained under tension.
  • the tip of the doctor blade 2014 being constituted by a cylindrical smooth rod 2022 , has a uniform radius over the width of the ITM 210 and its smoothness ensures laminar flow of the liquid in the gap between it and the underside of the ITM 210 .
  • the nature of the flow may be similar to that of the liquid lubricant in a hydrodynamic bearing and reduces the film of liquid 2030 that remains adhering to the underside of the ITM 210 (i.e. the surface of a low run′ of the ITM) to a thickness dependent upon the force urging the ITM against the doctor blade 2014 and the radius of curvature of the rod 2022 .
  • the resulting film is uniform and its thickness can be set by appropriate selection of the applied force and the rod diameter.
  • the excess of liquid removed by the doctor blade 2014 creates a small pool 2032 immediately upstream of the rod 2022 before falling into the tank 2016 .
  • the surface of the ITM 210 to be coated with liquid may face upwards instead of downwards.
  • the liquid instead of applying an excess of liquid to the ITM 210 (i.e. the surface of a low run′ of the ITM), the liquid may be metered onto the surface to develop and maintain a similar small pool of liquid upstream of the line of contact between the wiper blade and the surface on the upper side of the web.
  • Air knives may be provided in this case to prevent treatment formulation (e.g. solution) from the pool from spilling over the lateral edges of the ITM 210 .
  • pool 2032 provides a constant supply of treatment formulation (e.g. solution) across the entire width of the ITM 210 so that all areas of the ITM 210 are coated even if the liquid has been, for any reason, repelled (e.g. due to ‘beading’) from parts of the surface of the web prior to reaching the doctor blade 2014 .
  • treatment formulation e.g. solution
  • the tank 2016 into which the surplus treatment formulation (e.g. solution) falls may be the main reservoir tank from which liquid is drawn to coat the underside of the web with an excess of treatment formulation (e.g. solution) or it may be a separate tank that is drained into the main reservoir tank and/or emptied to suitable discard systems.
  • the surplus treatment formulation e.g. solution
  • the tank 2016 into which the surplus treatment formulation (e.g. solution) falls may be the main reservoir tank from which liquid is drawn to coat the underside of the web with an excess of treatment formulation (e.g. solution) or it may be a separate tank that is drained into the main reservoir tank and/or emptied to suitable discard systems.
  • the rod 2022 is made of a hard material such as fused quartz in order to resist abrasion. There may be small particles of grit or dust in the liquid which could damage the rounded edge over which the liquid flows. It would be possible to use materials other than fused quartz, but the material should preferably have a Brinell hardness in excess of 100 (e.g. in excess of 200, or in excess of 500, or even in excess of 1000). In embodiments of the invention, the material should be capable of being formed into a smooth rod of uniform diameter and a surface roughness of less than 10 micron, in particular of less than 0.5 micron.
  • the rod 2022 which may have a radius of 6 mm but possibly of only 0.5 mm is relatively fragile and may require a bar 2020 for support.
  • the bar is formed with a groove 24 within which the rod 2022 rests.
  • the rod may be retained in the groove 24 in any suitable manner.
  • the groove may be accurately machined to be slightly narrower than the rod diameter and heat shrinking may be used to hold the rod in position within the groove.
  • a deposit 34 of the solute builds up on the downstream side of the doctor blade 2014 . While not wishing to be bound by theory, it is believed that this may be caused by the fact that a stationary film of the formulation (e.g. solution) adheres to the downstream side of the doctor blade and as it dries leaves behind the solute. Regardless of the reason for the formation of such a deposit and its composition, if allowed to grow excessively, it will eventually interfere with the layer of treatment formulation (e.g. solution) applied to the ITM 210 .
  • formulations e.g. solution
  • Embodiments of the invention relate to apparatus and methods for changing the doctor blade 2014 when it becomes soiled.
  • FIG. 4 B illustrate an example of how the doctor blade may be changed easily, and preferably without the need to interrupt the web coating process, or the printing system that requires a conditioning agent to be applied to its ITM.
  • doctor blades 1122 are mounted uniformly in recesses around the circumference of a cylindrical rotatable turret 1120 .
  • the axially extending doctor blades 122 behave in the same way as the doctor rods 1122 in FIG. 4 A and the turret 120 serves the same purpose as the rod holder 120 .
  • the doctor blades 1122 are constructed as strips having smooth rounded and polished edges. Strips having rounded d edges of uniform radius of curvature may be produced, for example, by flattening rods of circular cross section.
  • the doctor blades 1222 may suitably be made of stainless steel but other hard materials resistant to abrasion may alternatively be used.
  • FIG. 5 illustrates one example of a cleaning station 258 and treatment station 260 (e.g. for applying a wet layer of treatment formulation—e.g. as in step S 209 of FIG. 2 or step S 101 of FIG. 2 ).
  • a quantity of treatment solution (e.g. having one or properties of step S 205 of FIG. 2 or step S 95 of FIG. 12 ) is stored in tank 1125 .
  • this treatment solution may be jetted (i.e. by jetting apparatus 774 ) to the surface of the ITM 210 .
  • brushes 1126 A and 1126 B for mechanically removing material from the surface of the ITM 210 to clean the ITM surface—e.g. pressure may be applied between backing rollers 772 A- 772 B respectively disposed opposite brushes 1126 A- 1126 B.
  • material removed from the surface of the ITM comprises dried treatment film which may be, for example, resoluble in liquid treatment formulation (e.g. having one or properties of step S 205 of FIG. 2 or step S 95 of FIG. 12 ) stored in tank 1125 —this may allow for recycle of treatment formulation.
  • the cleaning of the ITM surface may be affected by the treatment solution itself.
  • the aqueous treatment formulation provided in step S 205 of FIG. 2 or in step S 95 of FIG. 12 may be fully resoluble (e.g. after drying, it may fully dissolve in aqueous treatment formulation).
  • Treatment formulation 1128 may be jetted by jetting apparatus 1128 .
  • one of the doctor blades 1122 is active—this is labelled 1122 ACTIVE .
  • a relatively thick layer of treatment formulation may be applied (e.g. by apparatus 1128 ), and excess treatment formulation may be is removed by the combination of doctor blade 1122 ACTIVE and a backing roller 1114 which is urged towards doctor blade 1122 ACTIVE .
  • Jetting apparatus 1128 is one example of a ‘coater’ for applying a coating of treatment formulation to the surface of ITM 210 .
  • Another example of a coater is a pool 2032 when liquid content of the pool is retained on the ITM surface.
  • doctor blade 1122 ACTIVE (or rounded tip thereof) and backing roller 1114 (or alternatively a device for providing air pressure towards rounded tip 1123 ) collectively a coating thickness-regulation assembly—thus, in FIGS. 10 A and 11 A the “final thickness' of the treating formulation may be regulated by according to an amount of force urgent the tip 1123 towards the opposing portion of ITM 210 (e.g. towards backing roller 1114 ) or vice versa.
  • only one doctor blade 122 interacts with the ITM 110 at any given time but when a blade becomes soiled, the turret 120 is rotated to bring the next adjacent doctor blade into the operating position in which the blade is functional, i.e. sufficiently close to the surface to remove excess liquid and allow only a film of the desired thickness to adhere to the surface downstream of the apparatus.
  • the soiled blade 1122 Prior to returning to the operating position, at some later stage in the turret rotation cycle, the soiled blade 1122 passes through a cleaning device, for example a brush 1130 , which removes any deposit and cleans the blade before it becomes functional again.
  • a cleaning device for example a brush 1130
  • the rotation of the turret 1120 may be instigated on demand by an operator or it may be performed at regular intervals.
  • the number of doctor blades on the turret 1120 need not be twelve but it is desirable for there to be a sufficient number that during a changeover, as shown in FIGS. 8 and 9 , there should be a time when two doctor blades 1122 are functional and interact with the ITM 110 at the same time. As a consequence, there is a substantially continuous replacement of the blades, so that no interruption in the film metering operation, and this in turn permits the doctor blade to be changed without interruption of the printing system.
  • FIGS. 8 - 9 are more detailed perspective and exploded sectional views, respectively, of the turret 1120 and the doctor blade cleaning brush 1130 . Both are mounted on axles rotatably supported in a metal frame 1140 immersed in the tank 1127 .
  • the axles of the turret 1120 and the doctor blade cleaning brush 1130 are connected to respective drive motors 1412 and 1144 mounted outside the tank 1127 .
  • the turret 1120 is made of a hollow cylinder and its cylindrical surface may be perforated to reduce it weight and moment of inertia, while still providing adequate strength to support the doctor blades 1122 .
  • doctor blades 1122 supported by the turret 1120 have been shown as flat strips, it should be understood that they may alternatively be formed as circular rod as described by reference to FIG. 4 .
  • doctor blade 1122 ACTIVE when doctor blade 1122 ACTIVE is urged towards backing roller 1141 , or vice versa, doctor blade may penetrate into a lower run of the ITM 210 .
  • ITM 210 i.e. a lower run thereof
  • roller 1141 pushes on ITM 210 (i.e. a lower run thereof) and ITM 210 is urged towards doctor blade 1122 ACTIVE —the converse is true.
  • FIGS. 10 A- 10 B a central axis 1188 of doctor blade 1122 ACTIVE is illustrated.
  • a rounded tip of doctor blade 1122 ACTIVE is labelled as 1123 .
  • tip 1123 faces a surface (i.e. local normal) of the ITM 210 .
  • doctor blade 1122 ACTIVE is oriented substantially normal to a local surface of the ITM 210 that faces rounded tip 1123 .
  • downward force may be applied (i.e. via the ITM) by roller 1141 towards rounded tip 1123 .
  • air pressure may be used to bias the ITM 210 towards the rounded tip 1123 . This results in the doctor blade 122 ACTIVE removing all but a thin liquid film (e.g. less than typically less than 1 micrometer) having a thickness determined by the radius of curvature and the applied pressure.
  • the backing roller has a compressible surface which is compressed when the rounded tip is urged towards the ITM surface and/or vice versa (i.e. any configuration in which the backing roller and the rounded tip are urged toward one another) so that the rounded tip penetrates into the backing roller together with the ITM at a particular or desired penetration depth.
  • Jetting device 1128 or a bath in which the ITM surface may be soaked or any other device for applying an initial coating may be considered a ‘coater’ for coating the ITM with liquid treatment formulation.
  • rounded surface 1123 e.g. rounded tip
  • a device for applying a counter force e.g. roller 1141
  • a thickness-regulation assembly for removing excess liquid so as to leave only the desired uniform thin layer of treatment formulation (e.g. of submicron thickness).
  • the applicator may still indirectly apply pressure to the ITM via the treatment fluid.
  • the rounded tip applies a pressure of at least 0.1 bar or at least 0.25 bar or at least 0.35 bar or at least 0.5 bar, and optionally at most 2 bar or at most 1.5 bar, or at most 1 bar.
  • This pressure may be localized in the print direction.
  • a ‘strip of pressure’ e.g. the strip may be elongated in a cross print direction
  • a ‘strip of pressure’ e.g. the strip may be elongated in a cross print direction
  • a maximum pressure applied to the ITM within the strip is P_STRIP_MAX, a value of which is at least at least 0.1 bar or at least 0.25 bar or at least 0.35 bar or at least 0.5 bar, and optionally at most 2 bar or at most 1.5 bar, or at most 1 bar;
  • a local pressure applied to the ITM by the applicator is at least 0.5*P_STRIP_MAX and (iii) on all locations in a cross-print direction on opposite sides of the strip (upstream and downstream
  • a presence of the rounded tip 1123 e.g. doctor blade
  • the velocity of treatment fluid may be non-zero (e.g. substantially equal to a velocity of the ITM) due to a no-stick boundary condition with the ITM surface; at the applicator the velocity of treatment fluid may be zero.
  • a magnitude of the velocity gradient equals or exceeds a VG value that is at least 10 6 sec ⁇ 1 or at least 2 ⁇ 10 6 sec ⁇ 1 or at least 4 ⁇ 10 6 sec ⁇ 1 or at least 5 ⁇ 10 6 sec ⁇ 1 or at least 7.5 ⁇ 10 6 sec ⁇ 1 or at least 10 7 sec ⁇ 1 or at least 2 ⁇ 10 7 sec ⁇ 1 or at least 4 ⁇ 10 7 sec ⁇ 1 or at least 5 ⁇ 10 7 sec ⁇ 1 or at least 7.5 ⁇ 10 7 sec ⁇ 1 .
  • the velocity gradient is localized along a print direction such that:
  • the rounded surface is urged to the ITM or vice versa, at a force density in the cross-print direction of at least 250 g/cm or at least 350 g/cm or at least 400 gm/cm and/or at most 1 kg/cm or at most 750 g/cm or at most 600 g/cm.
  • Embodiments of the present invention relate to a printing process described in FIG. 12 .
  • apparatus, systems and devices described in of FIGS. 3 - 11 may be employed to perform the method of FIG. 12 .
  • the order of steps in FIG. 12 is not intended as limiting—in particular, steps S 91 -S 99 may be performed in any order.
  • steps S 101 -S 117 are performed in the order indicated in FIG. 12 .
  • step S 91 may be performed to provide any feature or combination of features of step S 201 of FIG. 2 .
  • step S 95 may be performed to provide any feature or combination of features of step S 205 of FIG. 2 .
  • step S 101 may be performed to provide any feature or combination of features of step S 209 of FIG. 2 .
  • step S 105 may be performed to provide any feature or combination of features of step S 213 of FIG. 2 .
  • step S 109 may be performed to provide any feature or combination of features of step S 217 of FIG. 2 .
  • step S 113 may be performed to provide any feature or combination of features of step S 221 of FIG. 2 .
  • step S 117 may be performed to provide any feature or combination of features of step S 225 of FIG. 2 .
  • Steps S 91 - 99 relate to the ingredients or components or consumables used in the process of FIG. 12
  • steps S 101 -S 117 relate to the process itself.
  • a thin treatment layer of a wet treatment formulation is applied to an intermediate transfer member (ITM) (e.g. having a release layer with hydrophobic properties)
  • this treatment layer is dried (e.g. rapidly dried) into a thin dried treatment film on a release surface of the ITM
  • droplets of an aqueous ink are deposited (e.g.
  • step S 113 the ink image is dried to leave an ink image on the dried treatment film on the ITM and (v) in step S 117 the ink-image is transferred to printing substrate (e.g. together with the dried treatment film).
  • steps S 91 -S 117 are performed as follows:
  • the process of FIG. 12 is performed so that when the aqueous treatment solution is applied to the ITM in step S 101 , there is little or no beading so that the resulting thin dried treatment film (i.e. obtained in step S 105 ) is continuous and/or has a smooth (e.g. extremely smooth) upper surface.
  • This smooth upper surface may be important for obtaining a substrate-residing ink image of high quality.
  • the dried treatment formulation e.g. after drying
  • the thin dried treatment film is obtained in step S 105 (for example, having a thickness of at most 400 nanometers or at most 200 nanometers or at most 100 nanometers or even less).
  • this thin dried treatment film i.e. obtained in step S 105
  • the process of FIG. 12 is performed so that the image-transfer of step S 117 is performed at a low temperature (e.g. to an uncoated substrate)—e.g. a temperature of at most 90° C., or at most 85° C., at most 80° C., or at most 75° C., at most 70° C., or at most 65° C., at most 60° C.—for example, at about 60° C.
  • a low temperature e.g. to an uncoated substrate
  • a temperature of at most 90° C., or at most 85° C., at most 80° C., or at most 75° C., at most 70° C., or at most 65° C., at most 60° C. for example, at about 60° C.
  • the ITM i.e. the ITM provided in step S 91 of FIG. 12 or in step S 201 of FIG. 2
  • the ITM may provide one or more (i.e. any combination of) of the following features A1-A5:
  • step S 95 an aqueous treatment formulation is provided.
  • This treatment formulation comprises at least 50% wt/wt or at least 55% wt/wt or at least 60% wt/wt or at least 65% wt/wt water carrier liquid).
  • the aqueous treatment formulation (i.e. the aqueous treatment formulation in its initial state before the application of step S 101 of FIG. 12 or the aqueous treatment formulation in its initial state before the application of step S 205 of FIG. 1 ) may provide one of more (i.e. any combination of) the of the following features:
  • this feature might be particularly useful when applying the treatment formulation to the ITM as it moves at high speeds (e.g. past an applicator arrangement—for example, a stationary applicator arrangement).
  • the water-based inkjet ink formulation comprises: a solvent containing water and, optionally, a co-solvent, said water constituting at least 8 wt. % of the formulation; at least one colorant dispersed or at least partly dissolved within said solvent, said colorant constituting at least 1 wt. % of the formulation; and an organic polymeric resin, which is dispersed or at least partially dissolved within said solvent, the resin constituting 6 to 40 wt. % of the formulation, wherein the average molecular weight of said resin is at least 8,000.
  • the dried treatment formulation may add an undesired gloss to the resulting ink image after transfer to substrate—thus, the ability to form a thin but cohesive dried treatment layer may be useful.
  • the thinness of the layer also facilitates evaporation and drying of the layer into a film.
  • Another anti-beading feature i.e. anti-beading of the treatment formulation in steps S 101 -S 105
  • Another anti-beading feature useful for obtaining a continuous dried treatment film
  • the static surface tension between the aqueous treatment formulation and the release layer of the ITM may be relatively small, there is less of a driving force towards beading, and the viscosity of the aqueous treatment formation (e.g. as it rapidly increases) may be sufficient to prevent beading.
  • the ITM release layer may have specific properties (see feature “A5”), that limit an adhesion between the ITM release layer and the dried treatment film—thus, even if the treatment surface is only moderately hydrophobic to avoid beading of treatment formulation thereon in steps S 101 and/or S 105 , it may be possible (e.g. thanks at least in part to feature “B2”) to avoid paying a ‘price’ for this benefit in step S 117 when it is desired later to minimize adhesion forces between the release layer of the ITM and the dried treatment film.
  • a ratio between the roughness average R a and the thickness of the dried treatment layer is at least 0.02 or at least 0.03 or at least 0.04 or at least 0.05 or at least 0.06 or at least 0.07 or at least 0.08 or at least 0.9 or at least 0.1 or at least 0.11 or at least 0.12 or at least 0.13 or at least 0.14 or at least 0.15 or at least 0.16 or at least 0.17 or at least 0.18 or at least 0.19 or at least 0.2.
  • the dried treatment film to which the aqueous ink droplets are deposited and a surface (e.g. upper surface of) of the dried treatment film are characterized by a dimensionless ratio between (i) an average roughness R a and (ii) a thickness of the dried treatment layer, wherein the dimensionless ratio is at most 0.5, at most 0.4, at most 0.3, at most 0.25, at most 0.2, at most 0.15, or at most 0.1, and optionally, at least 0.02 or at least 0.03 or at least 0.04 or at least 0.05 or at least 0.06 or at least 0.07 or at least 0.08.
  • steps S 109 and/or S 113 and/or S 117 may be performed to provide one or more of the following process-related features:
  • both the dried treatment film and the dried ink image are tacky at the transfer temperature and are thus amenable to being peeled cleanly away from the release layer, even at a relatively low temperature.
  • This property may be at least partially attributed to the chemistry of the initial aqueous treatment solution.
  • the chemistry and structure of the release layer may also be useful for providing a low-temperature transfer process in step S 117 .
  • FIGS. 13 A- 13 E schematically describe a process whereby an ink droplet is deposited on an ITM (e.g. a release surface thereof).
  • an ink droplet moves towards the ITM.
  • FIGS. 13 B and 13 C describe the ink droplet immediately after collision between (i) the droplet and (ii) the ITM (or the dried treatment film thereon).
  • Kinetic energy of the droplet causes deformation of the droplet—this is illustrated in FIGS. 13 B to 13 C .
  • kinetic energy of the droplet causes the droplet to expand outwards—
  • FIG. 13 C shows a maximum radius of the droplet upon impact—i.e. the maximum increase of the radius due to deformation caused by kinetic energy of the droplet.
  • the droplet After the droplet reaches this maximum radius (“R upon impact” or “R max impact”, used interchangeably), e.g. within 10 milliseconds of impact, due to kinetic energy-driven droplet deformation, the droplet (or a successor dot thereof since each droplet eventually becomes an ink dot upon drying—first the dot resides on the ITM (e.g. via the dried treatment film) as shown in FIG. 13 D , and after transfer the ink droplet resides on substrate as shown in FIG. 13 E ). The droplet or dot successor thereof may further expand due to physicochemical forces or chemical interactions. This is a spreading phenomenon that is schematically illustrated by comparing FIG. 13 C or 13 D with 13 B. Once again, it is noted that FIGS. 13 A- 13 E are schematic and there is no requirement that the deformed droplet will have the specific shapes illustrated in FIGS. 13 A- 13 E .
  • step S 201 of FIG. 2 may be performed to provide any feature or combination of features of step S 91 of FIG. 12 .
  • step S 205 of FIG. 2 may be performed to provide any feature or combination of features of step S 95 of FIG. 12 .
  • step S 209 of FIG. 2 may be performed to provide any feature or combination of features of step S 101 of FIG. 12 .
  • step S 213 of FIG. 2 may be performed to provide any feature or combination of features of step S 105 of FIG. 12 .
  • step S 217 of FIG. 2 may be performed to provide any feature or combination of features of step S 109 of FIG. 12 .
  • step S 221 of FIG. 2 may be performed to provide any feature or combination of features of step S 113 of FIG. 12 .
  • step S 225 of FIG. 2 may be performed to provide any feature or combination of features of step S 117 of FIG. 12 .
  • the inventors believe that the ultra-smooth surface of the dried treatment film enables the spreading of the ink dots to occur in an even and controlled manner, such that the formation of disadvantageous rivulets and the like is appreciably mitigated or averted.
  • the resulting ink dot shape is fairly similar in quality to the superior shape (convexity, roundness, edge sharpness) attained in Landa Corporation's Application No. PCT/IB2013/000840, which is incorporated by reference, for all purposes, as if fully set forth herein. This is particularly surprising in view of the spreading mechanism utilized by the present disclosure, as compared with the surface-tension controlled drop pinning and contraction disclosed in that application.
  • Dot and convexity measurements were performed on various dot images of the present invention, in accordance with the procedures disclosed by PCT/IB2013/000840. In addition, dot and convexity measurements were performed substantially as described hereinbelow:
  • the acquisition of the dot images was performed using an LEXT (Olympus) OLS3000 microscope.
  • the images were taken with an X100 and X20 optical zoom.
  • the color images were saved in uncompressed format (Tiff) having a resolution of 640 ⁇ 640 pixels.
  • Raspect Ddot/Hdot [dimensionless]
  • DRdot ER ⁇ 1 [dimensionless]
  • Convexity: CX AA/CSA [dimensionless]
  • Non-convexity: Dcdot 1 ⁇ CX [dimensionless]
  • the analysis was done using the MATLAB image processing tool, utilizing, where possible, the above-referenced analysis procedure applied in WO2013/132418.
  • the ITM may be manufactured in the inventive manner described by FIGS. 15 - 20 and in the description associated therewith. Such an ITM may be particularly suitable for the Nanographic PrintingTM technologies of Landa Corporation.
  • FIG. 14 the figure schematically shows a section through a carrier 10 .
  • the carrier 10 is shown as a solid black line.
  • Carrier 10 has a carrier contact surface 12 .
  • carrier contact surface 12 may be a well-polished flat surface having a roughness (R a ) of at most about 50 nm, at most 30 nm, at most 20 m, at most 15 nm, at most 12 nm, or more typically, at most 10 nm, at most 7 nm, or at most 5 nm. In some embodiments, carrier contact surface 12 may between 1 and 50 nm, between 3 and 25 nm, between 3 and 20 nm, or between 5 nm and 20 nm.
  • the hydrophilic properties of the carrier contact surface 12 are described hereinbelow.
  • carrier 10 may be inflexible, being formed, for example, of a sheet of glass or thick sheet of metal.
  • carrier 10 may advantageously be formed of a flexible foil, such as a flexible foil mainly consisting of, or including, aluminum, nickel, and/or chromium.
  • the foil is a sheet of aluminized PET (polyethylene terephthalate, a polyester), e.g., PET coated with fumed aluminum metal.
  • the top coating of aluminum may be protected by a polymeric coating, the sheet typically having a thickness of between 0.05 mm and 1.00 mm so as to remain flexible but difficult to bend through a small radius, so as to avert wrinkling.
  • carrier 10 may advantageously be formed of an antistatic polymeric film, for example, a polyester film such as PET.
  • the anti-static properties of the antistatic film may be achieved by various means known to those of skill in the art, including the addition of various additives (such as an ammonium salt) to the polymeric composition.
  • a fluid first curable composition (illustrated as 36 in FIG. 22 B ) is provided and a layer 16 is formed therefrom on carrier contact surface 12 , layer 16 constituting an incipient release layer having an outer ink-transfer surface 14 .
  • the fluid first curable composition of layer 16 may include an elastomer, typically made of a silicone polymer, for example, a polydimethylsiloxane, such as a vinyl-terminated polydimethylsiloxane.
  • an elastomer typically made of a silicone polymer, for example, a polydimethylsiloxane, such as a vinyl-terminated polydimethylsiloxane.
  • the fluid first curable material includes a vinyl-functional silicone polymer, e.g., a vinyl-silicone polymer including at least one lateral vinyl group in addition to the terminal vinyl groups, for example, a vinyl-functional polydimethyl siloxane.
  • a vinyl-functional silicone polymer e.g., a vinyl-silicone polymer including at least one lateral vinyl group in addition to the terminal vinyl groups, for example, a vinyl-functional polydimethyl siloxane.
  • the fluid first curable material includes a vinyl-terminated polydimethylsiloxane, a vinyl-functional polydimethylsiloxane including at least one lateral vinyl group on the polysiloxane chain in addition to the terminal vinyl groups, a crosslinker, and an addition-cure catalyst, and optionally further includes a cure retardant.
  • the curable adhesive composition may include any suitable amount of addition cure catalyst, typically at most 0.01% of the pre-polymer, on a per mole basis.
  • Layer 16 of the fluid first curable composition is applied to carrier contact surface 12 , and is subsequently cured.
  • Layer 16 may be spread to the desired thickness using, for example, a doctor blade (a knife on a roll), without allowing the doctor blade to contact the surface that will ultimately act as the ink-transfer surface 14 of the ITM, such that imperfections in the doctor blade will not affect the quality of the finished product.
  • “release” layer 16 may have a thickness of between about 2 micrometers and about 200 micrometers. An apparatus in which such step and method can be implemented is schematically illustrated in FIGS. 22 A and 22 B .
  • the above-detailed release layer formulation may be uniformly applied upon a PET carrier, leveled to a thickness of 5-200 micrometers ( ⁇ ), and cured for approximately 2-10 minutes at 120-130° C.
  • the hydrophobicity of the ink transfer surface of the release layer so prepared as assessed by its receding contact angle (RCA) with a 0.5-5 microliter ( ⁇ l) droplet of distilled water, may be around 60°, whereas the other side of the same release layer (which served to approximate the hydrophobicity of a layer conventionally prepared with an air interface) may have an RCA that is significantly higher, typically around 90°.
  • PET carriers used to produce ink-transfer surface 14 may typically display an RCA of around 40° or less. All contact angle measurements were performed with a Contact Angle analyzer—KrüssTM “Easy Drop” FM40Mk2 and/or a Dataphysics OCA15 Pro (Particle and Surface Sciences Pty. Ltd., Gosford, NSW, Australia).
  • an additional layer 18 is applied to layer 16 , on the side opposite to ink-transfer surface 14 .
  • Compliance layer 18 is an elastomeric layer that allows layer 16 and its outermost surface 14 to follow closely the surface contour of a substrate onto which an ink image is impressed.
  • the attachment of compliance layer 18 to the side opposite to ink-transfer surface 14 may involve the application of an adhesive or bonding composition in addition to the material of compliance layer 18 .
  • compliance layer 18 may typically have a thickness of between about 100 micrometers and about 300 micrometers or more.
  • compliance layer 18 may have the same composition as that of release layer 16 , material and process economics may warrant the use of less expensive materials. Moreover, compliance layer 18 typically is selected to have mechanical properties (e.g., greater resistance to tension) that differ from release layer 16 . Such desired differences in properties may be achieved, by way of example, by utilizing a different composition with respect to release layer 16 , by varying the proportions between the ingredients used to prepare the formulation of release layer 16 , and/or by the addition of further ingredients to such formulation, and/or by the selection of different curing conditions. For instance, the addition of filler particles may favorably increase the mechanical strength of compliance layer 18 relative to release layer 16 .
  • compliance layer 18 may include various rubbers. Preferably such rubbers are stable at temperatures of at least 100° C. and may include rubbers such as alkyl acrylate copolymer rubbers (ACM), methyl vinyl silicone rubber (VMQ), ethylene propylene diene monomer rubber (EPDM), fluoroelastomer polymers, nitrile butadiene rubber (NBR), ethylene acrylic elastomer (EAM), and hydrogenated nitrile butadiene rubber (HNBR).
  • ACM alkyl acrylate copolymer rubbers
  • VMQ methyl vinyl silicone rubber
  • EPDM ethylene propylene diene monomer rubber
  • fluoroelastomer polymers fluoroelastomer polymers
  • NBR nitrile butadiene rubber
  • EAM ethylene acrylic elastomer
  • HNBR hydrogenated nitrile butadiene rubber
  • Silopren® LSR 2530 Momentive Performance Materials Inc., Waterford NY
  • a two-component liquid silicone rubber in which the two components are mixed at a 1:1 ratio
  • the silicone rubber mixture was metered/leveled with a knife blade to obtain an incipient compliance layer 18 having a thickness of about 250 micrometers, which was then cured for approximately 5 minutes at 150-160° C.
  • a reinforcement layer or support layer 20 is constructed on compliance layer 18 .
  • Support layer 20 typically contains a fiber reinforcement, in the form of a web or a fabric, to provide support layer with sufficient structural integrity to withstand stretching when the ITM is held in tension in the printing system.
  • Support layer 20 is formed by coating the fiber reinforcement with a resin that is subsequently cured and remains flexible after curing.
  • support layer 20 may be separately formed as a reinforcement layer, including such fibers embedded and/or impregnated within the independently cured resin.
  • support layer 20 may be attached to compliance layer 18 via an adhesive layer, optionally eliminating the need to cure the support layer 20 in situ.
  • support layer 20 whether formed in situ on compliance layer 18 or separately, may have a thickness of between about 100 micrometers and about 500 micrometers, part of which is attributed to the thickness of the fibers or the fabric, which thickness generally varies between about 50 micrometers and about 300 micrometers.
  • the support layer thickness is not limiting.
  • the support layer may have a thickness of more than 200 micrometers, more than 500 micrometers, or 1 mm or more.
  • a support layer 20 including woven fabric of glass fibers including woven fabric of glass fibers.
  • the glass fiber fabric having a thickness of about 100 micrometers, was a plain weave fabric having 16 yarns/cm in perpendicular directions.
  • the glass fiber fabric was embedded into a curable fluid including a liquid silicone rubber Silopren® LSR 2530 corresponding to the compliance layer.
  • the resulting support layer 20 had a thickness of about 200 micrometers and was cured at 150° C. for approximately 2-5 minutes.
  • more dense weave fabrics e.g., having 24 ⁇ 23 yarns/cm may be used.
  • FIG. 18 shows an optional felt blanket 22 secured (e.g., by a cured adhesive or resin) to the reverse side of support layer 20
  • FIG. 19 shows a high friction layer 24 coated onto the reverse side of blanket 22 .
  • various relatively soft rubbers may serve for the preparation of a layer having high friction properties, silicone elastomers being but an example of such rubbers.
  • high friction layer 24 may be attached directly to support layer 20 .
  • all layers e.g., 18 , 20 , 22 , 24 , or any intervening adhesive or priming layer and the like
  • added to the release layer of the ITM jointly form the base of the structure, as shown with respect to base 200 in FIG. 21 C .
  • the finished product can simply be peeled away from carrier 10 .
  • the carrier 10 is a flexible foil, it may be preferred to leave it in place on the ITM until such time as the ITM is to be installed into a printing system.
  • the foil will act to protect the ink-transfer surface 14 of the ITM during storage, transportation and installation. Additionally, carrier 10 can be replaced, following completion of the manufacturing process, by an alternative foil that is suitable as a protective film.
  • FIGS. 22 A to 22 D schematically illustrate an apparatus 90 in which the ITM may be manufactured.
  • FIG. 22 A provides a schematic overview of such an apparatus 90 having an unwinding roller 40 and a winding roller 42 moving a flexible loop conveyor 100 .
  • conveyor 100 can be positioned a dispensing station 52 , able to dispense curable fluid compositions suitable for the desired ITMs, a leveling station 54 , able to control the thickness of the curable layer as it moves downstream of the station, and a curing station 56 , able to at least partially cure the layer enabling it to serve as incipient layer for a subsequent step, if any.
  • the dispensing station 52 , the leveling station 54 and the curing station 56 constitute a layer forming station 50 a .
  • apparatus 90 may optionally include more than one layer forming station.
  • a forming station 50 may include additional sub-stations, illustrated by a dispensing roller 58 in station 50 a.
  • carrier 10 is directly tensioned between rollers 40 and 42 .
  • Unprocessed carrier 10 is unwound from unwinding roller 40 , and after passing through stations 50 a and 50 b , is rewound onto winding roller 42 .
  • the apparatus may further include upstream of the dispensing station a “surface treatment” station facilitating the subsequent application of a curable composition, or its attachment to the carrier contact surface or incipient layer as the case may be.
  • a “surface treatment” station facilitating the subsequent application of a curable composition, or its attachment to the carrier contact surface or incipient layer as the case may be.
  • the optional surface treatment station can be suitable for physical treatment (e.g., corona treatment, plasma treatment, ozonation, etc.).
  • FIG. 22 B schematically illustrates how in a forming station 50 of apparatus 90 , a carrier 10 placed on conveyor 100 can be coated.
  • the curable composition 36 of release layer 16 is applied to carrier contact surface 12 .
  • the curable composition 36 is leveled to a desired thickness at leveling station 54 , for instance, by using a doctor blade.
  • the leveled layer proceeds downstream, it enters curing station 56 , configured so as to at least partially cure curable composition 36 , enabling the formation of incipient layer 16 at the exit side of the curing station.
  • curing station 56 configured so as to at least partially cure curable composition 36 , enabling the formation of incipient layer 16 at the exit side of the curing station.
  • FIGS. 22 C and 22 D schematically illustrate how additional layers (forming the base) can be applied.
  • a curable composition 38 is dispensed at dispensing station 52 (which can be same or different than the station having served to coat the carrier with the release layer 16 , as illustrated in FIG. 9 B ).
  • Curable composition 38 is leveled to a desired thickness at leveling station 54 , then enters curing station 56 , and exits curing station 56 sufficiently cured to serve as incipient layer 18 for a subsequent step, and so on.
  • FIG. 22 C schematically depicts a curable composition 39 being applied at dispensing station 52 .
  • a support layer e.g., a fabric
  • the backbone of a support layer can be delivered by dispensing roller 58 .
  • the exemplary fabric can be submerged into the curable composition at a station 60 prior to their entry into curing station 56 .
  • a support layer 20 can be formed at the exit side of the curing station.
  • FIGS. 21 A and 21 B schematically illustrate how defects would appear in a section of an outer layer 80 (e.g., a release layer) prepared according to the above-described method of the art.
  • FIG. 21 A illustrates different phenomena relating to air bubbles, which may be entrapped in any curable composition if the curing occurs before such bubbles can be eliminated (e.g., by degassing).
  • tiny bubbles 82 migrate towards the air interface, the orientation of layer 80 during manufacturing over a body 800 , hence the direction of migration, being indicated by an arrow, they can merge into larger bubbles.
  • the bubbles may either remain entrapped within the bulk of the layer or on its surface, the upper part of the bubbles envelope forming protrusions 84 .
  • craters 86 may remain, even if the segment of the envelope of the bubbles protruding from the surface has disappeared.
  • FIG. 21 B schematically illustrates different phenomena relating to solid contaminants, such as dust.
  • the dust is represented as being in addition to air bubbles, this need not be necessarily the case, each such surface or layer defect able to occur independently.
  • solid contaminants may remain upon the surface. If the settling of contaminants occurs after the outer layer 80 is cured, then such contaminants 92 may even be removed by suitable cleaning of the outer surface. Still, such a phenomenon is undesirable, as it would require additional processing of such an ITM before being able to use it.
  • the contaminants can be either entrapped on the surface of layer 80 , (e.g., contaminant 94 , which appears to be “floating”), or can even be submerged within the release layer, (e.g., contaminant 96 ). As can be readily understood, larger/heavier contaminants may sink more deeply than smaller ones.
  • the method disclosed herein includes forming a layer of a fluid first curable material with one side of the layer contacting a carrier contact surface, the layer constituting an incipient release layer.
  • the carrier contact surface functions to protect the incipient release layer, giving the ink transfer layer desired properties, while the carrier acts as a physically robust support structure onto which other layers are added to form the ITM, until the ITM is complete.
  • the finish of the ink transfer surface is primarily, if not exclusively, determined by the carrier contact surface.
  • FIG. 21 C schematically illustrates a section through an outer layer 16 (e.g., a release layer) prepared according to the present method.
  • the section is shown without a carrier and in the same orientation as FIGS. 8 A and 8 B , though the manufacturing is performed in inversed orientation as shown by the arrow.
  • the base 200 which, as shall be detailed hereinafter, is attached to the first outer layer 16 after the layer is at least partially cured, is therefore not equivalent to body 800 already serving as support during the manufacturing process.
  • layer 16 is represented as including an important number of bubbles 82 , but this need not be the case. However, if present, such bubbles would display a distinct pattern than those previously described.
  • the release layer being therefore devoid of phenomena such as previously illustrated by surface protruding bubbles 84 .
  • craters previously illustrated as cavities 86 are very unlikely, as they would imply using an incompatible curable layer and carrier.
  • the curable material due to form the outer layer is to suitably wet the carrier, it is believed that substantially no air bubbles can be entrapped between the carrier and the incipient layer formed thereon. Thus, if at all present, such bubbles would be disposed in the bulk of the layer.
  • inventive release layer structures of the present invention may contain substantially no functional groups, or an insubstantial amount (e.g., an insubstantial amount of OH groups), covalently attached within the polymer matrix.
  • Such functional groups may include moieties such as C ⁇ O, S ⁇ O, and OH, by way of example.
  • release layer structures contain, at most, an insubstantial amount of such functional groups, it would be expected that the release layers thereof would be highly hydrophobic.
  • the inventors have surprisingly found, however, that the release layer surfaces produced by the present method may actually be somewhat hydrophilic, and appreciably more hydrophilic than corresponding release layers, i.e., release layers having the same composition, but manufactured using the conventional curing technique in which the release layer is exposed to air (“standard air curing”). Without wishing to be bound by theory, the inventors believe that the intimate contact between the carrier contact surface and the incipient release layer surface, the somewhat hydrophilic properties of the carrier contact surface are induced in the release layer surface.
  • ITM release layers having low surface energies may facilitate transfer of the dried ink image to the printing substrate.
  • the aqueous ink drops jetted onto such a low-energy, hydrophobic release layer tend to bead after the initial impact, thereby compromising image quality.
  • Higher-energy, less hydrophobic release layers may mitigate this effect, but are detrimental to image transfer quality.
  • the release layer structures of the present invention typically have release surfaces of characteristically moderated hydrophobicity, as manifested by receding contact angles for distilled water of at most 80°, or at most 70°, typically, at most 60°, or at most 50°, and more typically, 30°-60°, 35°-60°, 30°-55°, 30°-50°, 30°-45°, or 35°-50°.
  • both the ink reception and the transfer of the dry, heated ink image may be of good quality.
  • the inventors believe that the above-described induced surface properties improve the interactions between polar groups (e.g., O—Si—O) on the release layer surface and corresponding polar moieties (e.g., OH groups in the water) in the aqueous liquids (e.g., aqueous inkjet inks) deposited thereon, thereby contributing to the reception of the jetted ink drops. Subsequently, after drying the ink and heating of the ink film to transfer temperatures, these interactions are weakened, enabling complete transfer of the dry or substantially dry ink image.
  • polar groups e.g., O—Si—O
  • corresponding polar moieties e.g., OH groups in the water
  • the carriers used as substrates in the production of the release layer surface include (1) an anti-static polyester film (Examples 1-7); (2) an untreated polyester film i.e., not anti-static (Example 11); and (3) an aluminized polyester film (Example 10).
  • the ITM release layer of Example 1 had the following composition (wt./wt.):
  • the release layer was prepared substantially as described in the present blanket preparation procedure, provided below.
  • the desired thickness of the incipient release layer was coated on a PET sheet, using a rod/knife (other coating methods may also be used), followed by curing for 3 minutes at 150° C.
  • Siloprene LSR 2530 was coated on top of the release layer, using a knife, to achieve a desired thickness. Curing was then performed at 150° C. for 3 minutes.
  • An additional layer of Siloprene LSR 2530 was then coated on top of the previous (cured) silicone layer, and fiberglass fabric was incorporated into this wet, fresh layer such that wet silicone penetrated into the fabric structure. Curing was then performed at 150° C. for 3 minutes.
  • a final layer of Siloprene LSR 2530 was then coated onto the fiberglass fabric and, once again, curing was performed at 150° C. for 3 minutes. The integral blanket structure was then cooled to room temperature and the PET was removed.
  • the ITM release layer of Example 2 has the following composition:
  • the ITM release layer of Example 3 has the following composition:
  • the blanket was prepared substantially as described in Example 1.
  • the ITM release layer of Example 4 has the following composition:
  • the blanket was prepared substantially as described in Example 1.
  • the ITM release layer of Example 5 was prepared from Silopren® LSR 2530 (Momentive Performance Materials Inc., Waterford, NY), a two-component liquid silicone rubber, in which the two components are mixed at a 1:1 ratio.
  • the blanket was prepared substantially as described in Example 1.
  • the ITM release layer of Example 6 has a composition that is substantially identical to that of Example 4, but includes SR545 (Momentive Performance Materials Inc., Waterford, NY), a commercially available silicone-based resin containing polar groups.
  • the polar groups are of the “MQ” type, where “M” represents Me 3 SiO and “Q” represents SiO 4 .
  • the full composition is provided below:
  • the ITM release layer of Example 7 has a composition that is substantially identical to that of Example 6, but includes polymer RV 5000, which includes vinyl-functional polydimethyl siloxanes having a high density of vinyl groups, as described hereinabove.
  • the full composition is provided below:
  • the blanket was prepared substantially as described in Example 1.
  • ITM release layers were prepared as “corresponding release layers” or “reference release layers” to the compositions of Examples 1-6, such that the corresponding release layers (designated Comparative Examples 1A-1F) had the identical compositions as Examples 1-6, respectively.
  • the release layer surface or “ink reception surface” was exposed to air (“standard air curing”), according to a conventional preparation procedure, provided below.
  • a first layer of Siloprene LSR 2530 was coated on a PET sheet, using a rod/knife, followed by curing for 3 min at 150° C., to achieve the desired thickness.
  • An additional layer of Siloprene LSR 2530 was then coated on top of the previous (cured) silicone layer, and fiberglass fabric was incorporated into this wet, fresh layer such that wet silicone penetrated into the fabric structure.
  • Siloprene LSR 2530 was then coated on top of the fiberglass fabric, and curing ensued at 150° C. for 3 minutes. Prior to forming the incipient release layer, all components of the release layer formulation were thoroughly mixed together.
  • the release layer was coated on top of cured Siloprene LSR 2530 to achieve the desired thickness, and was subsequently cured at 150° C. for 3 minutes, while the release layer surface was exposed to air.
  • the release surfaces produced against the carrier surfaces exhibited lower Receding Contact Angles than the identical formulation, cured in air. More typically, the release surfaces produced against the carrier surfaces exhibited Receding Contact Angles that were lower by at least 5°, at least 7°, at least 10°, at least 12°, or at least 15°, or were lower within a range of 5°-30°, 7°-30°, 10°-30°, 5°-25°, 5°-22°, 7°-25°, or 10°-25°.
  • Example 1 75° 80° Comparative 95° 95° Example 1A
  • Example 2 45° 60° Comparative 65° 65° Example 1B
  • Example 3 40° 50° Comparative 63° 65° Example 1C
  • Example 4 65° 62° Comparative 79° 75° Example 1D
  • Example 5 70° 74° Comparative 80° 80°
  • Example 1E Example 6 56° 70° Comparative 74° 70° Example 1F
  • the receding contact angle is substantially maintained after performing the aging process.
  • inventive Examples 1-6 it is evident that the receding contact angle increases, typically by 4°-15°, after performing the aging process.
  • the increase in contact angle in the inventive release layer structures may be attributed to a loss in hydrophilic behavior (or increased hydrophobic behavior) due to some change in the position of the polar groups (e.g., Si—O—Si) at the release layer surface.
  • a blanket including a release layer of the composition of Example 2 was prepared substantially as described in Example 1, but against an aluminized PET carrier surface.
  • a release layer having the release layer composition of Example 2 was prepared substantially as described in Example 1, but against a commercially available PET carrier surface that was not subjected to an anti-static pre-treatment.
  • Release formulation Carrier film RCA vs. Carrier Example 10 Aluminized PET 62° Example 11 PET without anti-static 62° treatment
  • Example 2 PET with anti-static 45° treatment
  • Examples 10 and 11 exhibited receding contact angles that were about 30° less than the receding contact angle of the same composition cured with the release layer exposed to air.
  • the release layer surface of Example 2 prepared against an anti-static PET carrier surface, displayed a receding contact angles that was about 50° less than the receding contact angle of the same composition prepared while exposed to air.
  • CA of carrier Carrier film ACA RCA Aluminized PET 80° 40° PET without antistatic 70° 40° treatment PET with antistatic 40° 20° treatment It may be seen from the receding contact angles obtained that the three carrier surfaces exhibit hydrophilic behavior, and that the PET subjected to anti-static treatment exhibits the greatest degree of hydrophilic behavior (20° RCA vs. 40° RCA).
  • the hydrophilic behavior of the carrier surfaces has been at least partially induced in the respective release surfaces: the formulation cured while exposed to air has an RCA of 65°; the same formulation, prepared against an antistatic PET surface, has an RCA of 45°; the anti-static PET carrier used displays an RCA of 20°.
  • the inventive release layer structure has a release surface whose hydrophilicity/hydrophobicity properties lie in between the properties of the same formulation, cured in air, and the carrier surface itself.
  • Release layer surface energies were calculated for ink reception surfaces of the following Examples: Example 1A, cured under exposure to air; Example 1, cured against an anti-static PET surface; and Example 1, cured against an anti-static PET surface and then subjected to the standard aging procedure at 160° C., for 2 hours.
  • the three Examples have the identical chemical formulation.
  • the total surface energy was calculated using the classic “harmonic mean” method (also known as the Owens-Wendt Surface Energy Model, see, by way of example, KRUSS Technical Note TN306e). The results are provided below:
  • Example 1A cured under exposure to air, the release layer surface is extremely hydrophobic, and the total surface energy of the surface is low, 20.9 J/m2, as expected. This is fairly close to the literature value for surface energy, for polydimethylsiloxane (PDMS).
  • PDMS polydimethylsiloxane
  • Example 1 which was cured against an anti-static PET surface, exhibited a total surface energy of about 26 J/m2, which is moderately less hydrophobic than the “air-cured” sample. After this formulation was subjected to the standard aging procedure, the total surface energy decreased from about 26 J/m2 to under 23 J/m2. This result would appear to corroborate the RCA results obtained for the various aged and un-aged materials of this exemplary formulation.
  • Release layer surface energies were calculated for ink reception surfaces of the following Examples: Example 2A, cured under exposure to air; Example 2, cured against an anti-static PET surface; and Example 2, cured against an anti-static PET surface and then subjected to the standard aging procedure at 160° C., for 2 hours.
  • the three Examples have the identical chemical formulation.
  • Example 2A Air Cured 34.6
  • Example 2A cured under exposure to air, the release layer surface is less hydrophobic than the release layer of Example 1A, the total surface energy of the surface being about 35 J/m2.
  • Example 2 cured against an anti-static PET surface, exhibited a total surface energy of about 49 J/m2, which is significantly less hydrophobic than the “air-cured” sample. After this formulation was subjected to the standard aging procedure, the total surface energy decreased from about 49 J/m2 to about 40 J/m2. This result would appear to corroborate the RCA results obtained for the various aged and un-aged materials of this exemplary formulation.
  • the temperature on the blanket surface is maintained at 75° C.
  • the image (typically a color gradient of 10-100%) is printed at a speed of 1.7 m/sec on the blanket, at a resolution of 1200 dpi.
  • An uncoated paper (A4 Xerox Premium Copier Paper, 80 gsm) is set between the pressure roller and the blanket and the roller is pressed onto blanket, while the pressure is set to 3 bar. The roller moves on the paper, applying pressure on the contact line between blanket and paper and promoting the transfer process. In some cases, incomplete transfer may be observed, with an ink residue remaining on the blanket surface.
  • glossy paper (A4 Burgo glossy paper 130 gsm) is applied on the blanket similarly to the uncoated paper and the transfer process is again performed. Any ink that remained on blanket and was not transferred to the uncoated paper will be transferred to the glossy paper.
  • the glossy paper may be evaluated for ink residue, according to the following scale (% of image surface area):
  • Example 16 was repeated for the release surfaces of Examples 2 and 3, but at a printing speed of 3.4 msec on the blanket. Both release surfaces retained a transfer grade of A.
  • the ITM release layer compositions of Examples 2 and 3 were cured against a PET substrate according to the procedure provided in Example 1.
  • the ITM release layer compositions of Examples 2 and 3 were cured against air, according to the procedure provided in Comparative Examples 1B and 1C.
  • the samples were then subjected to dynamic contact angle (DCA) measurements at 10 seconds and subsequently at 70 seconds, according to the following procedure:
  • the drop is placed onto a smooth PTFE film surface with as little drop falling as possible, so that kinetic energy does not spread the drop.
  • a pendant drop is then formed.
  • the specimen is raised until it touches the bottom of the drop. If the drop is large enough, the adhesion to the surface will pull it off the tip of the needle.
  • the needle tip is positioned above the surface at such a height that the growing pendant drop will touch the surface and detach before it falls free due to its own weight.
  • the dynamic contact angle is then measured at 10 seconds and at 70 seconds. The results are provided below:
  • the initial measurement of the dynamic contact angle at 10 seconds, provides a strong indication of the hydrophilicity of the release layer surface.
  • the subsequent measurement at 70 seconds provides an indication of the extent to which any liquid (such as a polyether glycol functionalized polydimethyl siloxane) disposed within the release layer has been incorporated into the drop. Such incorporation may further reduce the measured DCA.
  • the samples cured against PET exhibit substantially lower (more hydrophilic) initial DCA measurements (105°, 87°) relative to the hydrophilic initial DCA measurements (114°, 113°) of the respective samples cured against air.
  • the samples cured against PET exhibited a drop in DCA of 8 to 17° between the first and second measurements.
  • the term “receding contact angle” or “RCA”, refers to a receding contact angle as measured using a Dataphysics OCA15 Pro Contact Angle measuring device, or a comparable Video-Based Optical Contact Angle Measuring System, using the above-described Drop Shape Method, at ambient temperatures.
  • the analogous “advancing contact angle”, or “ACA”, refers to an advancing contact angle measured substantially in the same fashion.
  • dynamic contact angle refers to a dynamic contact angle as measured using a Dataphysics OCA15 Pro Contact Angle measuring device, or a comparable Video-Based Optical Contact Angle Measuring System, using the method elaborated by Dr. Roger P. Woodward in the above-referenced “Contact Angle Measurements Using the Drop Shape Method”, at ambient temperatures, and as elaborated hereinabove in the Examples Section.
  • standard aging procedure refers to an accelerated aging protocol performed on each tested release layer at 160° C., for 2 hours, in a standard convection oven.
  • standard air curing refers to a conventional curing process for curing the release layer, described with respect to Comparative Examples 1A-1F, in which, during the curing of the release layer, the release layer surface (or “ink reception surface”) is exposed to air.
  • bulk hydrophobicity is characterized by a receding contact angle of a droplet of distilled water disposed on an inner surface of the release layer, the inner surface formed by exposing an area of the cured silicone material within the release layer.
  • the term “mainly includes”, with respect to a component within a formulation, refers to a weight content of at least 50%.
  • polymers and other macromolecules typically exist as a diverse population of distinct molecules, which are therefore characterized by an average molecular weight often expressed in Daltons.
  • the molecular weight or average molecular weight of materials are generally provided by the manufacturer or supplier. but can be independently determined by known analytical methods, including for instance gel permeation chromatography, high pressure liquid chromatography (HPLC) or matrix-assisted laser desorption/ionization time-of-flight mass spectroscopy MALDI-TOF MS.
  • Average molecular weight (D50) may be based on the number of particles in the population (“DN50”) or may be based on the volume of particles (Dv50). These measurements may be obtained by various known methods (e.g., DLS, microscopy).
  • compositions C1-C6 of the aqueous treatment formulation used in conjunction with the present invention are provided in the Table hereinbelow.
  • composition C7 of the aqueous treatment formulation used in conjunction with the present invention is provided in the Table hereinbelow:
  • Pigments used in the examples described below are generally supplied with initial particle size of a few micrometers. Such pigments were ground to submicron range in presence of the dispersing agent, the two materials being fed to the milling device (bead mill) as an aqueous mixture. The progress of milling was controlled on the basis of particle size measurements (for example, a Malvern or Nanosizer instrument). The milling was stopped when the average particle size (dv50) reached 70 to 100 nm.
  • the milled concentrate now having a Dv50 of less than 100 nm, typically between 70 and 100 nm, and was further diluted with 50 g water and extracted from the milling device at ca. 12 wt. % pigment concentration.
  • the millbase concentrate was further processed as below described for the preparation of an ink composition.
  • a first stage 2.4 g of sodium dodecanoate were added to 200 g of the millbase concentrate to yield a millbase.
  • the mixture was stirred to homogeneity (5′ magnetic stirrer at 50 rpm) and incubated at 60° C. for 1 day. The mixture was then left to cool down to ambient temperature.
  • Dot gain refers to the increase in dot size over the initial, spherical drop diameter.
  • the dot gain is determined by the ratio of the final dot diameter to the initial drop diameter. It is highly desirable to find a way to increase dot size without having to increase drop volume.
  • the inventors attained dot gains of at least 1.3, 1.4, or 1.5, and more typically, at least 1.6, 1.7, or at least 1.8, or within a range of 1.5 to 2.1, 1.5 to 2.1, 1.6 to 2.0, or 1.7 to 2.0.
  • the dried ink dots obtained were within a diameter range of 40 to 45 micrometers.
  • hydrophilicity and “hydrophilicity” and the like, may be used in a relative sense, and not necessarily in an absolute sense.
  • the term “functional group” refers to a group or moiety attached to the polymer structure of the release layer and having a higher polarity than the O—Si—O group of conventional addition-cured silicones.
  • Various examples are provided herein. The inventors observe that pure addition cure polydimethyl siloxane polymer contains O—Si—O, SiO 4 , Si—CH 3 and C—C groups, and that most other functional groups will have a higher dipole, such that they may be considered “functional”. It will be appreciated by those of skill in the art that such functional groups, may have a tendency or strong tendency to react with components typically present in aqueous inks utilized in indirect inkjet printing, at process temperatures of up to 120° C.
  • each of the verbs, “comprise” “include” and “have”, and conjugates thereof, are used to indicate that the object or objects of the verb are not necessarily a complete listing of members, components, elements, steps or parts of the subject or subjects of the verb. These terms encompass the terms “consisting of” and “consisting essentially of”.
  • % refers to percent by weight, unless specifically indicated otherwise.
  • % in the context of formulation components are wt % of the final formulation.
  • ratio refers to a weight ratio, unless specifically indicated otherwise.
  • adjectives such as “substantially” and “about” that modify a condition or relationship characteristic of a feature or features of an embodiment of the present technology are to be understood to mean that the condition or characteristic is defined to within tolerances that are acceptable for operation of the embodiment for an application for which it is intended.

Landscapes

  • Chemical & Material Sciences (AREA)
  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Life Sciences & Earth Sciences (AREA)
  • Materials Engineering (AREA)
  • Wood Science & Technology (AREA)
  • Organic Chemistry (AREA)
  • General Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Ink Jet Recording Methods And Recording Media Thereof (AREA)
  • Ink Jet (AREA)
  • Inks, Pencil-Leads, Or Crayons (AREA)

Abstract

Embodiments of the invention relate to a method of indirect printing with an aqueous ink formulation applied to the surface of the intermediate transfer member. Related apparatus, systems and treatment formulations are disclosed herein.

Description

    CROSS-REFERENCE TO RELATED APPLICATIONS
  • This application is a continuation of U.S. application Ser. No. 16/767,640 which is a national stage of PCT/IB2018/059761 (filed on Dec. 7, 2018), both of which are incorporated by reference for all purposes as if fully set forth herein. PCT/IB2018/059761 draws priority from U.S. Provisional Patent Application Ser. No. 62/595,584 filed Dec. 7, 2017 and from U.S. Provisional Patent Application Ser. No. 62/596,050 filed Dec. 7, 2017, both of which are incorporated by reference for all purposes as if fully set forth herein.
    • FIELD
  • The present disclosure relates to a digital printing process, aqueous treatment formulations, and related kits and systems.
    • BACKGROUND
  • The following patent publications provide potentially relevant background material, and are all incorporated by reference in their entirety: WO/2017/009722 (publication of PCT/IB2016/053049 filed May 25, 2016), WO/2016/166690 (publication of PCT/IB2016/052120 filed Apr. 4, 2016), WO/2016/151462 (publication of PCT/IB2016/051560 filed Mar. 20, 2016), WO/2016/113698 (publication of PCT/IB2016/050170 filed Jan. 14, 2016), WO/2015/110988 (publication of PCT/IB2015/050501 filed Jan. 22, 2015), WO/2015/036812 (publication of PCT/IB2013/002571 filed Sep. 12, 2013), WO/2015/036864 (publication of PCT/IB2014/002366 filed Sep. 11, 2014), WO/2015/036865 (publication of PCT/IB2014/002395 filed Sep. 11, 2014), WO/2015/036906 (publication of PCT/IB2014/064277 filed Sep. 12, 2014), WO/2013/136220 (publication of PCT/IB2013/051719 filed Mar. 5, 2013), WO/2013/132419 (publication of PCT/IB2013/051717 filed Mar. 5, 2013), WO/2013/132424 (publication of PCT/IB2013/051727 filed Mar. 5, 2013), WO/2013/132420 (publication of PCT/IB2013/051718 filed Mar. 5, 2013), WO/2013/132439 (publication of PCT/IB2013/051755 filed Mar. 5, 2013), WO/2013/132438 (publication of PCT/IB2013/051751 filed Mar. 5, 2013), WO/2013/132418 (publication of PCT/IB2013/051716 filed Mar. 5, 2013), WO/2013/132356 (publication of PCT/IB2013/050245 filed Jan. 10, 2013), WO/2013/132345 (publication of PCT/IB2013/000840 filed Mar. 5, 2013), WO/2013/132339 (publication of PCT/IB2013/000757 filed Mar. 5, 2013), WO/2013/132343 (publication of PCT/IB2013/000822 filed Mar. 5, 2013), WO/2013/132340 (publication of PCT/IB2013/000782 filed Mar. 5, 2013), WO/2013/132432 (publication of PCT/IB2013/051743 filed Mar. 5, 2013),
  • FIG. 1 is a flow chart of a conventional printing process where an intermediate transfer member (ITM) is pre-treated before deposition of an ink image thereto. In step S1, treatment solution is applied to a surface of a hydrophobic ITM to pretreat the ITM surface. In step S9, droplets of aqueous ink are ink-jetted onto the pretreated ITM surface to form an ink image thereon. In step S13, the ink image dries while on the ITM surface. In step S17, the dried ink-image is transferred to substrate.
    • SUMMARY
  • Aspects of the present invention relate to improved printing processes, to improved ITM (or portions thereof) and to improved compositions used for pre-treating the ITM before deposition of droplets of aqueous ink.
  • According to aspects of the present invention there is provided a method of printing comprising: a. providing an aqueous ink, an aqueous treatment formulation, and an intermediate transfer member (ITM) having a release surface; b. applying the aqueous treatment formulation to the release surface of the ITM to form a wet treatment layer thereon; c. subjecting the wet treatment layer to a drying process to form a dried treatment film from the wet treatment layer and on the ITM; d. depositing droplets of the aqueous ink onto the dried treatment film to form an ink image thereon; e. drying the ink image to leave an ink-image residue on the release surface of the ITM; and f. transferring the ink-image residue onto a printing substrate by pressured contact between the ITM and the substrate.
  • According to aspects of the present invention there is provided a method of printing comprising: a. providing an aqueous ink, an aqueous treatment formulation, and an intermediate transfer member (ITM) having a release surface, the aqueous treatment formulation including
      • i. at least 1.5%, by weight, of at least one water soluble polymer having a solubility in water of at least 5% at 25° C.;
      • ii. at least 5%, by weight, of a first non-ionic surfactant having a solubility in water of at least 5%, at 25° C.; and
      • iii. a carrier liquid containing water, said water making up at least 55%, by weight of the aqueous treatment formulation;
      • b. applying the aqueous treatment formulation to the release surface of the ITM to form a wet treatment layer thereon;
      • c. subjecting the wet treatment layer to a drying process to form a dried treatment film from the wet treatment layer and on the ITM;
      • d. depositing droplets of the aqueous ink onto the dried treatment film to form an ink image thereon;
      • e. drying the ink image to leave an ink-image residue on the release surface of the ITM; and
      • f. transferring the ink-image residue onto a printing substrate by pressured contact between the ITM and the substrate.
  • According to aspects of the present invention there is provided a system comprising: an intermediate transfer member (ITM) having a release layer surface of the ITM, an aqueous treatment formulation, a treatment station for applying the aqueous treatment formulation to the release layer surface of the ITM to produce a wet treatment layer, a drying station for drying the aqueous treatment formulation; at least one ink jet nozzle positioned proximate the intermediate transfer member and configured for jetting ink droplets onto the aqueous treatment formulation formed on the intermediate transfer member, an ink processing station configured to at least partially dry the ink on the aqueous treatment formulation formed on the intermediate transfer member to produce an ink-image residue, and an ink-image residue transfer mechanism for transferring the ink-image residue onto a printing substrate by pressured contact between the ITM and the printing substrate. In some embodiments of this aspect, the aqueous treatment formulation contains at most 2%, at most 1%, at most 0.5%, at most 0.1% by weight of a non-ionic, silicone-containing surfactant or is devoid a non-ionic, silicone-containing surfactant.
  • In one aspect of the present invention there is provided a system for indirect printing, the system comprising:
      • a. an intermediate transfer member (ITM) having a release layer surface of the ITM;
      • b. a quantity of an aqueous treatment formulation comprising:
        • i. at least 1.5%, by weight, of at least one water soluble polymer having a solubility in water of at least 5% at 25° C.;
        • ii. at least 5%, by weight, of a first non-ionic surfactant having a solubility in water of at least 7%, at 25° C.; and
        • iii. a carrier liquid containing water, said water making up at least 55%, by weight of the aqueous treatment formulation;
      • c. a treatment station for applying the aqueous treatment formulation to the release layer surface of the ITM to produce a wet treatment layer;
      • d. a drying station for drying the aqueous treatment formulation;
      • e. at least one ink jet nozzle positioned proximate the intermediate transfer member and configured for jetting ink droplets onto the aqueous treatment formulation formed on the intermediate transfer member;
      • f. an ink processing station configured to at least partially dry the ink on the aqueous treatment formulation formed on the intermediate transfer member to produce an ink-image residue; and
      • g. an ink-image residue transfer mechanism for transferring the ink-image residue onto a printing substrate by pressured contact between the ITM and the printing substrate. In some embodiments of this aspect, the aqueous treatment formulation contains at most 2%, at most 1%, at most 0.5%, at most 0.1% by weight of a non-ionic, silicone-containing surfactant or is devoid a non-ionic, silicone-containing surfactant.
  • In other embodiments of this aspect, the aqueous treatment formulation further comprises a second non-ionic, silicone-containing surfactant having a solubility in water of at least 1%, at 25° C. In some embodiments of this aspect or embodiments thereof, the release layer surface of the ITM is a silicone-based release layer surface. In additional embodiments of the present aspect or embodiments thereof, the release layer surface is sufficiently hydrophilic such that a receding contact angle of a drop of distilled water deposited on the silicone-based release layer surface is at most 60°. In some embodiments of the present aspect or embodiments thereof, the release layer surface is sufficiently hydrophilic such that a 10-second dynamic contact angle (DCA) of a drop of distilled water deposited on the silicone-based release layer surface is at most 108°. In some embodiments of the present aspect or embodiments thereof, the aqueous treatment formulation has a static surface tension within a range of 2-20 mN/m at 25° C. In some embodiments of the present aspect or embodiments thereof, the aqueous treatment formulation has a 25° C. dynamic viscosity of at least 10 cP. In some embodiments of the present aspect or embodiments thereof, the aqueous treatment formulation has a 60° C. evaporation load of at most 7.5:1, by weight. In other embodiments of the present aspect or embodiments thereof, the aqueous treatment formulation has a 60° C. evaporation load of at most 5:1, by weight. In some embodiments of the present aspect or embodiments thereof, the wet treatment layer has a thickness of at most 0.8 μm. In some embodiments of the present aspect or embodiments thereof, the aqueous treatment formulation further comprises a water absorbing agent. In some embodiments of the present aspects or embodiments thereof, the aqueous treatment formulation further comprises a polyethyleneimine.
  • In another aspect of the present invention, there is provided a system of indirect printing comprising:
      • a. an intermediate transfer member (ITM) having a release layer surface of the ITM;
      • b. a quantity of an aqueous treatment formulation comprising:
        • i. at least 1.5%, by weight, of polyvinyl alcohol having a solubility in water of at least 5% at 25° C.;
        • ii. at least 5%, by weight, of a first non-ionic surfactant having a solubility in water of at least 7%, at 25° C.; and
        • iii. a carrier liquid containing water, said water making up at least 55%, by weight of the aqueous treatment formulation;
      • wherein said aqueous treatment formulation contains at most 2%, at most 1%, at most 0.5%, at most 0.1% by weight of a non-ionic, silicone-containing surfactant or is devoid a non-ionic, silicone-containing surfactant;
      • c. a treatment station for applying the aqueous treatment formulation to the release layer surface of the ITM to produce a wet treatment layer;
      • d. a drying station for drying the aqueous treatment formulation;
      • e. at least one ink jet nozzle positioned proximate the intermediate transfer member and configured for jetting ink droplets onto the aqueous treatment formulation formed on the intermediate transfer member;
      • f. an ink processing station configured to at least partially dry the ink on the aqueous treatment formulation formed on the intermediate transfer member to produce an ink-image residue; and
      • g. an ink-image residue transfer mechanism for transferring the ink-image residue onto a printing substrate by pressured contact between the ITM and the printing substrate. In some embodiments of the present aspect, the aqueous treatment formulation additionally includes a polyethyleneimine (PEI).
  • In another aspect of the present invention, there is provided a method of indirect printing comprising:
      • a. providing an intermediate transfer member (ITM) having a release layer surface of the ITM;
      • b. providing an aqueous treatment formulation comprising:
        • i. at least 1.5%, by weight, of a polyvinyl alcohol having a solubility in water of at least 5% at 25° C.;
        • ii. at least 5%, by weight, of a first non-ionic surfactant having a solubility in water of at least 7%, at 25° C.; and
        • iii. a second non-ionic, silicone-containing surfactant having a solubility in water of at least 1%, at 25° C.;
        • iv. a carrier liquid containing water, said water making up at least 55%, by weight of the aqueous treatment formulation; and
        • v. a polyethyleneimine (PEI)
      • c. applying the aqueous treatment formulation to the release layer surface of the ITM to produce a wet treatment layer;
      • d. subjecting the wet treatment layer to a drying process to form a dried treatment film on the release layer surface of the ITM;
      • e. depositing droplets of an aqueous ink onto the dried treatment film to form an ink image on the release layer surface of the ITM;
      • f. drying the ink image to leave an ink-image residue on the release layer surface of the ITM; and
      • g. transferring the ink-image residue onto a printing substrate by pressured contact between the ITM and the printing substrate.
  • In some embodiments of the present aspect, the aqueous treatment formulation has a 60° C. evaporation load of at most 5:1, by weight. In other embodiments of the present aspect or embodiments thereof, the polyethyleneimine has an average molecular weight of 200,000 to 2,000,000 g/mol
  • According to aspects of the present invention, there is provided a method of indirect printing comprising:
      • a. providing an intermediate transfer member (ITM) having a release layer surface of the ITM;
      • b. providing an aqueous treatment formulation comprising:
        • i. at least 1.5%, by weight, of at least one water soluble polymer having a solubility in water of at least 5% at 25° C.;
        • ii. at least 5%, by weight, of a first non-ionic surfactant having a solubility in water of at least 7%, at 25° C.; and
        • iii. a carrier liquid containing water, said water making up at least 55%, by weight of the aqueous treatment formulation;
      • c. applying the aqueous treatment formulation to the release layer surface of the ITM to produce a wet treatment layer;
      • d. subjecting the wet treatment layer to a drying process to form a dried treatment film on the release layer surface of the ITM;
      • e. depositing droplets of an aqueous ink onto the dried treatment film to form an ink image on the release layer surface of the ITM;
      • f. drying the ink image to leave an ink-image residue on the release layer surface of the ITM; and
      • g. transferring the ink-image residue onto a printing substrate by pressured contact between the ITM and the printing substrate. In some embodiments of this aspect, the aqueous treatment formulation contains at most 2%, at most 1%, at most 0.5%, at most 0.1% by weight of a non-ionic, silicone-containing surfactant or is devoid a non-ionic, silicone-containing surfactant.
  • According to some aspects of the present invention, a system is provided for indirect printing, the system comprising:
      • a. an intermediate transfer member (ITM) comprising a silicone-based release layer surface that is sufficiently hydrophilic to satisfy at least one of the following properties: (i) a receding contact angle of a drop of distilled water deposited on the silicone-based release layer surface is at most 60°; and (ii) a 10-second dynamic contact angle (DCA) of a drop of distilled water deposited on the silicone-based release layer surface is at most 108°;
      • b. a quantity of an aqueous treatment formulation including:
        • i. at least 1.5%, by weight, of at least one water soluble polymer having a solubility in water of at least 5% at 25° C.;
        • ii. at least 5%, by weight, of a first non-ionic surfactant having a solubility in water of at least 7%, at 25° C.; and
        • iii. a second non-ionic, silicone-containing surfactant having a solubility in water of at least 1%, at 25° C.;
        • iv. a carrier liquid containing water, said water making up at least 55%, by weight of the aqueous treatment formulation;
          • said aqueous treatment formulation optionally including at least one of or both of: v. a water absorbing agent; and vi polyethyleneimine (PEI).
      • said aqueous treatment formulation having the following properties:
        • i. a static surface tension within a range of 20 and 40 mN/m at 25° C.;
        • ii. a 25° C. dynamic viscosity that is at least 10 cP; and
        • iii. a 60° C. evaporation load of at most 7.5:1, by weight;
      • c. a treatment station for applying the aqueous treatment formulation to the silicone-based release layer surface of the ITM to form thereon a wet treatment layer having a thickness of at most 0.8 μm;
      • d. a drying station for drying the aqueous treatment formulation;
      • e. at least one ink jet nozzle positioned proximate the intermediate transfer member and configured for jetting ink droplets onto the aqueous treatment formulation formed on the intermediate transfer member;
      • f. an ink processing station configured to at least partially dry the ink on the aqueous treatment formulation formed on the intermediate transfer member to produce an ink-image residue; and
      • g. an ink-image residue transfer mechanism for transferring the ink-image residue onto a printing substrate by pressured contact between the ITM and the printing substrate. In some embodiments of this aspect, the water soluble polymer is a polyvinyl alcohol and the aqueous treatment formulation additionally comprises a polyethyleneimine (PEI) having an average molecular weight of 200,000 to 2,000,000 g/mol.
  • According to aspects of the present invention, there is provided a method of indirect printing comprising: a. providing an intermediate transfer member (ITM) having a release layer surface; b. providing an aqueous treatment formulation comprising: i. at least 1.5%, by weight, of at least one water soluble polymer having a solubility in water of at least 5% at 25° C.; ii. at least 5%, by weight, of a first non-ionic surfactant having a solubility in water of at least 7%, at 25° C.; and iii. a second non-ionic, silicone-containing surfactant having a solubility in water of at least 1%, at 25° C. and; iv. a carrier liquid containing water, said water making up at least 55%, by weight of the aqueous treatment formulation; c. applying the aqueous treatment formulation to the release layer surface of the ITM to produce a wet treatment layer; d. subjecting the wet treatment layer to a drying process to form a dried treatment film, on the release layer surface; e. depositing droplets of an aqueous ink onto the dried treatment film to form an ink image on the release layer surface; f. drying the ink image to leave an ink-image residue on the release layer surface; and g. transferring the ink-image residue onto a printing substrate by pressured contact between the ITM and the printing substrate. In some embodiments of this aspect, the release layer surface of the ITM is a silicone-based release layer surface.
  • In some embodiments of the present aspect or embodiments thereof, the method comprises an intermediate transfer member comprising a silicone-based release layer surface. In other embodiments of the present aspect or embodiments thereof, the method comprises a release layer surface which is sufficiently hydrophilic such that a receding contact angle of a drop of distilled water deposited on the silicone-based release layer surface is at most 60°. In additional embodiments, the release layer surface is sufficiently hydrophilic such that a 10-second dynamic contact angle (DCA) of a drop of distilled water deposited on the silicone-based release layer surface is at most 108°.
  • In other embodiments of the above aspects or embodiments thereof, the aqueous treatment formulation has a static surface tension within a range of 2-20 mN/m at 25° C. In some embodiments of the above aspects or embodiments thereof, the aqueous treatment formulation has a 25° C. dynamic viscosity of at least 10 cP. In some embodiments of the above aspects or embodiments thereof, the aqueous treatment formulation has a 60° C. evaporation load of at most 7.5:1, by weight. In some embodiments of the above aspects or embodiments thereof, the aqueous treatment formulation has a 60° C. evaporation load of at most 5:1, by weight. In some embodiments of the above aspects or embodiments thereof or embodiments thereof, the wet treatment layer has a thickness of at most 0.8 μm. In some embodiments of the above aspects or embodiments thereof, the aqueous treatment formulation further comprises a water absorbing agent. In some embodiments of the above aspects or embodiments thereof, the aqueous treatment formulation further comprises a polyethyleneimine.
  • In another aspect of the present invention, there is provided a method of indirect printing comprising:
      • a. providing an intermediate transfer member (ITM) having a release layer surface of the ITM;
      • b. providing an aqueous treatment formulation comprising:
        • i. at least 1.5%, by weight, of a polyvinyl alcohol having a solubility in water of at least 5% at 25° C.;
        • ii. at least 5%, by weight, of a first non-ionic surfactant having a solubility in water of at least 7%, at 25° C.;
        • iv. a carrier liquid containing water, said water making up at least 55%, by weight of the aqueous treatment formulation
          wherein said aqueous treatment formulation contains at most 2%, at most 1%, at most 0.5%, at most 0.1% by weight of a non-ionic, silicone-containing surfactant or is devoid a non-ionic, silicone-containing surfactant;
      • c. applying the aqueous treatment formulation to the release layer surface of the ITM to produce a wet treatment layer;
      • d. subjecting the wet treatment layer to a drying process to form a dried treatment film on the release layer surface of the ITM;
      • e. depositing droplets of an aqueous ink onto the dried treatment film to form an ink image on the release layer surface of the ITM;
      • f. drying the ink image to leave an ink-image residue on the release layer surface of the ITM; and
      • g. transferring the ink-image residue onto a printing substrate by pressured contact between the ITM and the printing substrate. In some embodiments of this aspect, the aqueous treatment formulation further comprises a polyethyleneimine (PEI).
  • In another aspect of the present invention, there is provided a method of indirect printing of any one of the preceding claims comprising:
      • a. providing an intermediate transfer member (ITM) having a release layer surface of the ITM;
      • b. providing an aqueous treatment formulation comprising: i. at least 1.5%, by weight, of a polyvinyl alcohol having a solubility in water of at least 5% at 25° C.; ii. at least 5%, by weight, of a first non-ionic surfactant having a solubility in water of at least 7%, at 25° C.; and iii. a second non-ionic, silicone-containing surfactant having a solubility in water of at least 1%, at 25° C.; iv. a carrier liquid containing water, said water making up at least 55%, by weight of the aqueous treatment formulation; and v. a polyethyleneimine (PEI);
      • c. applying the aqueous treatment formulation to the release layer surface of the ITM to produce a wet treatment layer;
      • d. subjecting the wet treatment layer to a drying process to form a dried treatment film on the release layer surface of the ITM;
      • e. depositing droplets of an aqueous ink onto the dried treatment film to form an ink image on the release layer surface of the ITM;
      • f. drying the ink image to leave an ink-image residue on the release layer surface of the ITM; and
      • g. transferring the ink-image residue onto a printing substrate by pressured contact between the ITM and the printing substrate. In some embodiments of the present aspect, the aqueous treatment formulation has a 60° C. evaporation load of at most 5:1, by weight. In other embodiments of the present aspect, the polyethyleneimine has an average molecular weight of 200,000 to 2,000,000 g/mol.
  • According to aspects of the present invention there is provided a method of indirect printing comprising: a. providing an intermediate transfer member (ITM) comprising a silicone-based release layer surface that is sufficiently hydrophilic to satisfy at least one of the following properties: (i) a receding contact angle of a drop of distilled water deposited on the silicone-based release layer surface is at most 60°; and (ii) a 10-second dynamic contact angle (DCA) of a drop of distilled water deposited on the silicone-based release layer surface is at most 108°; b. providing an aqueous treatment formulation including: i. at least 1.5%, by weight, of at least one water soluble polymer having a solubility in water of at least 5% at 25° C.; ii. at least 5%, by weight, of a first non-ionic surfactant having a solubility in water of at least 7%, at 25° C.; iii. a second non-ionic, silicone-containing surfactant having a solubility in water of at least 1%, at 25° C.; and iv. a carrier liquid containing water, said water making up at least 55%, by weight of the aqueous treatment formulation; said aqueous treatment formulation optionally including at least one of, or both of: v. a water absorbing agent; and vi. polyethyleneimine (PEI), said aqueous treatment formulation having the following properties: i. a static surface tension within a range of 20 and 40 mN/m at 25° C.; ii. a 25° C. dynamic viscosity that is at least 10 cP; and iii. a 60° C. evaporation load of at most 7.5:1, by weight; c. applying the aqueous treatment formulation to the silicone-based release layer surface of the ITM to form thereon a wet treatment layer having a thickness of at most 0.8 μm; d. subjecting the wet treatment layer to a drying process to form a dried treatment film, from the wet treatment layer, on the silicone-based release layer surface; e. depositing droplets of an aqueous ink onto the dried treatment film to form an ink image on the release layer surface of the silicone-based release layer surface drying the ink image to leave an ink-image residue on the silicone-based release layer surface; and g. transferring the ink-image residue onto a printing substrate by pressured contact between the ITM and the printing substrate. In some embodiments of this aspect, the water soluble polymer is a polyvinyl alcohol and the aqueous treatment formulation additionally comprises a polyethyleneimine (PEI) having an average molecular weight of 200,000 to 2,000,000 g/mol. In some embodiments of the present aspect or embodiments thereof, said aqueous treatment formulation contains at least 6%, at least 7%, at least 8%, at least 9%, or at least 10%, by weight, of said first non-ionic surfactant. In some embodiments of the present aspect or embodiments thereof, said aqueous treatment formulation contains at most 18%, at most 16%, at most 15%, at most 14%, or at most 13%, by weight, of said first non-ionic surfactant.
  • According to aspects of the present invention there is provided a system for indirect printing comprising:
      • a. an intermediate transfer member (ITM) having a release layer surface of the ITM; and
      • b. a quantity of an aqueous treatment formulation including:
        • i. at least 1.5%, by weight, of at least one water soluble polymer having a solubility in water of at least 5% at 25° C.;
        • ii. at least 5%, by weight, of a first non-ionic surfactant having a solubility in water of at least 7%, at 25° C.; and
        • iii. a second non-ionic, silicone-containing surfactant having a solubility in water of at least 1%, at 25° C.;
        • iv. a carrier liquid containing water, said water making up at least 55%, by weight of the aqueous treatment formulation;
      • said aqueous treatment formulation optionally including at least one or both of: (a) a water absorbing agent; and (a) polyethyleneimine (PEI);
      • c. a treatment station for applying the aqueous treatment formulation to the silicone-based release layer surface of the ITM to form thereon a wet treatment layer;
      • d. an image forming station for forming ink images on the ITM by depositing droplets of an aqueous ink upon the silicone-based release layer surface after the wet treatment layer has dried into a dried treatment film so that the droplets are applied to the dried treatment film; and
      • e. a transfer station for transferring the ink images from the ITM to substrate.
  • According to additional aspects of the present invention, there is provided a system for printing, the system comprising: a. an intermediate transfer member (ITM) comprising a silicone-based release layer surface that is sufficiently hydrophilic to satisfy at least one of the following properties: (i) a receding contact angle of a drop of distilled water deposited on the silicone-based release layer surface is at most 60°; and (ii) a 10-second dynamic contact angle (DCA) of a drop of distilled water deposited on the silicone-based release layer surface is at most 108°; and b. a quantity of an aqueous treatment formulation including: i. at least 1.5%, by weight, of at least one water soluble polymer having a solubility in water of at least 5% at 25° C.; ii. at least 5%, by weight, of a first non-ionic surfactant having a solubility in water of at least 7%, at 25° C.; and iii. a second non-ionic, silicone-containing surfactant having a solubility in water of at least 1%, at 25° C.; iv. a carrier liquid containing water, said water making up at least 55%, by weight of the aqueous treatment formulation; said aqueous treatment formulation optionally including at least one of or both of: v. a water absorbing agent; and vi. polyethyleneimine (PEI); said aqueous treatment formulation having the following properties: i. a static surface tension within a range of 20 and 40 mN/m at 25° C.; ii. a 25° C. dynamic viscosity that is at least 10 cP; and iii. a 60° C. evaporation load of at most 7.5:1, by weight; c. a treatment station for applying the aqueous treatment formulation to the silicone-based release layer surface of the ITM to form thereon a wet treatment layer; d. an image forming station for forming ink images on the ITM by depositing droplets of an aqueous ink upon the silicone-based release layer surface after the wet treatment layer has dried into a dried treatment film so that the droplets are applied to the dried treatment film; and e. a transfer station for transferring the ink images from the ITM to substrate.
  • In some embodiments of any of the above aspects or embodiments thereof, there is provided an ITM aqueous treatment formulation comprising: i. at least 1.5%, by weight, of at least one water soluble polymer having a solubility in water of at least 5% at 25° C.; ii. at least 5%, by weight, of a first non-ionic surfactant having a solubility in water of at least 7%, at 25° C.; and iii. a second non-ionic, silicone-containing surfactant having a solubility in water of at least 1%, at 25° C.; iv. a carrier liquid containing water, said water making up at least 55%, by weight of the aqueous treatment formulation; said aqueous treatment formulation optionally including at least one or both of: v. a water absorbing agent; and vi. polyethyleneimine (PEI).
  • In some embodiments of any of the above aspects or embodiments thereof, there is provided an ITM aqueous treatment formulation comprising: i. 1.5-10%, by weight, of at least one water soluble polymer having a solubility in water of at least 5% at 25° C.; ii. 5-15%, by weight, of a first non-ionic surfactant having a solubility in water of at least 7%, at 25° C.; and iii. 0.1-3% of a second non-ionic, silicone-containing surfactant having a solubility in water of at least 1%, at 25° C.; iv. a carrier liquid containing water, said water making up at least 55%, by weight of the aqueous treatment formulation; said aqueous treatment formulation optionally including at least one or both of: v. a water absorbing agent; and vi. polyethyleneimine (PEI).
  • In aspects of the present invention, there is provided an ITM aqueous treatment formulation comprising: i. 1.5-5%, by weight, of at least one water soluble polymer having a solubility in water of at least 5% at 25° C.; ii. 5-15%, by weight, of a first non-ionic surfactant having a solubility in water of at least 7%, at 25° C.; and iii. 0.8-1.8% of a second non-ionic, silicone-containing surfactant having a solubility in water of at least 1%, at 25° C.; iv. a carrier liquid containing water, said water making up at least 55%, by weight of the aqueous treatment formulation; said aqueous treatment formulation optionally including at least one or both of: v. a water absorbing agent; and vi. polyethyleneimine (PEI).
  • In some embodiments of any of the above aspects or embodiments thereof, the aqueous treatment formulation contains at least 6%, at least 7%, at least 8%, at least 9%, or at least 10%, by weight, of said first non-ionic surfactant.
  • In some embodiments of any of the above aspects or embodiments thereof, the aqueous treatment formulation contains at most 18%, at most 16%, at most 15%, at most 14%, or at most 13%, by weight, of said first non-ionic surfactant.
  • In some embodiments of any of the above aspects or embodiments thereof, the first non-ionic surfactant within said aqueous treatment formulation, by weight, has a concentration within a range of 5.5-18%, 5.5-16%, 6.5-18%, 6.5-16%, 7.5-18%, 7.5-16%, 8.5-18%, 8.5-16%, 9.5-18%, 9.5-16%, 10.5-18%, or 10.5-16%. In some embodiments of any of the above aspects or embodiments thereof, the first non-ionic surfactant within the aqueous treatment formulation, by weight, is within the range of 7.5-18%. In some embodiments, the first non-ionic surfactant within the aqueous treatment formulation, by weight, is within the range of 8.5-16%. In some embodiments of any of the above aspects or embodiments thereof, the first non-ionic surfactant within the aqueous treatment formulation, by weight, is within the range of 9.5-16%.
  • In some embodiments of any of the above aspects or embodiments thereof, the second, non-ionic silicone-containing surfactant includes a polysiloxane-polyoxyalkylene copolymer, and wherein optionally, a concentration of said polysiloxane-polyoxyalkylene copolymer is at least 0.3%, at least 0.5%, at least 0.75%, or at least 1.0%, by weight, and further optionally, at most 5%, at most 4%, at most 3%, at most 2.5%, at most 2%, or at most 1.75%, by weight. In some embodiments of any of the above aspects or embodiments thereof, the second, non-ionic silicone-containing surfactant includes or is a polysiloxane-polyoxyalkylene copolymer.
  • In some embodiments of any of the above aspects or embodiments thereof, the aqueous treatment formulation contains at least 0.3%, at least 0.5%, at least 0.75%, or at least 1.0%, by weight and optionally, at most 5%, at most 4%, at most 3%, at most 2.5%, at most 2%, or at most 1.75%, by weight, of said second, non-ionic silicone-containing surfactant. In some embodiments of any of the above aspects or embodiments thereof, the aqueous treatment formulation contains 0.3%-5% by weight, of said second, non-ionic silicone-containing surfactant. In some embodiments of any of the above aspects or embodiments thereof, the aqueous treatment formulation contains 0.5%-4% by weight, of said second, non-ionic silicone-containing surfactant. In some embodiments, the aqueous treatment formulation contains 0.75%-2% by weight, of said second, non-ionic silicone-containing surfactant.
  • In some embodiments of any of the above aspects or embodiments thereof, a cloud point temperature of said first non-ionic surfactant is at least 60° C., at least 70° C., at least 80° C., at least 90° C., at least 100° C., at least 105° C., at least 110° C., at least 115° C., at least 120° C., or at least 130° C., optionally as determined by the ASTM D7689-11 test method.
  • In some embodiments of any of the above aspects or embodiments thereof, the aqueous treatment formulation further includes at least one of, or both of: i. a water absorbing agent; and ii. a polyethyleneimine (PEI). In some embodiments, the aqueous treatment formulation includes a water absorbing agent. In some embodiments, the aqueous treatment formulation includes a polyethyleneimine (PEI). In some embodiments of any of the above aspects or embodiments thereof, the aqueous treatment formulation includes both a water absorbing agent and said polyethyleneimine (PEI).
  • In some embodiments of any of the above aspects or embodiments thereof, the concentration of quaternary ammonium salt within said aqueous treatment formulation, by weight, is at most 1%, at most 0.8%, at most 0.6%, at most 0.4%, at most 0.2%, at most 0.1%, at most 0.05%, or wherein the provided aqueous treatment formulation is devoid of said quaternary ammonium salt. In some embodiments of any of the above aspects or embodiments thereof, the concentration of quaternary ammonium salt within the aqueous treatment formulation, by weight, is at most 1%. In some embodiments of any of the above aspects or embodiments thereof, the concentration of quaternary ammonium salt within the aqueous treatment formulation, by weight, is at most 0.1%. In some embodiments of any of the above aspects or embodiments thereof, the aqueous treatment formulation is devoid of quaternary ammonium salt.
  • In some embodiments of any of the above aspects or embodiments thereof, the water-soluble polymer is selected from at least one of the groups consisting of polyvinyl alcohol, water-soluble cellulose, polyvinylpyrrolidone (PVP), polyethylene oxide, and water-soluble acrylates. One of skilled in the art would appreciate that it is possible to combine one or more water soluble polymers to achieve the desired weight % concentration in the aqueous treatment formulation for example, to achieve an end concentration of water-soluble polymer of 2.0 to 8.0% by weight.
  • In some embodiments of any of the above aspects or embodiments thereof, the water-soluble polymer is a polyvinyl alcohol. In some embodiments, the water-soluble polymer is a water-soluble cellulose. In some embodiments, the water-soluble polymer is a polyvinylpyrrolidone (PVP). In some embodiments, the water-soluble polymer is a polyethylene oxide. In some embodiments, the water-soluble polymer is a is water-soluble acrylate.
  • In some embodiments of any of the above aspects or embodiments thereof, the concentration of polyethyleneimine within said aqueous treatment formulation, by weight, is within a range of 0.1 to 1%, 0.1 to 0.8%, 0.1 to 0.7%, 0.1 to 0.6%, 0.1 to 0.5%, 0.2 to 0.7%, 0.2 to 0.6%, or 0.2 to 0.5%, or wherein an average molecular weight of said polyethyleneimine is at least 200,000, at least 350,000, at least 500,000, at least 700,000, and optionally, at most 3,000,000, at most 2,500,000, or at most 2,000,000 g/mol. In some embodiments, the concentration of polyethyleneimine within said aqueous treatment formulation, by weight, is within the range of 0.1 to 1%. In some embodiments, the concentration of polyethyleneimine within said aqueous treatment formulation, by weight, is within the range of 0.1 to 0.8%. In some embodiments, the concentration of polyethyleneimine within said aqueous treatment formulation, by weight, is within the range of 0.1 to 0.7%. In some embodiments, the concentration of polyethyleneimine within said aqueous treatment formulation, by weight, is within the range of 0.1 to 0.6%. In some embodiment of any of the above aspects or embodiments thereof, the concentration of polyethyleneimine within said aqueous treatment formulation, by weight, is within the range of 0.1 to 0.5%. In some embodiments of any of the above aspects or embodiments thereof, the concentration of polyethyleneimine within said aqueous treatment formulation, by weight, is within the range of 0.2 to 0.7%. In some embodiments of any of the above aspects or embodiments thereof, the concentration of polyethyleneimine within said aqueous treatment formulation, by weight, is within the range of 0.2 to 0.6%. In some embodiments of any of the above aspects or embodiments thereof, the concentration of polyethyleneimine within said aqueous treatment formulation, by weight, is within the range of 0.2 to 0.5%.
  • Various molecular weights of polyethyleneimine may be used in the implementation of the present invention. In some embodiments, the average molecular weight of the polyethyleneimine is 200,000 to 3,000,000 g/mol. In some embodiments, the average molecular weight of the polyethyleneimine is 350,000 to 2,000,000 g/mol. In some embodiments, the average molecular weight of the polyethyleneimine is 500,000 to 2,000,000 g/mol. In some embodiments, the concentration of polyethyleneimine within said aqueous treatment formulation, by weight, is within the range of 0.1 to 1% and the average molecular weight of the polyethyleneimine is 200,000 to 3,000,000 g/mol.
  • In some embodiments of any of the above aspects or embodiments thereof, the concentration of polyethyleneimine within said aqueous treatment formulation, by weight, is within the range of 0.1 to 1% and the average molecular weight of the polyethyleneimine is 350,000 to 2,000.00 g/mol. In some embodiments of any of the above aspects or embodiments thereof, the concentration of polyethyleneimine within said aqueous treatment formulation, by weight, is within the range of 0.1 to 1% and the average molecular weight of the polyethyleneimine is 500,000 to 2,000,000 g/mol. In some embodiments of any of the above aspects or embodiments thereof, the concentration of polyethyleneimine within said aqueous treatment formulation, by weight, is within the range of 0.1 to 1% and the average molecular weight of the polyethyleneimine is 200,000 to 3,000,000 g/mol. In some embodiments of any of the above aspects or embodiments thereof, the concentration of polyethyleneimine within said aqueous treatment formulation, by weight, is within the range of 0.1 to 0.5% and the average molecular weight of the polyethyleneimine is 350,000 to 2,000,000 g/mol. In some embodiments of any of the above aspects or embodiments thereof, the concentration of polyethyleneimine within said aqueous treatment formulation, by weight, is within the range of 0.1 to 0.5% and the average molecular weight of the polyethyleneimine is 500,000 to 2,000,000 g/mol. In some embodiments of any of the above aspects or embodiments thereof, the concentration of polyethyleneimine within said aqueous treatment formulation, by weight, is within the range of 0.1 to 0.5% and the average molecular weight of the polyethyleneimine is 200,000 to 3,000,000 g/mol.
  • In some embodiments of any of the above aspects or embodiments thereof, the concentration of polyethyleneimine within said aqueous treatment formulation, by weight, is within the range of 0.2 to 0.5% and the average molecular weight of the polyethyleneimine is 350,000 to 2,000,000 g/mol. In some embodiments of any of the above aspects or embodiments thereof, the concentration of polyethyleneimine within said aqueous treatment formulation, by weight, is within the range of 0.2 to 0.5% and the average molecular weight of the polyethyleneimine is 500,000 to 2,000,000 g/mol. In some embodiments of any of the above aspects or embodiments thereof, the concentration of polyethyleneimine within said aqueous treatment formulation, by weight, is within the range of 0.2 to 0.5% and the average molecular weight of the polyethyleneimine is 200,000 to 3,000,000 g/mol.
  • In some embodiments of any of the above aspects or embodiments thereof, the concentration of polyethyleneimine within said aqueous treatment formulation and having an average molecular weight of 500,000 to 1,000,000 g/mol is within the range of 0.1 to 1%, by weight.
  • In some embodiments of any of the above aspects or embodiments thereof, the concentration of polyethyleneimine within said aqueous treatment formulation and having an average molecular weight of 500,000 to 1,000,000 g/mol is within the range of 0.1 to 0.8%. In some embodiments of any of the above aspects or embodiments thereof, the concentration of polyethyleneimine within said aqueous treatment formulation and having an average molecular weight of 500,000 to 1,000,000 g/mol is within the range of 0.1 to 0.7%. In some embodiments of any of the above aspects or embodiments thereof, the concentration of polyethyleneimine within said aqueous treatment formulation and having an average molecular weight of 500,000 to 1,000,000 g/mol, is within the range of 0.1 to 0.6%. In some embodiments of any of the above aspects or embodiments thereof, the concentration of polyethyleneimine within said aqueous treatment formulation and having an average molecular weight of 500,000 to 1,000,000 g/mol is within the range of 0.1 to 0.5%. In some embodiments of any of the above aspects or embodiments thereof, the concentration of polyethyleneimine within said aqueous treatment formulation and having an average molecular weight of 500,000 to 1,000,000 g/mol is within the range of 0.2 to 0.7%. In some embodiments of any of the above aspects or embodiments thereof, the concentration of polyethyleneimine within said aqueous treatment formulation and having an average molecular weight of 500,000 to 1,000,000 g/mol is within the range of 0.2 to 0.6%. In some embodiments of any of the above aspects or embodiments thereof, the concentration of polyethyleneimine within said aqueous treatment formulation and having an average molecular weight of 500,000 to 1,000,000 g/mol is within the range of 0.2 to 0.5%.
  • In some embodiments of any of the above aspects or embodiments thereof, the first non-ionic surfactant is, mainly includes, or includes a polyethoxylated sorbitan ester. In some embodiments of any of the above aspects or embodiments thereof, the first non-ionic surfactant is a polyethoxylated sorbitan ester. In some embodiments of any of the above aspects or embodiments thereof, the first non-ionic surfactant is mainly a polyethoxylated sorbitan ester. In some embodiments of any of the above aspects or embodiments thereof, the first non-ionic surfactant includes a polyethoxylated sorbitan ester.
  • In some embodiments of any of the above aspects or embodiments thereof, the polyethoxylated sorbitan ester includes at least one species or at least two species selected from the group consisting of PEG-4 sorbitan monolaurate, PEG-20 sorbitan monolaurate, PEG-20 sorbitan monopalmitate, PEG-20 sorbitan monostearate, and PEG-20 sorbitan monooleate.
  • In some embodiments of any of the above aspects or embodiments thereof, an HLB number of said first non-ionic surfactant is at least 11, at least 12, at least 13, at least 14, or at least 14.5, and optionally, at most 22, at most 21, at most 20, at most 19, at most 18, or at most 17, and further optionally, within a range of 11 to 25, 11 to 23, 11.5 to 21, 11.5 to 20, 11.5 to 18, 12.5 to 21, 12.5 to 20, 12.5 to 18, 13.5 to 21, 13.5 to 20, 13.5 to 18, 14 to 20.5, 14 to 18.5, 14.5 to 20, 14.5 to 19, 14.5 to 18, or 14.5 to 17.5. In some embodiments of any of the above aspects or embodiments thereof the HLB number of said first non-ionic surfactant is within the range of 11 to 25. In some embodiments of any of the above aspects or embodiments thereof, the HLB number of said first non-ionic surfactant is within the range of 14.5 to 20.
  • In some embodiments of any of the above aspects or embodiments thereof, the a 60° C. evaporation load is at most 7.5:1, 7:1, 6:1, 5.5:1, 5:1, 4.5:1, 4:1, or 3.5:1, by weight, and optionally, wherein said evaporation load is at least 2:1, at least 2.2:1 or at least 2.5:1, and further optionally, wherein said evaporation load is within a range of 2:1 to 8:1, 2:1 to 6.5:1, 2.3:1 to 7:1, 2.3:1 to 5:1, 2.3:1 to 8:1, 2.3:1 to 6:1, 2.3:1 to 5:1, 2.3:1 to 4.5:1, 2.3:1 to 4:1, 2.3:1 to 3.5:1, 2.5:1 to 8:1, 2.5:1 to 6:1, 2.5:1 to 5:1, 2.5:1 to 4.5:1, 2.5:1 to 4:1, or 2.5:1 to 3.5:1. In some embodiments of any of the above aspects or embodiments thereof, the a 60° C. evaporation load is within a range of 2:1 to 6.5:1. In some embodiments of any of the above aspects or embodiments thereof, the a 60° C. evaporation load is within a range of 2.3:1 to 6:1. In some embodiments of any of the above aspects or embodiments thereof, the a 60° C. evaporation load is within a range of 2.3:1 to 5:1. In some embodiments of any of the above aspects or embodiments thereof the a 60° C. evaporation load is within a range of 2.3:1 to 4:1.
  • In some embodiments of any of the above aspects or embodiments thereof, the concentration of said water soluble polymer is within a range of 2.0 to 8%, 2.5 to 6.5%, 2.5 to 6%, 2.5 to 5.5%, or 2.5 to 5%, by weight, and wherein said evaporation load is within a range of 2.3:1 to 4.5:1, 2.3:1 to 4:1, 2.5:1 to 4.2:1, 2.5:1 to 4:1, 2.5:1 to 3.8:1, or 2.5:1 to 3.6:1. In some embodiments, the concentration of the water soluble polymer is within the range of 2.0 to 8%, by weight. In some embodiments, the concentration of the water-soluble polymer is within the range of 2.5 to 5.5% by weight. In some embodiments, the concentration of the water-soluble polymer is within the range of 2.3:1 to 4.5:1% by weight.
  • In some embodiments of any of the above aspects or embodiments thereof the aqueous treatment formulation has a total surfactant concentration of at least 6%, at least 7%, at least 8%, at least 10%, or at least 12%, and optionally, within a range of 6 to 40%, 6 to 30%, 6 to 20%, 7 to 30%, 7 to 20%, 7 to 15%, 8 to 25%, 8 to 20%, 8 to 15%, 8 to 13%, 9 to 25%, 9 to 20%, 9 to 15%, 9 to 13%, 10 to 25%, 10 to 20%, 10 to 15%, or 10 to 13% by weight. In some embodiments, the aqueous treatment formulation has a total surfactant concentration within the range of 6 to 20% by weight. In some embodiments, the aqueous treatment formulation has a total surfactant concentration within the range of 8 to 20% by weight. In some embodiments, the aqueous treatment formulation has a total surfactant concentration within the range of 10 to 20% by weight. In some embodiments, the aqueous treatment formulation has a total surfactant concentration within the range of 10 to 15% by weight.
  • In some embodiments of any of the above aspects or embodiments thereof, the solubility in water of said at least one water soluble polymer, at 25° C., is at least 7%, at least 10%, at least 12%, at least 15%, at least 20%, or at least 25%, and optionally, at most 80% or at most 60% by weight. In some embodiments, the solubility in water of said at least one water soluble polymer, at 25° C., is at least 10%, by weight. In some embodiments, the solubility in water of said at least one water soluble polymer, at 25° C., is at least 15%, by weight. In some embodiments, the solubility in water of at least one water soluble polymer, at 25° C., is at least 7%.
  • In some embodiments of any of the above aspects or embodiments thereof, the solubility in water of said first non-ionic surfactant, at 25° C., is at least 8%, at least 10%, at least 12%, at least 15%, at least 20%, at least 25%, or at least 30%, and optionally, at most 80% or at most 60% by weight. In some embodiments of any of the above aspects or embodiments thereof, the solubility in water of said first non-ionic surfactant, at 25° C., is at least 12% by weight. In some embodiments of any of the above aspects or embodiments thereof, the solubility in water of said first non-ionic surfactant, at 25° C., is at least 20% by weight.
  • In some embodiments of any of the above aspects or embodiments thereof, the formulation further comprises said water absorbing agent, selected whereby, when said aqueous treatment solution is evaporated to form a solid film, said water absorbing agent acts as a water absorber that absorbs water from said aqueous treatment solution.
  • In some embodiments of any of the above aspects or embodiments thereof, the 25° C. viscosity is within a range of 10 cP to 100 cP, 10 cP to 80 cP, 10 cP to 50 cP, 10 cP to 30 cP, 13 cP to 100 cP, 13 cP to 80 cP, 13 cP to 50 cP, 13 cP to 30 cP, 15 cP to 100 cP, 15 cP to 80 cP, 15 cP to 50 cP, cP to 30 cP, 15 cP to 28 cP, 15 cP to 27 cP, or 15 cP to 26 cP.
  • In some embodiments of any of the above aspects or embodiments thereof, all components of said aqueous treatment formulation are completely dissolved.
  • In some embodiments of any of the above aspects or embodiments thereof, the formulation further comprises said water absorbing agent.
  • In some embodiments of any of the above aspects or embodiments thereof, the water absorbing agent is a solid, in a pure state, at least within a range of 25° C. to 60° C., whereby, when said aqueous treatment solution is evaporated to form a solid film, said water absorbing agent acts as a water absorber.
  • In some embodiments of any of the above aspects or embodiments thereof, the concentration of said second non-ionic surfactant within said aqueous treatment formulation, by weight, is within a range of 1-18%, 1-15%, 1-12%, 1-10%, 1-8%, 2-18%, 2-15%, 2-12%, 2-10%, 2-8%, 3-18%, 3-15%, 3-12%, 3-10%, 3-8%, or 4-18%, 4-15%, 4-12%, 4-10%, or 4-8%.
  • In some embodiments of any of the above aspects or embodiments thereof, the aqueous treatment formulation has a static surface tension within the range of 22 to 36 dynes/cm, 22 to 32 dynes/cm, 22 to 30 dynes/cm, 22 to 28 dynes/cm, 24 to 36 dynes/cm, 24 to 32 dynes/cm, 24 to dynes/cm, or 24 to 28 dynes/cm at 25° C. In some embodiments, the static surface tension is within a range of 22 to 36 dynes/cm at 25° C. In some embodiments, the static surface tension is within a range of 24 to 32 dynes/cm at 25° C.
  • In some embodiments of any of the above aspects or embodiments thereof, the total concentration of organic solvents within the provided aqueous treatment formulation is at most 3%, at most 2%, at most 1%, or at most 0.5% by weight or organic-solvent-free. In some embodiments of any of the above aspects or embodiments thereof, the formulation is organic-solvent-free. In some embodiments of any of the above aspects or embodiments thereof, the total concentration of organic solvents within the provided aqueous treatment formulation is at most 3% by weight. In some embodiments of any of the above aspects or embodiments thereof, the formulation is organic-solvent-free. In some embodiments of any of the above aspects or embodiments thereof, the total concentration of organic solvents within the provided aqueous treatment formulation is at most 1% by weight. In some embodiments of any of the above aspects or embodiments thereof, the aqueous treatment formulation is organic-solvent-free.
  • In some embodiments of the present invention, the silicone-based release layer surface is sufficiently hydrophilic such that: a receding contact angle of a drop of distilled water deposited on the silicone-based release layer surface is at most 60°. In some embodiments of the present invention, the silicone-based release layer surface is sufficiently hydrophilic such that: a 10-second dynamic contact angle (DCA) of a drop of distilled water deposited on the silicone-based release layer surface is at most 108°. In some embodiments of the present invention, the silicone-based release layer surface is sufficiently hydrophilic such that both: a receding contact angle of a drop of distilled water deposited on the silicone-based release layer surface is at most 60° and a 10-second dynamic contact angle (DCA) of a drop of distilled water deposited on the silicone-based release layer surface is at most 108°.
  • In some embodiments of any of the above aspects or embodiments thereof, the ITM comprises a support layer and a release layer having a silicone-based release layer surface and a second surface that (i) opposes said silicone-based release layer surface, and (ii) is attached to said support layer, and wherein said release layer is formed of an addition-cured silicone material, and wherein a thickness of said release layer being at most 500 micrometers (μm).
  • In some embodiments of any of the above aspects or embodiments thereof, the addition-cured silicone material consists essentially of an addition-cured silicone, or contains, by weight, at least 95% of said addition-cured silicone.
  • In some embodiments of any of the above aspects or embodiments thereof, the functional groups within said silicone-based release layer surface of the provided ITM make up at most 3%, by weight, of said addition-cured silicone material.
  • In some embodiments of any of the above aspects or embodiments thereof, a polyether glycol functionalized polydimethyl siloxane is impregnated in said addition-cured silicone material of the provided ITM.
  • In some embodiments of any of the above aspects or embodiments thereof, the release layer of the provided ITM is adapted such that polar groups of the ink reception surface have an orientation away from or opposite from the second surface.
  • In some embodiments of any of the above aspects or embodiments thereof, a surface hydrophobicity of the silicone-based release layer surface of the provided ITM is less than a bulk hydrophobicity of the cured silicone material within the release layer, the surface hydrophobicity being characterized by a receding contact angle of a droplet of distilled water on the ink reception surface, the bulk hydrophobicity being characterized by a receding contact angle of a droplet of distilled water disposed on an inner surface formed by exposing an area of the cured silicone material within the release layer to form an exposed area.
  • In some embodiments of any of the above aspects or embodiments thereof the aqueous treatment formulation is applied to the silicone-based release layer surface such that the thickness of the wet treatment layer is at most 0.5 μm, at most 0.4 μm, at most 0.3 μm, at most 0.2 μm, or at most 0.15 μm. In some embodiments of any of the above aspects or embodiments thereof the aqueous treatment formulation is applied to the silicone-based release layer surface such that the thickness of the wet treatment layer is at most 0.5 μm. In other embodiments, the aqueous treatment formulation is applied to the silicone-based release layer surface such that the thickness of the wet treatment layer is at most 0.3 μm.
  • In some embodiments of the present aspects, the wet treatment layer is formed and/or thinned by urging a rounded surface towards the ITM or vice versa, wherein:
      • i. the rounded surface has a radius of curvature of at most 2 mm or at most 1.5 mm or at most 1.25 mm or at most 1 mm and/or
      • ii. the urging is at a force density in the cross-print direction of at least 250 g/cm or at least 350 g/cm or at least 400 gm/cm and/or at most 1 kg/cm or at most 750 g/cm or at most 600 g/cm and/or
      • iii. the urging is performed by applying a pressure between the substrate and the ITM, a magnitude of the pressure being at least 0.1 bar or at least 0.25 bar or at least 0.35 bar or at least 0.5 bar, and optionally at most 2 bar or at most 1.5 bar, or at most 1 bar.
  • In some embodiments of any of the above aspects or embodiments thereof, the formation of the wet treatment layer or thinning thereof comprises forcing the aqueous treatment formulation to flow such that a velocity gradient normal to the ITM is established, a magnitude of the velocity gradient being at least 106 sec−1 or at least 2×106 sec−1.
  • In some embodiments of any of the above aspects or embodiments thereof, the drying process of the wet treatment layer is sufficiently rapid such that the viscosity of the aqueous treatment formulation increases rapidly enough to inhibit surface-tension-driven beading such that the dried treatment film has a smooth upper surface.
  • In some embodiments of any of the above aspects or embodiments thereof, the upper surface of the dried treatment film is characterized by an average roughness Ra of at most 12 nanometers, or at most 10 nanometers, or at most 9 nanometers, or at most 8 nanometers, or at most 7 nanometers, or at most 4 nanometers, or at most 3 nanometers, and optionally, at least 1 nanometer, or at least 2 nanometers.
  • In some embodiments of any of the above aspects or embodiments thereof, the drying of the treatment solution is performed sufficiently rapidly so as to prevent beading and so as leave a continuous hydrophilic and cohesive polymer treatment film having a thickness of at most 200 nm, or at most 150 nm, or at most 120 nm, or at most 100 nm, or at most 80 nm, or at most 70 nm, or at most 60 nm, or at most 50 nm, or at most 40 nm, or at most 30 nm.
  • In some embodiments of any of the above aspects or embodiments thereof, the thickness of the dried treatment film to which the aqueous ink droplets are deposited is at most 200 nm, or at most 120 nm, or at most 100 nm, at most 80 nm, at most 70 nm, at most 60 nm, at most 50 nm, at most 45 nm, or at most 40 nm.
  • In some embodiments of any of the above aspects or embodiments thereof, the thickness of the dried treatment film to which the aqueous ink droplets are deposited is at least 15 nm, or at least 20 nm, or at least 25 nm, or at least 30 nm. In some embodiments of any of the above aspects or embodiments thereof the dried treatment film is at most 120 nm. In some embodiments of any of the above aspects or embodiments thereof the dried treatment film is at most 80 nm. Thus, In some embodiments of any of the above aspects or embodiments thereof the thickness of the dried treatment film to which the aqueous ink droplets are deposited is at least 15 nm. In some embodiments of any of the above aspects or embodiments thereof the thickness of the dried treatment film to which the aqueous ink droplets are deposited is at least 25 nm.
  • In some embodiments of any of the above aspects or embodiments thereof, the dried treatment film is continuous over an entirety of a rectangle of the release surface of the ITM, wherein said rectangle has a width of at least 10 cm and a length of at least 10 meters.
  • In some embodiments of any of the above aspects or embodiments thereof, the dried treatment film for at least 50% or at least 75% or at least 90% or at least 95% at least 95% or at least 99% or 100% of an area of the rectangle, a thickness of the dried treatment film does not deviate from an average thickness value within the rectangle by more than 50% or more than 40% or more than 30%.
  • In some embodiments of any one of the above aspect or embodiments thereof, during the drying process of the wet treatment layer, a dynamic viscosity thereof increases by at least a factor of 100 within a period of time of at most 250 milliseconds.
  • In some embodiments of any of the above aspects or embodiments thereof, the ink-image residue is transferred together with non-printed areas of the dried treatment film onto the printing substrate.
  • In some embodiments of any of the above aspects or embodiments thereof, the thickness of the dried treatment film is at most 120 nm.
  • In some embodiments of any of the above aspects or embodiments thereof the dried treatment film is sufficiently cohesive such that during transfer of the ink-image residue, the dried treatment film completely separates from the ITM and transfers to the printing substrate with the dried ink image, both in printed and non-printed areas.
  • In some embodiments of any of the above aspects or embodiments thereof the method is performed such that: i. an ink dot set IDS of ink substrate-residing ink dots is formed; ii. a droplet plurality DP of the aqueous ink droplets that are deposited the deformed droplets over the surface of the ITM has a maximum impact radius value RMAX_IMPACT; iii. subsequent to impact, physiochemical forces spread the deformed droplets such that each ink dot of substrate-residing ink-dot set IDS has a dried-dot radius RDRIED_DOT_ onto the ITM-residing dried treatment film forms the ink dot set IDS of ink substrate-residing ink dots such that there is a correspondence between: A. each given droplet of the droplet plurality DP and B. a respective given substrate-residing ink-dot of the ink-dot set such that the given droplet results in and/or evolves into the given substrate-residing ink-dot; iv. during deposition, whenever a droplet of the droplet plurality collides with the dried treatment film on the ITM, kinetic energy of the colliding droplet deforms the droplet; v. a maximum impact radius of each of ON_SUBSTRATE; vi. for each droplet of the droplet plurality and corresponding ink dot of the ink dot set IDS, a ratio between A. the substrate-residing dried-dot radius RDRIED_DOT_ON_SUBSTRATE; and B. the deformed-droplet maximum impact radius value RMAX_IMPACT, is at least 1.1.
  • In some embodiments of any of the above aspects or embodiments thereof the method is performed such that: i. a droplet plurality DP of the droplets that are deposited onto the ITM-residing dried treatment film generates an ink-dot set IDS of substrate-residing ink dots (i.e. fixedly adhered to a top substrate surface), each droplet of the droplet plurality DP corresponding to a different respective substrate-residing ink-dot of the ink-dot set IDS; ii. each ink droplet of the droplet plurality DP is deposited, according to jetting parameters, onto the substrate; iii. the jetting parameters together with the physicochemical properties of ink droplets of the droplet plurality DP collectively define an ink-jet-paper dot-radius RDIRECT-JETTING-ONTO-INK-JET-PAPER-THEORETICAL which is the radius of the ink-dot obtained if the ink droplets were directly ink-jetted onto ink-jet-paper instead of the dried treatment film; and iv. a ratio between (A) the dried-dot radius RDRIED_DOT_ON_SUBSTRATE of the dots of the ink-dot set IDS and the (B) ink-jet-paper dot-radius RDIRECT-JETTING-ONTO-INK-JET-PAPER-THEORETICAL, is at least 1.1.
  • In some embodiments of any of the above aspects or embodiments thereof, the cardinality of the ink dot set is at least 5 or at least 10 or at least 20 or at least 50 or at least 100, each ink dot of the ink dot set being distinct on the substrate.
  • In some embodiments of any of the above aspects or embodiments thereof, the ink dots of the ink dot set are contained within a square geometric projection projecting on the printing substrate, each ink-dot of the ink dot set being fixedly adhered to the surface of the printing substrate, all said ink dots within said square geometric projection being counted as individual members of the ink dot set IDS.
  • In some embodiments of any of the above aspects or embodiments thereof, the method is performed such that: i. an ink dot set IDS of ink substrate-residing ink dots is formed; ii. a cardinality of the ink dot set is at least 5 or at least 10 or at least 20 or at least 50 or at least 100, each ink dot of the ink dot set being distinct on the substrate; iii. the ink dots of the ink dot set are contained within a square geometric projection projecting on the printing substrate, each ink-dot of the ink dot set being fixedly adhered to the surface of the printing substrate, all said ink dots within said square geometric projection being counted as individual members of the ink dot set IDS; iv. each of said ink dots contains at least one colorant dispersed in an organic polymeric resin, each of said dots has an average thickness of less than 2,000 nm, and a diameter of 5 to 300 micrometers; v. each ink dot of said ink dots has a generally convex shape in which a deviation from convexity, (DCdot), is defined by: DCdot=1−AA/CSA, AA being a calculated projected area of said dot, said area disposed generally parallel to said the printing substrate; and CSA being a surface area of a convex shape that minimally bounds a contour of said projected area; and vi. a mean deviation from convexity (DCdot mean) of said ink dot set is at most 0.05, at most 0.04, at most 0.03, at most 0.025, at most 0.022, at most 0.02, at most 0.018, at most 0.017, at most 0.016, at most 0.015, or at most 0.014.
  • In some embodiments of any of the above aspects or embodiments thereof, the aqueous treatment formulation is applied to at least portion(s) of the ITM that are in-motion at a velocity of at least 1 meters/second, at least 1.5 meters/second, at least 2 meters/second, at least 2.5 meters/second, at least 3 meters/second, and optionally at most 5.5 meters/second, at most 5.0 meters/second, at most 4.5 meters/second, or at most 4.0 meters/second, to form the wet treatment layer thereon.
  • In some embodiments of any of the above aspects or embodiments thereof, the water-soluble-polymer concentration, by weight, within the provided aqueous treatment formulation, is at most 10% or at most 8% or at most 6% or at most 5%.
  • In some embodiments of any of the above aspects or embodiments thereof, the dried treatment film to which the aqueous ink droplets are deposited and a surface of the dried treatment film are characterized by a dimensionless ratio between (i) an average roughness Ra and (ii) a thickness of the dried treatment layer, wherein said dimensionless ratio is at most 0.5, at most 0.4, at most 0.3, at most 0.25, at most 0.2, at most 0.15, or at most 0.1, and optionally, at least 0.02 or at least 0.03 or at least 0.04 or at least 0.05 or at least 0.06 or at least 0.07 or at least 0.08.
  • In some embodiments of any of the above aspects or embodiments thereof, the method utilizes any of the blanket features provided herein.
  • In some embodiments of any of the above aspects or embodiments thereof (i) the aqueous treatment formulation is applied to the ITM while the ITM is in motion, so that at least portion(s) thereof move at a velocity of at least 0.5 or at least 1 or at least 1.5 or at least 2 or at least 2.5 or at least 3 meter/sec (optionally at most 5.5 meter/sec, at most 5.0 meter/sec, at most 4.5 meter/sec, at most 4.0 meter/sec, or at most 3.8 meter/sec, and typically within a range of 0.5 to 5 meter/sec, 1 to 5 meter/sec, 1 to 4.5 meter/sec, 1 to 4 meter/sec, 1.5 to 5 meter/sec, 1.5 to 4.5 meter/sec, 1.5 to 4 meter/sec, 2 to 5 meter/sec, 2 to 4.5 meter/sec, 2.5 to 4.5 meter/sec, or 3 to 4.5 meter/sec; and (ii) the aqueous treatment formulation is applied to the in-motion portion(s) of the ITM to form a wet treatment layer thereon.
  • In some embodiments of any of the above aspects or embodiments thereof, the wet treatment layer is formed by applying force to the ITM from a highly-rounded surface having a radius of curvature of at most 5 mm or at most 3 mm or at most 2.5 mm or at most 2 mm or at most 1.75 mm or at most 1.5 mm or at most 1.25 mm or at most 1 mm.
  • In some embodiments of any of the above aspects or embodiments thereof, the highly-rounded surface is a surface of a doctor blade.
  • In some embodiments of any of the above aspects or embodiments thereof, the doctor blade is oriented in the cross-print direction and is urged against the ITM with a force density in the cross-print direction of at least 250 g/cm or at least 350 g/cm or at least 400 gm/cm and/or at most 1 kg/cm or at most 750 g/cm or at most 600 g/cm.
  • In some embodiments of any of the above aspects or embodiments thereof, the urging is performed by applying a pressure between the substrate and the ITM, a magnitude of the pressure being at least 0.1 bar or at least 0.25 bar or at least 0.35 bar or at least 0.5 bar, and optionally at most 2 bar or at most 1.5 bar, or at most 1 bar.
  • In some embodiments of any of the above aspects or embodiments thereof, the washing of the release surface of the ITM is performed using the aqueous treatment solution to dissolve any dry treatment film on the release layer.
  • In some embodiments of any of the above aspects or embodiments thereof, a thickness of the wet treatment layer is at most 2 μm or at most 1.5 μm or at most 1 μm or at most 0.9 μm or at most 0.8 μm or at most 0.7 μm or at most 0.6 μm or at most 0.5 μm or at most 0.5 μm or at most 0.4 μm or at most 0.3 μm or at most 0.2 μm or at most 0.15 μm. In some embodiments of any of the above aspects or embodiments thereof, the thickness of the wet treatment layer is at most 0.5 μm. In some embodiments of any of the above aspects or embodiments thereof the aqueous treatment formulation has a thickness of at most 0.3 μm.
  • In some embodiments of any of the above aspects or embodiments thereof, the wet treatment layer has a uniform thickness. In some embodiments, over a rectangle having a width of at least w cm and length of at least/cm, an entirety of the rectangle is covered by the wet treatment film such that thickness of the wet treatment film does not deviate from an average thickness value within the rectangle by more than 50% or more than 40% or more than 30% or more than 20% or more than 10% or more than 5% or more than 2.5% or more than 1%, wherein (i) a value of w is at least 10 or at least 20 or at least 30 and/or at most 100 or at most 80 or at most 60 and (ii) a value of/is at least 50 or at least 100 or at least 250 or at least 500 or at least 1000.
  • In some embodiments of any of the above aspects or embodiments thereof, the drying of the treatment solution is performed sufficiently rapidly to prevent beading and leave a continuous hydrophilic and cohesive polymer treatment film having a thickness (e.g. a substantially uniform thickness) of at most 150 nm, or at most 120 nm, or at most 100 nm, or at most 80 nm, or at most 70 nm, or at most 60 nm, or at most 50 nm, or at most 40 nm, or at most nm.
  • Nevertheless, in different embodiments, even if the dried treatment film is extremely thin, it is appreciably thicker than monolayers or monolayer-type constructs. Thus, in different embodiments, a thickness of the dried treatment layer may be at least 20 nanometers or at least nanometers or at least 40 nanometers or at least 50 nanometers. In some embodiments of any of the above aspects or embodiments thereof providing this much ‘bulk’ (i.e. minimum thickness features—e.g. together with other feature(s) described below) facilitates formation of a dried treatment film that is cohesive and/or elastic—this may be useful in step S117 where it is desirable for the dried treatment film (i.e. at that stage bearing the dried ink image thereon) to maintain its structural integrity as it is transferred from the ITM to substrate.
  • In some embodiments of any of the above aspects or embodiments thereof a thickness of the dried treatment film to which ink droplets are deposited is at most 200 nm, or at most 150 nm, or at most 100 nm, or at most 90 nm, or at most 80 nm, or at most 70 nm, or at most 60 nm, or at most 50 nm or at most 30 nm. In some embodiments of any of the above aspects or embodiments thereof, the aqueous treatment formulation is applied to the silicone-based release layer surface such that the thickness of the wet treatment layer is at most 50 nm. In some embodiments of any of the above aspects or embodiments thereof the aqueous treatment formulation is applied to the silicone-based release layer surface such that the thickness of the wet treatment layer is at most nm.
  • In some embodiments of any of the above aspects or embodiments thereof a thickness of the dried treatment film to which ink droplets are deposited is at least 15 nm or at least 20 nm or at least 30 nm or at least 50 nm or at least 75 nm.
  • In some embodiments of any of the above aspects or embodiments thereof, the dried treatment film is continuous over an entirety of a rectangle of the release surface of the ITM, wherein the rectangle has a width of at least w cm and a length of at least l cm, wherein (i) a value of w is at least 10 or at least 20 or at least 30 and/or at most 100 or at most 80 or at most 60 and (ii) a value of l is at least 50 or at least 100 or at least 250 or at least 500 or at least 1000.
  • In some embodiments of any of the above aspects or embodiments thereof, the dried treatment film is continuous, so that for at least 50% or at least 75% or at least 90% or at least 95% or at least 99% or 100% of an area of the rectangle, a thickness of the dried treatment film does not deviate from an average thickness value within the rectangle by more than 50% or more than 40% or more than 30% or more than 20% or more than 10% or more than 5% or more than 2.5% or more than 1%.
  • In some embodiments of any of the above aspects or embodiments thereof, during the drying process of the wet treatment layer, a dynamic viscosity thereof increases by at least a factor of 100, within a period of time that is at most 1 second or at most 500 milliseconds or at most 250 milliseconds or at most 150 milliseconds, or at most 100 milliseconds or at most 75 milliseconds or at most 50 milliseconds or at most 25 milliseconds or at most 15 milliseconds or at most 10 milliseconds.
  • In some embodiments of any of the above aspects or embodiments thereof, a liquid content of the dried treatment film is at most 10% wt/wt or at most 7.5% wt/wt or at most 5% wt/wt or at most 2.5% wt/wt or at most 1.5% wt/wt or at most 1% wt/wt.
  • In some embodiments of any of the above aspects or embodiments thereof, the drying process removes at least 80% wt/wt or at least 90% wt/wt or at least 95% wt/wt of water in the wet treatment layer (e.g. within a period of time that is at most 1 second or at most 0.5 seconds or at most 100 milliseconds or at most 50 milliseconds or at most 25 milliseconds or at most 10 milliseconds) so as to form the dried treatment film.
  • In some embodiments of any of the above aspects or embodiments thereof, the drying process removes at least 80% wt/wt or at least 90% wt/wt or at least 95% wt/wt of 60 degrees C./one atm liquid of the wet treatment layer so as to form the dried treatment film.
  • In some embodiments of any of the above aspects or embodiments thereof, a surface (e.g. upper surface of) the dried treatment film to which the aqueous ink droplets are deposited is characterized by an average roughness Ra (a commonly used one-dimensional average roughness parameter) of at most 30 nanometers or at most 25 nanometers or at most 20 nanometers or at most 18 nanometers or at most 16 nanometers or at most 15 nanometers or at most 14 nanometers or at most 12 nanometers or at most 10 nanometers or at most 9 nanometers or at most 8 nanometers or at most 7 nanometers or at most 5 nanometers, and/or at least 3 nanometers or at least 5 nanometers.
  • In some embodiments of any of the above aspects or embodiments thereof, the dried treatment film to which the aqueous ink droplets are deposited and a surface (e.g. upper surface of) of the dried treatment film are characterized by a dimensionless ratio between (i) an average roughness Ra and (ii) a thickness of the dried treatment layer, wherein the dimensionless ratio is at least 0.02 or at least 0.03 or at least 0.04 or at least 0.05 or at least 0.06 or at least 0.07 or at least 0.08 or at least 0.09 or at least 0.10 or at least 0.11 or at least 0.12 or at least 0.13 or at least 0.14 or at least 0.15 or at least 0.16 or at least 0.17 or at least 0.18 or at least 0.19 or at least 0.2.
  • In some embodiments of any of the above aspects or embodiments thereof, the dried treatment film to which the aqueous ink droplets are deposited and a surface (e.g. upper surface of) of the dried treatment film are characterized by a dimensionless ratio between (i) an average roughness Ra and (ii) a thickness of the dried treatment layer, wherein the dimensionless ratio is at most 0.5, at most 0.4, at most 0.3, at most 0.25, at most 0.2, at most 0.15, or at most 0.1, and optionally, at least 0.02 or at least 0.03 or at least 0.04 or at least 0.05 or at least 0.06 or at least 0.07 or at least 0.08.
  • In some embodiments of any of the above aspects or embodiments thereof, the aqueous treatment formulation is provided in the form of a solution.
  • In some embodiments of any of the above aspects or embodiments thereof, the aqueous treatment formulation is provided in the form of a dispersion. In some embodiments of any of the above aspects or embodiments thereof solids (e.g. nano-pigments and/or resins) of the aqueous ink migrate into the bulk of the dried treatment film to interact with non-ionic surfactants such as polyethoxylated sorbitan ester residing within the dried treatment film (e.g. so as to promote droplet spreading).
  • In some embodiments of any of the above aspects or embodiments thereof, the substrate is selected from the group consisting of an uncoated fibrous printing substrate, a commodity coated fibrous printing substrate, and a plastic printing substrate.
  • In some embodiments of any of the above aspects or embodiments thereof, the printing substrate is a paper, optionally selected from the group of papers consisting of bond paper, uncoated offset paper, coated offset paper, copy paper, groundwood paper, coated groundwood paper, freesheet paper, coated freesheet paper, and laser paper.
  • In some embodiments of any of the above aspects or embodiments thereof, the transfer is performed at a transfer-temperature of at most 120° C., or at most 110° C., or at most 100° C., or at most 90° C. or most 80° C.
  • In some embodiments of any of the above aspects or embodiments thereof, the method is performed so as to form an ink dot set IDS of ink substrate-residing ink dots.
  • In some embodiments of any of the above aspects or embodiments thereof, the method is performed so that a droplet plurality DP of the aqueous ink droplets that are deposited onto the ITM-residing dried treatment film forms the ink dot set IDS of ink substrate-residing ink dots such that there is a correspondence between (i) each given droplet of the droplet plurality DP and (ii) a respective given substrate-residing ink-dot of the ink-dot set such that the given droplet results in and/or evolves into the given substrate-residing ink-dot.
  • In some embodiments of any of the above aspects or embodiments thereof, the method is performed so that during deposition, whenever a droplet of the droplet plurality collides with the dried treatment film on the ITM, kinetic energy of the colliding droplet deforms the droplet.
  • In some embodiments of any of the above aspects or embodiments thereof, the method is performed so that: (i) a maximum impact radius of each of the deformed droplets over the surface of the ITM has a maximum impact radius value RMAX_IMPACT and (ii) subsequent to impact and/or during transfer and/or after transfer, physiochemical forces spread the deformed droplets or dots derived therefrom so that each ink dot of substrate-residing ink-dot set IDS has a dried-dot radius RDRIED_DOT_ON_SUBSTRATE;
      • (iii) for each droplet of the droplet plurality and corresponding ink dot of the ink dot set IDS, a ratio between
        • i. the substrate-residing dried-dot radius RDRIED_DOT_ON_SUBSTRATE; and
        • ii. the deformed-droplet maximum impact radius value RMAX_IMPACT, is at least 1 or at least 1.01 or at least 1.02 or at least 1.03 or at least 1.04 or at least 1.05 or at least 1.1 or at least 1.15 or at least 1.2 or at least 1.25 or at least 1.3 or at least 1.35 or at least 1.4 or at least 1.45 or at least 1.5 and optionally, at most 2, at most 1.8, at most 1.7, at most 1.6, or at most 1.55.
  • In some embodiments of any of the above aspects or embodiments thereof, the method is performed such that: i. a droplet plurality DP of the droplets that are deposited onto the ITM-residing dried treatment film generates an ink-dot set IDS of substrate-residing ink dots (i.e. fixedly adhered to a top substrate surface), each droplet of the droplet plurality DP corresponding to a different respective substrate-residing ink-dot of the ink-dot set IDS; ii. each ink droplet of the droplet plurality DP is deposited, according to jetting parameters, onto the substrate; iii. the jetting parameters together with the physicochemical properties of ink droplets of the droplet plurality DP collectively define an ink-jet-paper dot-radius RDIRECT-JETTING-ONTO-INK-JET-PAPER-THEORETICAL which is the radius of the ink-dot obtained if the ink droplets were directly inn-jetted onto ink-jet-paper instead of the dried treatment film; and iv. a ratio between (A) the dried-dot radius RDRIED_DOT_ON_SUBSTRATE of the dots of the ink-dot set IDS and the (B) ink-jet-paper dot-radius RDIRECT-JETTING-ONTO-INK-JET-PAPER-THEORETICAL, is at least 1 or at least 1.01 or at least 1.02 or at least 1.03 or at least 1.04 or at least 1.05 or at least 1.1 or at least 1.15 or at least 1.2 or at least 1.25 or at least 1.3 or at least 1.35 or at least 1.4 or at least 1.45 or at least 1.5 and optionally, at most 2, at most 1.8, at most 1.7, at most 1.6, or at most 1.55.
  • In some embodiments of any of the above aspects or embodiments thereof, a cardinality of the ink dot set is at least 5 or at least 10 or at least 20 or at least 50 or at least 100, each ink dot of the ink dot set being distinct on the substrate.
  • In some embodiments of any of the above aspects or embodiments thereof, the method is performed so that: the ink dots of the ink dot set are contained within a square geometric projection projecting on the printing substrate, each ink-dot of the ink dot set being fixedly adhered to the surface of the printing substrate, all the ink dots within the square geometric projection being counted as individual members of the ink dot set IDS.
  • In some embodiments of any of the above aspects or embodiments thereof, the method is performed so that: each of the ink dots contains at least one colorant dispersed in an organic polymeric resin, each of the dots having an average thickness of less than 2,000 nm, and a diameter of 5 to 300 micrometers.
  • In some embodiments of any of the above aspects or embodiments thereof, the method is performed such that each ink dot contains at least one colorant dispersed in an organic polymeric resin, each ink dot covering a continuous area of a top surface of the substrate; each ink dot being disposed entirely above the continuous area, such that (i) a projected perpendicular line, extending down towards the top substrate surface, first meets the ink dot, before meeting the top substrate surface, at every point in the continuous area; and/or (ii) each ink dot having a diameter of 15 to 300 micrometers; and/or (iii) each of the ink dots having an average thickness of at most 1,800 nm; each of the ink dots being characterized by a dimensionless aspect ratio (Raspect) defined by: Raspect=Ddot/Hdot wherein Ddot is the diameter; and Hdot is the average thickness; and/or (iv) the aspect ratio being at least 55 or at least 60 or at least 75 or at least 95 or at least 110 or at least 120, or at least 135, or at least 150, or at least 170, or at least 180, or at least 190, or at least 200, or at least 220, or at least 240, or at least 260, or at least 280, or at least 300.
  • In some embodiments of any of the above aspects or embodiments thereof, the method is performed such that the aspect ratio is at most 400, at most 350, or at most 325.
  • In some embodiments of any of the above aspects or embodiments thereof, the method is performed so that: each ink dot contains at least one colorant dispersed in an organic polymeric resin, each ink dot covering a continuous area of a top surface of the substrate; each ink dot being disposed entirely above the continuous area, such that (i) a projected perpendicular line, extending down towards the top substrate surface, first meets the ink dot, before meeting the top substrate surface, at every point in the continuous area; and/or (ii) each ink dot having a diameter of 15 to 300 micrometers; and/or (iii) each of the ink dots having an average thickness of at most 1,800 nm; each of the ink dots being characterized by a dimensionless aspect ratio (Raspect) defined by: Raspect=Ddot/Hdot wherein Ddot is the diameter; and Hdot is the average thickness; and/or (iv) the aspect ratio being within a range of 140 to 400, 150 to 300, 160 to 300, 180 to 300, 200 to 300, 210 to 300, 220 to 300, 230 to 300, or 240 to 300.
  • In some embodiments of any of the above aspects or embodiments thereof, the method is performed so that: at least one (or at least a majority of or all of) of the ink dots of the ink dot set IDS contains less than 2% of charge directors.
  • In some embodiments of any of the above aspects or embodiments thereof, the method is performed so that: at least one (or at least a majority of or all of) of the ink dots of the ink dot set IDS being devoid of charge directors.
  • In some embodiments of any of the above aspects or embodiments thereof, the method is performed so that: at least one (or at least a majority of or all of) the ink dots of the ink dot set IDS has a thickness being at most at most 1,500 nm or at most 1000 nm or at most 800 nm or at most 600 nm or at most 400 nm or at most 350 nm or at most 300 nm or at most 250 nm.
  • In some embodiments of any of the above aspects or embodiments thereof, the method is performed so that: at least one (or at least a majority of or all of) the ink dots of the ink dot set IDS contains at least 1.2% of the colorant, by weight.
  • In some embodiments of any of the above aspects or embodiments thereof, the method is performed so that: at least one (or at least a majority of or all) of the ink dots of the ink dot set IDS contains at least 5% of the resin, by weight.
  • In some embodiments of any of the above aspects or embodiments thereof, the method is performed so that: at least one (or at least a majority of or all) of the ink dots of the ink dot set IDS is such that a total concentration of the colorant and the resin within the ink dots is at least 40%.
  • In some embodiments of any of the above aspects or embodiments thereof, the method is performed so that the weight ratio of the resin to the colorant within the ink dots is at least 1:1.
  • In some embodiments of any of the above aspects or embodiments thereof, the method is performed so that the ink dots of the ink drop set has a first dynamic viscosity within a range of 106 cP to 3·108 cP for a temperature within a range of 90° C. to 195° C.
  • In some embodiments of any of the above aspects or embodiments thereof, the method is performed so that the first dynamic viscosity is at most 7·107 cP.
  • In some embodiments of any of the above aspects or embodiments thereof, the method is performed so that: the first dynamic viscosity is within a range of 106 cP to 108 cP. In some embodiments of any of the above aspects or embodiments thereof, the method is performed so that: the first dynamic viscosity is at least 4·106 cP.
  • In some embodiments of any of the above aspects or embodiments thereof, the method is performed so that at least one ink dot (or at least a majority of or all of the ink dots) is a plurality of continuous ink dots.
  • In some embodiments of any of the above aspects or embodiments thereof, the method is performed so that: for at least one ink dot (or at least a majority of or all of the ink dots), a dot thickness is at most 1,200 nm, or at most 1,000 nm, or at most 800 nm or at most 650 nm or at most 500 nm or at most 450 nm or at most 400 nm.
  • In some embodiments of any of the above aspects or embodiments thereof, the method is performed so that the ITM is any ITM disclosed herein and/or the aqueous conditioning solution is any aqueous conditioning solution disclosed herein.
  • In some embodiments of any of the above aspects or embodiments thereof, the aqueous ink comprises a pigment, binder, dispersant and at least one additive.
    • BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWINGS
  • Some embodiments of the printing system are described herein with reference to the accompanying drawings. The description, together with the figures, makes apparent to a person having ordinary skill in the art how the teachings of the disclosure may be practiced, by way of non-limiting examples. The figures are for the purpose of illustrative discussion and no attempt is made to show structural details of an embodiment in more detail than is necessary for a fundamental understanding of the disclosure. For the sake of clarity and simplicity, some objects depicted in the figures are not to scale.
  • In the Figures: FIG. 1 is a flow chart of a prior art printing process;
  • FIGS. 2 and 12 are flow charts of a printing process in accordance with some embodiments of the invention;
  • FIGS. 3A-3D, 4A-4B, 5, 6-9, 10A-10B and 11A-11C illustrate printing systems or components thereof;
  • FIG. 11D illustrates shear intensity as a function of location;
  • FIGS. 13A-13E schematically describe a process whereby an ink droplet is deposited on an ITM (e.g. a release surface thereof);
  • FIG. 14 schematically shows a section through a carrier;
  • FIGS. 15 to 19 schematically exhibit different stages in the manufacture of an ITM, according to the present method;
  • FIG. 20 is a section through a finished ITM after installation in a printing system; FIGS. 21A and 21B schematically illustrate a cross section through a release layer prepared according to the prior art;
  • FIG. 21C schematically illustrates a cross section through a release layer prepared according to the present method; and
  • FIGS. 22A to 22D schematically display an apparatus in which some embodiments of the present method can be implemented, different manufacturing stages being illustrated.
    •  DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF EMBODIMENTS
  • The invention is herein described, by way of example only, with reference to the accompanying drawings. With specific reference now to the drawings in detail, it is stressed that the particulars shown are by way of example and for purposes of illustrative discussion of the preferred embodiments of the present invention only and are presented in the cause of providing what is believed to be the most useful and readily understood description of the principles and conceptual aspects of the invention. In this regard, no attempt is made to show structural details of the invention in more detail than is necessary for a fundamental understanding of the invention, the description taken with the drawings making apparent to those skilled in the art how the several forms of the invention may be embodied in practice. Throughout the drawings, like-referenced characters are generally used to designate like elements.
    • Definitions
  • Within this application the following terms should be understood to have the following meaning:
      • a) the term “receding contact angle” or “RCA”, refers to a receding contact angle as measured using a Dataphysics OCA15 Pro Contact Angle measuring device, or a comparable Video-Based Optical Contact Angle Measuring System, using the Drop Shape Method. The analogous “advancing contact angle”, or “ACA”, refers to an advancing contact angle measured substantially in the same fashion.
      • b) the term “standard aging procedure” refers to an accelerated aging protocol performed on each tested release layer at 160° C., for 2 hours, in a standard convection oven.
      • c) the term “standard air curing” refers to a conventional curing process for curing the release layer, in which, during the curing of the release layer, the release layer surface (or “ink reception surface”) is exposed to air.
      • d) the term “bulk hydrophobicity” is characterized by a receding contact angle of a droplet of distilled water disposed on an inner surface of the release layer, the inner surface formed by exposing an area of the cured silicone material within the release layer.
      • e) the term “image transfer member” or “intermediate transfer member” or “transfer member” refers to the component of a printing system upon which the ink is initially applied by the printing heads, for instance by inkjet heads, and from which the jetted image is subsequently transferred to another substrate or substrates, typically, the final printing substrates.
      • f) the term “blanket” refers to a flexible transfer member that can be mounted within a printing device to form a belt-like structure on two or more rollers, at least one of which is able to rotate and move the blanket (e.g. by moving the belt thereof) to travel around the rollers.
      • g) the term “on the release surface” with respect to an object such as an ink image or ink residue, means supported by and/or over that release surface. The term “on the release surface” does not necessarily imply direct contact between the ink image or ink residue and the release surface.
      • h) the term “has a static surface tension sufficiently high so as to increase the static surface tension of the aqueous treatment formulation”, and the like, with regard to a particular surfactant within that formulation, is evaluated by adding an additional quantities or aliquots of that particular surfactant to the formulation, and comparing the attained static surface tension of the formulation with the static surface tension of the formulation prior to the addition of those aliquots. The unit “dynes/cm” is used interchangeably with “mN/m”.
      • i) the term “liquid hygroscopic agent” refers to a hygroscopic agent that is liquid at least one temperature within the range of 25° C.-90° C., and has, in a pure state and at 90° C., a vapor pressure of at most 0.05ata, and more typically, at most 0.02ata, at most 0.01ata, or at most 0.003ata. The term “liquid hygroscopic agent” is specifically meant to refer to materials like glycerol.
      • j) the terms “hydrophobicity” and “hydrophilicity” and the like, may be used in a relative sense, and not necessarily in an absolute sense.
      • k) the term ‘(treatment) formulation’ refers to either a solution or a dispersion.
      • l) an x degrees Celsius evaporation load is now defined, where x is a positive number. When a solution is y % solids wt/wt and z % liquid wt/wt at x degrees Celsius, the ‘x-degrees Celsius evaporation load’ of the solution is that ratio z/y. The units of ‘evaporation load’ are “weight solvent per weight total solute.’ For the present disclosure, evaporation load is always defined at atmospheric pressure. For the present disclosure, a default value of ‘x’ is 60 degrees C.—the term ‘evaporation load’ without a prefix specifying a temperature refers to a 60 degrees Celsius evaporation load at atmospheric pressure.
      • m) when a portion of an ITM is in motion at a speed of v meters/second, this means that the portion of the blanket ITM moves in a direction parallel to its local surface/plane at a speed of at least v meters/second—e.g. relative to an applicator which is stationary.
      • n) the term ‘Static surface tension’ refers to the static surface tension at 25° C. and atmospheric pressure.
      • o) the term ‘thickness’ of a wet layer is defined as follows. When a volume of material vol covers a surface area of a surface having an area SA with a wet layer—the thickness of the wet layer is assumed to be vol/SA.
      • p) the term ‘thickness’ of a dry film is defined as follows. When a volume of material vol that is x % liquid, by weight, wets or covers a surface area SA of a surface, and all the liquid is evaporated away to convert the wet layer into a dry film, a thickness of the dry film is assumed to be:

  • Vol/ρwet layer(100−X)/( )SA⋅ρdry layer)
        • where ρwet layer is the specific gravity of the wet layer and ρdry layer is the specific gravity of the dry layer.
      • q) the term ‘continuous wet layer’ refers to a continuous wet layer that covers a convex region without any bare sub-regions within a perimeter of the convex region.
      • r) the term ‘continuous thin dried film’ refers to a continuous dried film that covers a convex region without any discontinuities within a perimeter of the convex region.
      • s) the term ‘cohesive film/tensile strength’ refers to a construct which stays together when peeled away from a surface to which it is adhered—i.e. when peeled away from the surface, the ‘cohesive film’ retains it structural integrity and is peeled as a skin, rather than breaking into little pieces.
      • t) the term ‘a force applied normally’ refers to a force having at least one component in the normal direction—and optionally the ‘normally applied’ force may have an additional component in other directions (e.g. along a surface to which the force is applied).
      • u) unless stated otherwise, physical properties of a liquid (e.g. treatment formulation) such as viscosity and surface tension, refer to the properties at 25° C.
      • v) unless stated otherwise, a ‘concentration’ refers to a wt/wt—i.e. a weight of a component of formulation per total weight of that formulation.
    A Discussion of FIG. 2
  • FIG. 2 is a flow-chart of a method of indirect printing by an aqueous ink onto a silicone-based release later surface of an intermediate transfer member (ITM). In some embodiments the method of FIG. 2 (or any combination of steps thereof) may be performed using apparatus (or component(s) thereof) disclosed in FIGS. 3A-3B, 4A-4B, 5-9, 10A-10B and 11A-11C. In particular and as will be discussed below, embodiments of the invention relate to methods and apparatus useful for producing a wet treatment layer of uniform sub-micron thickness over large areas of the ITM and/or at high print speeds.
  • In different embodiments, FIG. 2 may be performed to produce an ink image characterized by any combination of the following features: uniform and controlled dot gain, good and uniform print gloss, and good image quality due to high quality dots having consistent dot convexity and/or well-defined boundaries.
  • Steps S201-S205 relate to the ingredients or components or consumables used in the printing process of FIG. 2 , while steps S209-S225 relate to the process itself.
  • Briefly, the steps of FIG. 2 are as follows: in steps S201 and S205, an ITM (i.e. comprising a silicone-based release layer surface) and an aqueous treatment formulation (e.g. a solution) are provided, each having specific properties that are discussed below. In step S209, the aqueous treatment formulation is applied to the release layer surface of the ITM to form thereon a wet treatment layer. In step S213, the wet treatment layer is subjected to a drying process to form therefrom a dried treatment film on the ITM. In step S217, droplets of aqueous ink are deposited onto this dried treatment film to form an ink image on the ITM surface. In step S221, this ink image is dried to leave an ink-image residue on the ITM surface, and in step S225 this ink-image residue is transferred to the printing substrate.
  • Embodiments of the invention relate to methods, apparatus and kits for achieving the potentially-competing goals of dot gain, image gloss and dot quality, preferably in a production environment in which high print speed is paramount. According to some embodiments, the inventors have found that it is useful to perform the method of FIG. 2 so that the dried treatment film formed in step S213 is very thin (e.g. at most 150 nanometers or at most 120 nanometers or at most 100 nanometers or at most 80 nanometers or at most 70 nanometers or at most 60 nanometers or at most 50 nanometers, and optionally at least 20 nanometers, or at least 30 nanometers) and/or continuous over large areas and/or characterized by a very smooth upper surface and/or rich in non-ionic surfactants such as polyethoxylated sorbitan esters (e.g. to promote dot gain) and/or having properties (i.e. properties of the film per se, or of the film relative to the ITM surface) that promote good transfer from the ITM to substrate.
  • For example, thicker treatment films may negatively impact gloss or a uniformity thereof, since after transfer the dried ink residue may reside beneath the treatment film and on the substrate surface. Therefore, it may be preferred to produce a treatment film that is very thin.
  • For example, discontinuities in the treatment film and/or treatment film of varying thickness may yield images of a non-uniform gloss on the substrate or may produce an ink-image residue (in step S113) that loses its mechanical integrity upon transfer to substrate. Therefore, it may be preferred to produce a treatment film that is continuous over large areas—preferably, sufficiently cohesive to retain structural integrity when to the printing substrate and/or having thermorheological properties so the treatment film is tacky at transfer temperatures between 75 degrees and 150 degrees Celsius.
  • Embodiments of the invention relate to techniques for achieving these results simultaneously, even if they entail potentially-competing goals. For example, the need for the treatment film to be very thin makes it more challenging to form a treatment film that is continuous over a large area and/or sufficiently cohesive for good transfer to substrate and/or having a very smooth and uniform upper surface.
  • A Discussion of Step S201
  • Although the ITM provided in step S201 has a silicone based release layer, the release surface thereof may be less hydrophobic or appreciably less hydrophobic than many conventional silicone based release layers. This structural property can be measured and characterized in various ways.
  • For example, as illustrated in step S201 of FIG. 2 , the intermediate transfer member (ITM) comprises a silicone-based release layer surface that is sufficiently hydrophilic to satisfy at least one of the following properties: (i) a receding contact angle of a drop of distilled water deposited on the silicone-based release layer surface is at most 60′; and (ii) a 10-second dynamic contact angle (DCA) of a drop of distilled water deposited on the silicone-based release layer surface is at most 108°.
  • Any one of a number of techniques for reducing the hydrophobicity of the silicone based release layer may be employed.
  • In some embodiments, polar functional groups are introduced into and/or generated in the silicone based release layer. In one example, functional groups may be added to the pre-polymeric batch (e.g. monomers in solution)—these functional groups may, upon curing, become integral part of the silicone polymer network. Alternatively or additionally, the silicone-based release layer is pre-treated (e.g. by a corona discharge, or by an electron beam), thereby increasing a surface energy thereof.
  • Alternatively, the silicone based release layer may be manufactured to have a reduced hydrophobicity, even when substantially devoid of functional groups. In one example, the silicone polymer backbone of the release layer may be structured so that the polar groups thereof (e.g., O—Si—O) are oriented in a direction that is generally normal to the local plane of the ITM surface and facing ‘upwards’ towards the release layer surface.
  • To date, the inventors believe that the technique of the previous paragraph may provide superior image-transfer (step S225).
  • A Discussion of Step S205 of FIG. 2
  • One feature of the aqueous treatment formulation provided in step S205 is that a static surface tension of the aqueous treatment formulation is within a range of 20 and 40 dynes/cm. For example, the aqueous treatment formulation comprises one or more surfactants.
  • Thus, the aqueous treatment formulation of step S205 is less hydrophilic than many conventional treatment solutions, and significantly less hydrophilic than water.
  • In some embodiments, the combination of (i) a silicone based release layer having a reduced hydrophobicity (step S201) and (ii) an aqueous treatment formulation having a reduced hydrophilicity, reduces (but does not necessarily eliminate) surface-tension effects which promote beading of the conventional aqueous treatment solution.
  • In addition to the static surface tension within a range of 20 and 40 dynes/cm, the aqueous treatment formulation provided in step S205 has the following properties:
      • a. the aqueous treatment formulation comprises at least 5%, by weight, of a non-ionic surfactant. This may be useful for ensuring that the dried treatment film (i.e. produced in step S217) is useful for promoting good dot gain;
      • b. the aqueous treatment formulation comprises at least 1% (e.g. at least 1.5% or at least 2% or at least 3%), by weight, of at least one water soluble polymer having a solubility in water of at least 5% at 25° C. This may be useful for promoting formation of a polymer film or matrix in the dried treatment film (produced in step S217) that is sufficiently cohesive for good transfer in step 225.
      • c. a 25° C. dynamic viscosity that is at least 10 cP. As discussed below, it is believed that elevated viscosity is useful for counteracting any surface-tension driven tendency towards beading.
      • d. a 60° C. evaporation load of at most 8:1 (e.g. at most 7:1 or at most 6:1 or at most 5:1 or at most 4:1), by weight. Thus, the solution has a low specific heat capacity relative to conventional treatment formulations having higher evaporation load. Moreover, for a particular requisite residue thickness for the aqueous treatment solution, and for a given heat output delivered to the aqueous treatment solution, the viscosity of the aqueous treatment formulation will increase rapidly as a function of evaporation to achieve a high absolute viscosity that effectively counteracts the surface tension.
  • Physically, it is more difficult to induce flow of fluids having a higher viscosity than fluids having a lower viscosity—i.e. to induce flow of fluids having the higher viscosity, a greater driving force is required. The combination of at least moderate initial viscosity (i.e. a 25° C. dynamic viscosity that is at least 10 cP) and rapid viscosity increase after evaporation (e.g. due to the low evaporation load) on the ITM surface ensures that the aqueous treatment formulation reaches a relatively ‘high’ (e.g. at least 10,000 cP) viscosity in a relatively short period of time (e.g. at most 1 second or at most 0.5 seconds). Therefore, even if there is some thermodynamic tendency towards beading, actual beading, which could negatively impact the properties of the dried treatment film (i.e. formed in step S213) is inhibited or appreciably mitigated.
  • In some embodiments, the 25° C. dynamic viscosity of initial aqueous treatment formulation may be at least 12 cP or at least 14 cP—for example, within a range of 10 to 100 cP, 12 to 100 cP, 14 to 100 cP, 10 to 60 cP, or 12 to 40 cP.
  • To summarize: the combination (A) of the release layer that is sufficiently hydrophilic to satisfy at least one of the following properties: (i) a receding contact angle of a drop of distilled water deposited on the silicone-based release layer surface is at most 60′; and (ii) a 10-second dynamic contact angle (DCA) of a drop of distilled water deposited on the silicone-based release layer surface is at most 108°; and (B) the static surface tension of the aqueous treatment formulation in the range of 20-40 dynes/cm is useful for minimizing a magnitude of a thermodynamic driving force that would cause beading. Furthermore, the aforementioned viscosity-related features are useful for countering this driving force.
  • This reduction of a magnitude of a thermodynamic force that drives beading, along with the counteracting of this tendency, ensures that any tendency to bead does not prevent the formulation, in step S209, of a wet layer of treatment formulation in step S209 having a uniform thickness.
  • In embodiments of the invention, the aqueous treatment formulation comprises a carrier liquid containing water, the water making up at least 65% (e.g. at least 70% or at least 75%), by weight of the aqueous treatment formulation;
  • A Discussion of Step S209
  • In step S209, the aqueous treatment formulation is applied to the silicone-based release layer surface of the ITM to form thereon a wet treatment layer having a thickness of at most 0.8 μm (e.g. at most 0.7 μm, or at most 0.6 μm, or at most 0.5 μm).
  • The “thickness of a wet layer” is defined as follows—when a volume of material vol covers a surface area of a surface having an area SA with a wet layer, the thickness of the wet layer is assumed to be vol/SA.
  • Preferably, step S209 is performed so that the wet treatment layer has a uniform thickness and is defect free, preferably over a large area such as over the entire area of the release layer. This may be particularly challenging when the wet treatment layer is of sub-micron thickness.
  • As noted above, it is useful for the aqueous treatment formulation to have at least ‘moderate viscosity’ (e.g. a 25° C. dynamic viscosity that is at least 10 cP) in order to counteract beading. Nevertheless, there may be challenges associated with obtaining a layer of uniform, sub-micron thickness of the aqueous treatment formulation at such viscosities.
  • In step S209, an aqueous treatment formulation is applied to the silicone-based release layer surface to form a wet treatment layer having a thickness of at most 0.8 μM.
  • Embodiments of the invention relate to apparatus and methods for applying this wet treatment layer so that the thickness is uniform, preferably over large areas of the ITM.
  • In some embodiments, after coating the ITM surface with an initial coating of aqueous treatment formulation, excess treatment formulation may be removed from the initial coating or obtain a wet treatment layer having a uniform thickness of at most 0.8 μM.
  • In some embodiments, this may be accomplished by urging a highly-rounded surface (e.g. of a doctor blade) towards the ITM or vice versa. For example, a radius of curvature of the highly-rounded surface may be at most 1.5 mm or at most 1.25 mm or at most 1 mm.
  • At high print speeds (e.g. where the surface velocity of the ITM is relatively large (e.g. at least 1 meter/second or at least 1.25 meters/second or at least 1.5 meters/second)), the removing of excess liquid to form the treatment layer having a sub-micron thickness may entail establishing a relatively large velocity gradient (i.e. shear) in the gap region (e.g. the velocity gradient is normal to the ITM surface) in the between the highly surface and the ITM—e.g. a velocity gradient of at least 106 sec−1 or at least 2×106 sec−1.
  • As noted above, the 25° C. dynamic viscosity of treatment formulation may be at least 10 cP. Even if step S209 is performed at a higher temperature, the dynamic viscosity at these higher temperatures may be at least 3 cP or at least 5 cP or at least 10 cP. Thus, in some embodiments of the invention, a relatively large force is required (e.g. force to urge the highly-rounded surface towards the ITM or vice versa) to achieve the requisite uniform sub-0.8 μM (preferably) uniform thickness.
  • In some embodiments, the rounded surface is urged to the ITM or vice versa, at a force density in the cross-print direction of at least 250 g/cm or at least 350 g/cm or at least 400 gm/cm and/or at most 1 kg/cm or at most 750 g/cm or at most 600 g/cm.
  • In some embodiments, the wet treatment layer is formed by applying a pressure between an applicator and the ITM, a magnitude of the pressure being at least 0.1 bar or at least 0.25 bar or at least 0.35 bar or at least 0.5 bar, and optionally at most 2 bar or at most 1.5 bar, or at most 1 bar.
  • A Discussion of Step S213
  • In step S213, the wet treatment layer is subjected to a drying process form a dried treatment film therefrom.
  • For example, during the drying process of the wet treatment layer, a dynamic viscosity thereof increases by at least a factor of 1000 within a period of time of at most 0.5 seconds or at most 0.25 seconds.
  • In some embodiments, a thickness of the dried treatment film (e.g. cohesive polymer treatment film) is at most 150 nanometers, or at most 120 nanometers, or at most 100 nanometers, or at most 80 nanometers, or at most 60 nanometers.
  • In some embodiments, the dried treatment film has a smooth upper surface. For example, the drying process of the wet treatment layer is sufficiently rapid such that the viscosity of the aqueous treatment formulation increases rapidly enough to inhibit surface-tension-driven beading such that the dried treatment film has a smooth upper surface.
  • In some embodiments, the smooth upper surface of the dried treatment film is characterized by an average roughness Ra of at most 12 nanometers or at most 10 nanometers or at most 9 nanometers or at most 8 nanometers or at most 7 nanometers or at most 5 nanometers. The skilled artisan is directed to FIG. 13 and to the accompanying discussion.
  • In some embodiments, the dried treatment film is continuous over an entirety of a rectangle of the release surface of the ITM, wherein the rectangle has a width of at least 10 cm and a length of at least 10 meters.
  • In some embodiments, the treatment film is transparent.
  • One of the purposes of the dried treatment film is to protect the ITM surface from direct contact with droplets of aqueous ink deposited on the treatment film. However, droplets of aqueous inks could ‘erode through’ a thickness of the dried treatment film, especially when the dried treatment film is thin (e.g. at most 150 or at most 120 or at most 100 or at most 80 nanometers).
  • Thus, in some embodiments, a water-soluble-polymer concentration, by weight, of water soluble polymer within the provided aqueous treatment formulation (e.g. in step S205 of FIG. 2 or in step S95 of FIG. 12 ) is at most 10% or at most 8% or at most 6% or at most 5% by weight.
  • A Discussion of Steps S217-S221
  • In step S217, droplets of aqueous ink are deposited (e.g. by ink-droplet deposition) onto the dried treatment film to form an ink image on the ITM surface. In step S221, this ink image is dried to leave an ink-image residue on the ITM surface.
  • For example, a presence of non-ionic surfactants such as in the dried treatment film is useful for promoting dot spreading and/or dot gain (e.g. uniform dot spreading and/or dot gain) when the droplets are deposited or immediately thereafter—the skilled artisan is directed to the discussion below with reference to FIGS. 12A-12E. As noted above, the formation (in step S213) of a dried treatment film of uniform thickness and/or free of defects and/or having a very smooth upper surface may facilitate uniform flow of aqueous ink on the film upper surface.
  • A Discussion of Step S225
  • In step SS25, the ink-image residue is transferred to substrate. For example, the ink-image residue may be transferred together with non-printed areas of the dried treatment film onto the printing substrate.
  • In embodiments, the dried treatment film is sufficiently cohesive such that during transfer of the ink-image residue, the dried treatment film completely separates from the ITM and transfers to the printing substrate with the dried ink image, both in printed and non-printed areas.
  • In some embodiments, a temperature of the ITM during transfer is in the range between 80° C. and 120° C. In some embodiments, the ITM temperature is at most 100° C. or at most 90° C. In some embodiments, the ITM temperature is at least 100° C. or at least 110° C. or at least 120° C.
  • In some embodiments, a presence of water-soluble polymers in the aqueous treatment solution provided in step S205 helps to ensure (i.e. by forming a polymer film or matrix) that the dried treatment film formed in step S213 is sufficiently cohesive during transfer.
  • In some embodiments, the substrate to which the ink image residue is glossy paper—e.g. glossy coated paper.
  • The transfer may be perfect (i.e. an entirety of the ink image residue and the dried treatment film is transferred to substrate). Alternatively, the transfer may be less than perfect—towards this end, a cleaning station may clean away material remaining on the ITM surface after the transfer step of S225.
  • A Discussion of FIGS. 3A-3B
  • FIG. 3A is a schematic diagram of a system for indirect printing according to some embodiments of the present invention. The system of FIG. 3A comprises an intermediate transfer member (ITM) 210 comprising a flexible endless belt mounted over a plurality of guide rollers 232, 240, 250, 253, 242. In other examples (not shown in the schematic diagram), the ITM 220 is a drum or a belt wrapped around a drum.
  • In the example of FIG. 3A, the ITM 210 (i.e. belt thereof) moves in the clockwise direction. The direction of belt movement defines upstream and downstream directions. Rollers 242, 240 are respectively positioned upstream and downstream of the image forming station 212—thus, roller 242 may be referred to as a “upstream roller” while roller 240 may be referred to as a “downstream roller”.
  • The system of FIG. 3A further comprises:
      • (a) an image forming station 212 (e.g. comprising print bars 222A-222D, where each print bar comprises ink jet head(s)) configured to form ink images (NOT SHOWN) upon a surface of the ITM 210 (e.g. by droplet deposition upon a dried treatment film—e.g. see step S217 of FIG. 2 or step S109 of FIG. 12 );
      • (b) a drying station 214 for drying the ink images (e.g. see step S221 of FIG. 2 or step S113 of FIG. 12 )
      • (c) an impression station 216 where the ink images are transferred from the surface of the ITM 210 to sheet or web substrate (e.g. see step S225 of FIG. 2 or step S117 of FIG. 12 ).
  • In the particular non-limiting example of FIG. 3A, impression station 216 comprises an impression cylinder 220 and a blanket cylinder 218 that carries a compressible blanket 219. In some embodiments, a heater 231 may be provided shortly prior to the nip between the two cylinders 218 and 220 of the image transfer station to assist in rendering the ink film tacky, so as to facilitate transfer to the substrate (e.g. sheet substrate or web substrate). The substrate feed is illustrated schematically.
      • (d) a cleaning station 258 (i.e. in FIG. 3A illustrated schematically as a block) where residual material (e.g. treatment film and/or ink images or portions thereof) is cleaned (cleaning step is NOT SHOWN in FIG. 2 ) from the surface of the ITM 210.
      • (e) a treatment station 260 (i.e. in FIG. 3A illustrated schematically as a block) where forming a layer (e.g. of uniform thickness) of liquid treatment formulation (e.g. aqueous treatment formulation) on the ITM surface (e.g. see step S209 of FIG. 2 or step S101 of FIG. 12 ).
  • The skilled artisan will appreciate that not every component illustrated in FIG. 3A is required.
  • FIG. 3B illustrates a plurality of ‘locations’ LOCA-LocJ. that are fixed in space—LocA is at roller 242, LocB is at the ‘beginning’ of image station 212, LocC is at the ‘end’ of image station 212, and so on. Thus, ink images (e.g. in step S217 of FIG. 2 ) are formed in the region between locations LocA and LocB, at image forming station 212 on the upper run of ITM 210. The ink images are dried (e.g. see step S221 of FIG. 2 or step S105 of FIG. 12 ) in the region between locations LocC and LocE to form ink-image residues—this may occur as the ink images move (e.g. due to clock-wise rotation of the ITM) through drying station 214. The ink image residues are transferred from the ITM surface to substrate at the impression station 216 between locations LocE and LocF (e.g. see step S225 of FIG. 2 or step S117 of FIG. 12 ). Material remaining on the surface of the ITM 210 after transfer of the ink image residues may be cleaned from the surface of the ITM 210 at cleaning station 258 between LocG and LocH. A wet treatment layer may be formed in step S209 of FIG. 2 (or step S101 of FIG. 12 ) on the surface of the ITM 210 at treatment station 260 between locations LocI and LocJ (e.g. see step S209 of FIG. 2 or step S101 of FIG. 12 ). This wet treatment layer subjected to a drying process (i.e. to convert the wet treatment layer into a dried treatment film) (e.g. see step S213 of FIG. 2 or step S105 of FIG. 12 )— this may occur between locations LocJ and LocA on the right hand side. After the dried treatment film is transported (e.g. by counterclockwise rotation of ITM 210) to image forming station 212, ink images may subsequently be formed by droplet deposition to the dried treatment film (e.g. see step S217 of FIG. 2 or step S109 of FIG. 2 ).
  • As illustrated in FIGS. 3A-3B, the portion of the ITM between locations LocA and LocD are an upper run of the ITM 210 (i.e of a belt thereof). This upper run (illustrated in FIG. 3C) is between (i) an upstream guide roller 242 that is upstream to image forming station 212 and (ii) a downstream guide roller 240 that is downstream to image forming station. The upper run passes though the image forming station 212.
  • A lower run of the ITM is between locations LocD and LocA of ITM 210 and is illustrated in FIG. 3D. This lower run passes through impression station 216, cleaning station 258 and treatment station 260.
  • One example of a treatment station is shown in FIG. 4A.
  • In the particular non-limiting embodiment of FIG. 4A, the ITM 210 is moved from right to left as viewed, as represented by an arrow 2012, over a doctor blade that is generally designated 2014 and is suitably mounted within a tank 2016. In FIG. 4A, the doctor blade 2014 is of the doctor rod type and is formed of a rigid bar or holder 2020 that extends across the entire width of the ITM 210. In its upper surface facing the underside of the ITM 210, the bar 2020 is formed with a channel or groove 24 within which there is supported a rod 2022 made of fused quartz and having a smooth and regular cylindrical surface with a roughness of no more than a few microns, preferably less than 10 microns and in particular less than 0.5 microns.
  • Prior to passing over the doctor blade 2014, the underside of the ITM 210 (or lower run) is coated with an excess of treatment formulation (e.g. solution) 2030 (e.g. provided in step S205 of FIG. 2 or step S95 of FIG. 12 ). The manner in which the excess of treatment formulation (e.g. solution) is applied to the ITM 210, specifically to its underside in the present illustration, is described below by reference to FIG. 5 , but is not of fundamental importance to the present invention. The ITM 210 may for example simply be immersed in a tank containing the liquid, passed over a fountain of the treatment formulation (e.g. solution), or, as shown in FIG. 5 , sprayed with an upwardly directed jet 1128.
  • In an embodiment of the invention, a liquid-permeable cloth is placed above upwardly directed spray heads, so that the liquid seeps through the cloth and forms a layer on the side of the cloth facing the surface to be coated. In this case, the spray heads will act to urge the cloth towards the surface, but it will be prevented by the liquid seeping through it from contacting the surface, the liquid acting in the same manner as in a hydrodynamic bearing.
  • As shown in the drawing, as the ITM 210 approaches the doctor blade 2014 it has a coating 2030 of liquid that is significantly greater than the desired thickness of the thin film that is to be applied to the ITM 210.
  • The function of the doctor blade 2014 is to remove excess liquid 2030 from the ITM 210 and ensure that the remaining liquid is spread evenly and uniformly over the entire surface of the ITM 210. To achieve this, the ITM 210 is urged towards the doctor blade 2014, for example by means of air pressure (NOT SHOWN). Alternatively, the force urging the ITM 210 towards the doctor blade 2014 may be a backing roller 2014, such as a compressible (e.g. sponge) roller in some embodiments, pressing down on the upper or opposite side of the web, either by virtue of its own weight or by the action of springs. As a further alternative, the doctor blade 2014 may itself be urged towards the ITM 210 while the latter is maintained under tension.
  • The tip of the doctor blade 2014, being constituted by a cylindrical smooth rod 2022, has a uniform radius over the width of the ITM 210 and its smoothness ensures laminar flow of the liquid in the gap between it and the underside of the ITM 210. The nature of the flow may be similar to that of the liquid lubricant in a hydrodynamic bearing and reduces the film of liquid 2030 that remains adhering to the underside of the ITM 210 (i.e. the surface of a low run′ of the ITM) to a thickness dependent upon the force urging the ITM against the doctor blade 2014 and the radius of curvature of the rod 2022. As both the radius and the force are constant over the width of the web, the resulting film is uniform and its thickness can be set by appropriate selection of the applied force and the rod diameter. The excess of liquid removed by the doctor blade 2014 creates a small pool 2032 immediately upstream of the rod 2022 before falling into the tank 2016.
  • In an alternative embodiment of the invention, the surface of the ITM 210 to be coated with liquid may face upwards instead of downwards. In this case, instead of applying an excess of liquid to the ITM 210 (i.e. the surface of a low run′ of the ITM), the liquid may be metered onto the surface to develop and maintain a similar small pool of liquid upstream of the line of contact between the wiper blade and the surface on the upper side of the web. Air knives may be provided in this case to prevent treatment formulation (e.g. solution) from the pool from spilling over the lateral edges of the ITM 210.
  • In embodiments of the invention, pool 2032 provides a constant supply of treatment formulation (e.g. solution) across the entire width of the ITM 210 so that all areas of the ITM 210 are coated even if the liquid has been, for any reason, repelled (e.g. due to ‘beading’) from parts of the surface of the web prior to reaching the doctor blade 2014.
  • The tank 2016 into which the surplus treatment formulation (e.g. solution) falls may be the main reservoir tank from which liquid is drawn to coat the underside of the web with an excess of treatment formulation (e.g. solution) or it may be a separate tank that is drained into the main reservoir tank and/or emptied to suitable discard systems.
  • The rod 2022 is made of a hard material such as fused quartz in order to resist abrasion. There may be small particles of grit or dust in the liquid which could damage the rounded edge over which the liquid flows. It would be possible to use materials other than fused quartz, but the material should preferably have a Brinell hardness in excess of 100 (e.g. in excess of 200, or in excess of 500, or even in excess of 1000). In embodiments of the invention, the material should be capable of being formed into a smooth rod of uniform diameter and a surface roughness of less than 10 micron, in particular of less than 0.5 micron.
  • The rod 2022 which may have a radius of 6 mm but possibly of only 0.5 mm is relatively fragile and may require a bar 2020 for support. To hold the rod 2022 accurately in position, the bar is formed with a groove 24 within which the rod 2022 rests. The rod may be retained in the groove 24 in any suitable manner. For example, it is possible to use an adhesive and to use the bar 2020 to press the rod 2022 against a flat surface, such as a glass sheet, until the adhesive sets. As a further alternative, the groove may be accurately machined to be slightly narrower than the rod diameter and heat shrinking may be used to hold the rod in position within the groove.
  • Sometimes when using such a doctor blade to apply certain formulations (e.g. solution), a deposit 34 of the solute builds up on the downstream side of the doctor blade 2014. While not wishing to be bound by theory, it is believed that this may be caused by the fact that a stationary film of the formulation (e.g. solution) adheres to the downstream side of the doctor blade and as it dries leaves behind the solute. Regardless of the reason for the formation of such a deposit and its composition, if allowed to grow excessively, it will eventually interfere with the layer of treatment formulation (e.g. solution) applied to the ITM 210.
  • Embodiments of the invention relate to apparatus and methods for changing the doctor blade 2014 when it becomes soiled. FIG. 4B illustrate an example of how the doctor blade may be changed easily, and preferably without the need to interrupt the web coating process, or the printing system that requires a conditioning agent to be applied to its ITM.
  • In FIG. 4B, twelve doctor blades 1122 are mounted uniformly in recesses around the circumference of a cylindrical rotatable turret 1120. The axially extending doctor blades 122 behave in the same way as the doctor rods 1122 in FIG. 4A and the turret 120 serves the same purpose as the rod holder 120. Instead of using rods of circular cross section, the doctor blades 1122 are constructed as strips having smooth rounded and polished edges. Strips having rounded d edges of uniform radius of curvature may be produced, for example, by flattening rods of circular cross section. The doctor blades 1222 may suitably be made of stainless steel but other hard materials resistant to abrasion may alternatively be used.
  • The manner in which the turret 1120 and the doctor blades 122 interact with the ITM 110 is shown in FIG. 5 which illustrates one example of a cleaning station 258 and treatment station 260 (e.g. for applying a wet layer of treatment formulation—e.g. as in step S209 of FIG. 2 or step S101 of FIG. 2 ).
  • In the example of FIG. 5 , two separate tanks 1125, 1127 are shown. A quantity of treatment solution (e.g. having one or properties of step S205 of FIG. 2 or step S95 of FIG. 12 ) is stored in tank 1125. For example, this treatment solution may be jetted (i.e. by jetting apparatus 774) to the surface of the ITM 210. Also illustrated in FIG. 5 are brushes 1126A and 1126B for mechanically removing material from the surface of the ITM 210 to clean the ITM surface—e.g. pressure may be applied between backing rollers 772A-772B respectively disposed opposite brushes 1126A-1126B.
  • In some embodiments, material removed from the surface of the ITM comprises dried treatment film which may be, for example, resoluble in liquid treatment formulation (e.g. having one or properties of step S205 of FIG. 2 or step S95 of FIG. 12 ) stored in tank 1125—this may allow for recycle of treatment formulation. Thus, the cleaning of the ITM surface may be affected by the treatment solution itself.
  • Irrespective of any mechanical properties of the system, in embodiments of the invention, the aqueous treatment formulation provided in step S205 of FIG. 2 or in step S95 of FIG. 12 may be fully resoluble (e.g. after drying, it may fully dissolve in aqueous treatment formulation).
  • Treatment formulation 1128 may be jetted by jetting apparatus 1128. In the example of FIG. 5 , one of the doctor blades 1122 is active—this is labelled 1122 ACTIVE. A relatively thick layer of treatment formulation may be applied (e.g. by apparatus 1128), and excess treatment formulation may be is removed by the combination of doctor blade 1122 ACTIVE and a backing roller 1114 which is urged towards doctor blade 1122 ACTIVE.
  • Jetting apparatus 1128 is one example of a ‘coater’ for applying a coating of treatment formulation to the surface of ITM 210. Another example of a coater is a pool 2032 when liquid content of the pool is retained on the ITM surface.
  • Collectively, doctor blade 1122 ACTIVE (or rounded tip thereof) and backing roller 1114 (or alternatively a device for providing air pressure towards rounded tip 1123) collectively a coating thickness-regulation assembly—thus, in FIGS. 10A and 11A the “final thickness' of the treating formulation may be regulated by according to an amount of force urgent the tip 1123 towards the opposing portion of ITM 210 (e.g. towards backing roller 1114) or vice versa.
  • In the example of FIG. 5 , only one doctor blade 122 interacts with the ITM 110 at any given time but when a blade becomes soiled, the turret 120 is rotated to bring the next adjacent doctor blade into the operating position in which the blade is functional, i.e. sufficiently close to the surface to remove excess liquid and allow only a film of the desired thickness to adhere to the surface downstream of the apparatus.
  • Prior to returning to the operating position, at some later stage in the turret rotation cycle, the soiled blade 1122 passes through a cleaning device, for example a brush 1130, which removes any deposit and cleans the blade before it becomes functional again.
  • The rotation of the turret 1120 may be instigated on demand by an operator or it may be performed at regular intervals.
  • The number of doctor blades on the turret 1120 need not be twelve but it is desirable for there to be a sufficient number that during a changeover, as shown in FIGS. 8 and 9 , there should be a time when two doctor blades 1122 are functional and interact with the ITM 110 at the same time. As a consequence, there is a substantially continuous replacement of the blades, so that no interruption in the film metering operation, and this in turn permits the doctor blade to be changed without interruption of the printing system.
  • FIGS. 8-9 are more detailed perspective and exploded sectional views, respectively, of the turret 1120 and the doctor blade cleaning brush 1130. Both are mounted on axles rotatably supported in a metal frame 1140 immersed in the tank 1127. The axles of the turret 1120 and the doctor blade cleaning brush 1130 are connected to respective drive motors 1412 and 1144 mounted outside the tank 1127. As can be seen from FIG. 7 , the turret 1120 is made of a hollow cylinder and its cylindrical surface may be perforated to reduce it weight and moment of inertia, while still providing adequate strength to support the doctor blades 1122.
  • While the doctor blades 1122 supported by the turret 1120 have been shown as flat strips, it should be understood that they may alternatively be formed as circular rod as described by reference to FIG. 4 .
  • It has been found that the vigorous agitation of the solution of the conditioning or treatment agent can, for certain conditioning agents, result in the formation of a foam or froth. It is possible to destroy the foam using ultrasound and such an anti-foaming device may be incorporated in the tank 1125.
  • As illustrated in FIGS. 10A and 10B, when doctor blade 1122 ACTIVE is urged towards backing roller 1141, or vice versa, doctor blade may penetrate into a lower run of the ITM 210. As shown in FIG. 10A, ITM 210 (i.e. a lower run thereof) is disposed in between roller 1141 and doctor blade 1122 ACTIVE. Therefore, when roller 1141 is urged towards doctor blade 1122 ACTIVE, roller 1141 pushes on ITM 210 (i.e. a lower run thereof) and ITM 210 is urged towards doctor blade 1122 ACTIVE—the converse is true.
  • In the examples of FIGS. 10A-10B, a central axis 1188 of doctor blade 1122 ACTIVE is illustrated. In FIGS. 10A-10B, a rounded tip of doctor blade 1122 ACTIVE is labelled as 1123.
  • In the example of FIG. 10A, tip 1123 faces a surface (i.e. local normal) of the ITM 210. In the example of FIG. 10 A doctor blade 1122 ACTIVE is oriented substantially normal to a local surface of the ITM 210 that faces rounded tip 1123.
  • In the example of FIG. 10A, downward force may be applied (i.e. via the ITM) by roller 1141 towards rounded tip 1123. Alternative, air pressure may be used to bias the ITM 210 towards the rounded tip 1123. This results in the doctor blade 122 ACTIVE removing all but a thin liquid film (e.g. less than typically less than 1 micrometer) having a thickness determined by the radius of curvature and the applied pressure.
  • All of the above may apply as well to the exemplary structure provided in FIG. 10A, In the embodiment of FIG. 10A, however, the backing roller has a compressible surface which is compressed when the rounded tip is urged towards the ITM surface and/or vice versa (i.e. any configuration in which the backing roller and the rounded tip are urged toward one another) so that the rounded tip penetrates into the backing roller together with the ITM at a particular or desired penetration depth.
  • Jetting device 1128 or a bath in which the ITM surface may be soaked or any other device for applying an initial coating may be considered a ‘coater’ for coating the ITM with liquid treatment formulation. Furthermore, the combination of (i) rounded surface 1123 (e.g. rounded tip) and a device for applying a counter force (e.g. roller 1141) to urge rounded surface 1112 towards an opposing of the ITM 210 (or vice versa) form a thickness-regulation assembly for removing excess liquid so as to leave only the desired uniform thin layer of treatment formulation (e.g. of submicron thickness).
  • In embodiments of the invention, even though the rounded tip 1123 is out contact from an opposing ITM surface (e.g. to maintain a gap therebetween, the applicator may still indirectly apply pressure to the ITM via the treatment fluid.
  • In some embodiments, the rounded tip applies a pressure of at least 0.1 bar or at least 0.25 bar or at least 0.35 bar or at least 0.5 bar, and optionally at most 2 bar or at most 1.5 bar, or at most 1 bar.
  • This pressure may be localized in the print direction. For example, a ‘strip of pressure’ (e.g. the strip may be elongated in a cross print direction) (e.g. having a length in the cross print direction of at least 10 cm, at least 30 cm, at least 50 cm, at least 70 cm, or at least 100 cm, and typically at most 250 cm, at most 200 cm, or at most 150 cm) may be applied to the ITM by the applicator so that (i) a maximum pressure applied to the ITM within the strip is P_STRIP_MAX, a value of which is at least at least 0.1 bar or at least 0.25 bar or at least 0.35 bar or at least 0.5 bar, and optionally at most 2 bar or at most 1.5 bar, or at most 1 bar; (ii) at all locations within the strip, a local pressure applied to the ITM by the applicator is at least 0.5*P_STRIP_MAX and (iii) on all locations in a cross-print direction on opposite sides of the strip (upstream and downstream to the strip—displaced from the strip by at most 2 cm or at most 1 cm or at most 5 mm or most 3 mm or at most 2 mm or at most 1 mm or at most 0.5 mm), a maximum pressure is at most 0.2*P_STRIP_MAX or at most 0.1*P_STRIP_MAX.
  • As shown in FIG. 11A, a presence of the rounded tip 1123 (e.g. doctor blade) (e.g. held stationary) may cause a shear field or velocity gradient—see, for example, FIG. 11B and FIG. 11C. At locations on the ITM surface, the velocity of treatment fluid may be non-zero (e.g. substantially equal to a velocity of the ITM) due to a no-stick boundary condition with the ITM surface; at the applicator the velocity of treatment fluid may be zero.
  • In some embodiments, i. the forming of the thin wet treatment layer (e.g. in step S209 of FIG. 2 or in step S101 of FIG. 12 ) comprises creating a velocity gradient (e.g. in the direction normal to the ITM surface) of the aqueous treatment solution in an Intense velocity Gradient IVG location x=xIVG_location location that is (i) normally displaced from the release surface of the ITM (e.g. by at most 3 microns or at most 2 microns or at most 1 micron) and/or between an applicator and the release surface of the applicator; and ii. in the IVG location, a magnitude of the velocity gradient equals or exceeds a VG value that is at least 106 sec−1 or at least 2×106 sec−1 or at least 4×106 sec−1 or at least 5×106 sec−1 or at least 7.5×106 sec−1 or at least 107 sec−1 or at least 2×107 sec−1 or at least 4×107 sec−1 or at least 5×107 sec−1 or at least 7.5×107 sec−1.
  • In some embodiments, the velocity gradient is localized along a print direction such that:
      • i. at an upstream location that is upstream of the IVG location, a maximum velocity gradient is at most x % of a value of the velocity gradient at the IVG location;
      • ii. at a downstream location that is downstream of the IVG location, a maximum velocity gradient is at most x % of a value of the velocity gradient at the IVG location;
      • iii. a value of x is at most 50 or at most 30 or at most 20 or at most 10; and/or
      • iv. the upstream and downstream locations are each displaced from the IVG location by at most by at most 2 cm or at most 1.5 cm or at most 1.25 cm or at most 1 cm or at most 9 mm or at most 8 mm or at most 7.5 mm or at most 7 mm or at most 6 mm or at most 5 mm.
  • In some embodiments, the rounded surface is urged to the ITM or vice versa, at a force density in the cross-print direction of at least 250 g/cm or at least 350 g/cm or at least 400 gm/cm and/or at most 1 kg/cm or at most 750 g/cm or at most 600 g/cm.
  • Discussion of FIG. 12
  • Embodiments of the present invention relate to a printing process described in FIG. 12 . In some non-limiting embodiments, apparatus, systems and devices described in of FIGS. 3-11 may be employed to perform the method of FIG. 12 . The order of steps in FIG. 12 is not intended as limiting—in particular, steps S91-S99 may be performed in any order. In some embodiments, steps S101-S117 are performed in the order indicated in FIG. 12 .
  • In some embodiments, step S91 may be performed to provide any feature or combination of features of step S201 of FIG. 2 .
  • In some embodiments, step S95 may be performed to provide any feature or combination of features of step S205 of FIG. 2 .
  • In some embodiments, step S101 may be performed to provide any feature or combination of features of step S209 of FIG. 2 .
  • In some embodiments, step S105 may be performed to provide any feature or combination of features of step S213 of FIG. 2 .
  • In some embodiments, step S109 may be performed to provide any feature or combination of features of step S217 of FIG. 2 .
  • In some embodiments, step S113 may be performed to provide any feature or combination of features of step S221 of FIG. 2 .
  • In some embodiments, step S117 may be performed to provide any feature or combination of features of step S225 of FIG. 2 .
  • Steps S91-99 relate to the ingredients or components or consumables used in the process of FIG. 12 , while steps S101-S117 relate to the process itself. Briefly, (i) in step S101 a thin treatment layer of a wet treatment formulation is applied to an intermediate transfer member (ITM) (e.g. having a release layer with hydrophobic properties), (ii) in step S105 this treatment layer is dried (e.g. rapidly dried) into a thin dried treatment film on a release surface of the ITM, (iii) in step S109 droplets of an aqueous ink are deposited (e.g. by jetting) onto the thin dried treatment film, (iv) in step S113 the ink image is dried to leave an ink image on the dried treatment film on the ITM and (v) in step S117 the ink-image is transferred to printing substrate (e.g. together with the dried treatment film).
  • The details of the ingredients of steps S91-S99, as well as the process steps S101-S117 are described below.
  • In embodiments of the inventions, steps S91-S117 are performed as follows:
      • (A) in step S91, an ITM is provided—e.g. at most moderately hydrophobic and/or having hydrophobic properties and/or having a release layer that is silicone based and/or only moderately hydrophobic and/or lacking functional groups;
      • (B) in step S95, an aqueous treatment solution is provided (e.g. (i) having a low evaporation load and/or (ii) that is surfactant rich and/or (ii) that is only moderately hydrophilic and/or (iii) comprising a water soluble polymer and/or (iv) comprising non-ionic surfactants such as polyethoxylated sorbitan esters and/or (v) having a viscosity that is low enough so that the solution may be spread into a uniform thin layer and/or (vi) comprising hygroscopic material and/or (vii) substantially devoid of organic solvents and/or (viii) having at most a low concentration of flocculants containing polyvalent cations;
      • (C) in step S99 an aqueous ink is provided;
      • (D) in step S101 an aqueous treatment formulation is applied to the release surface of the ITM (e.g. an in-motion ITM) to form thereon a thin wet treatment layer (e.g. thickness≤0.8μ);
      • (E) in step S105, the wet thin treatment layer is subjected to a drying process (e.g. rapid drying) on the ITM release surface to leave a thin dried treatment film (e.g. thickness≤0.08μ) of the water soluble polymer on the ITM release surface. For example, the thin dried treatment film may have one or both of the following properties: (i) for example, the treatment film is continuous and/or cohesive film; (ii) an upper surface of the dried treatment film is characterized by a very low roughness;
      • (F) in step S109, droplets of aqueous ink are deposited (e.g. by ink-jetting) onto the thin dried treatment film to form an ink image thereon;
      • (G) in step S119, the ink-image to leave an ink residue on the dried treatment film (e.g. to achieve good ink-dot spreading)
      • (H) in step S119, the dried ink-image is transferred (e.g. at a relatively low temperature) (e.g. together with the dried treatment film) from the ITM surface to printing substrate (e.g. paper-based or plastic-based).
  • In some embodiments the process of FIG. 12 is performed so that when the aqueous treatment solution is applied to the ITM in step S101, there is little or no beading so that the resulting thin dried treatment film (i.e. obtained in step S105) is continuous and/or has a smooth (e.g. extremely smooth) upper surface. This smooth upper surface may be important for obtaining a substrate-residing ink image of high quality.
  • One feature associated with conventional processes where the ITM is pre-treated and the ink image is applied on top of the pre-treated ITM, is that after transfer to substrate, the dried treatment formulation (e.g. after drying) resides over the ink image and may add to the ink image an undesired gloss. To overcome or minimize this potentially undesirable effect, the thin dried treatment film is obtained in step S105 (for example, having a thickness of at most 400 nanometers or at most 200 nanometers or at most 100 nanometers or even less). Furthermore, in some embodiments, this thin dried treatment film (i.e. obtained in step S105) is continuous, which can be beneficial, as discussed below.
  • Though not a limitation, in some embodiments, the process of FIG. 12 is performed so that the image-transfer of step S117 is performed at a low temperature (e.g. to an uncoated substrate)—e.g. a temperature of at most 90° C., or at most 85° C., at most 80° C., or at most 75° C., at most 70° C., or at most 65° C., at most 60° C.—for example, at about 60° C.
  • A Discussion of Step S91 of FIG. 12
  • In different embodiments, the ITM (i.e. the ITM provided in step S91 of FIG. 12 or in step S201 of FIG. 2 ) may provide one or more (i.e. any combination of) of the following features A1-A5:
      • A1: Silicone based release layer—The release layer is formed of a silicone material (e.g. addition-cured)—this provides the ITM with hydrophobic properties useful in step S117.
      • A2: Cured silicone release layer—Before use in the method of FIG. 12 , the silicone-based release layer has been produced in a manner that reduces a hydrophobicity thereof. For example, instead of relying on the addition of functional, reactive groups to imbue the release layer with hydrophilicity, it is possible to cure the silicone release layer so that polar atoms in polar groups (e.g. the oxygen atom in a polar Si—O—Si moiety) are aligned or otherwise face outwardly with respect to the release layer surface. In this example, the oxygen atom of the “Si—O—Si” is not capable, under typical process conditions, of chemically bonding to the materials within the treatment solution, to the dried ink image and/or to the dried treatment film in step S117. However, in steps S101-S105, it is possible to benefit from the hydrophilicity of the outwardly-facing, polar “O”.
      • A3: Hydrophobicity of release layer—The release surface of the ITM may have moderately hydrophobic properties but is not overly hydrophobic. Thus, the release surface may have a surface energy (at 25° C.) of at least 23 dynes/cm, and more typically, at least 25 dynes/cm, at least 28 dynes/cm, at least 30 dynes/cm, at least 32 dynes/cm, at least 34 dynes/cm, or at least 36 dynes/cm, and/or at most 48 dynes/cm, at most 46 dynes/cm, at most 44 dynes/cm, at most 42 dynes/cm, at most 40 dynes/cm, at most 38 dynes/cm, or at most 37 dynes.
      • A4: A receding contact angle of a droplet of distilled water—A receding contact angle of a droplet of distilled water on the ink reception or release layer surface is typically at least 30°, and more typically, 30° to 75°, 30° to 65°, 30° to 55°, or 35° to 55°;
      • A5: Functional groups in release layer—The release layer of the ITM may be devoid or substantially devoid of functional groups bonded within the crosslinked polymer structure; the inventors believe that such functional groups may increase or promote an undesired adhesion.
    A Discussion of Step S95 of FIG. 12
  • In step S95, an aqueous treatment formulation is provided. This treatment formulation comprises at least 50% wt/wt or at least 55% wt/wt or at least 60% wt/wt or at least 65% wt/wt water carrier liquid).
  • In different embodiments, the aqueous treatment formulation (i.e. the aqueous treatment formulation in its initial state before the application of step S101 of FIG. 12 or the aqueous treatment formulation in its initial state before the application of step S205 of FIG. 1 ) may provide one of more (i.e. any combination of) the of the following features:
      • B1: Low evaporation load—In some embodiments, the initial aqueous treatment formulation has a low evaporation load and is relatively rich in material that is solid at 60° C. (and at atmospheric pressure). As will be discussed below, in some embodiments, this may be useful so that during step S105, the viscosity rapidly increases in a very short period of time, thereby counteracting any tendency of the aqueous treatment formulation to bead on the release surface of the ITM, which has hydrophobic properties. For example, the 60° C. evaporation load may be at most 10:1, or at most 9:1, or at most 8:1, or at most 6:1, or at most 5:1, or at most 4:1. In some embodiments, this is useful for achieving a continuous dried treatment film lacking in bare patches.
      • B2: Surfactant rich—in some embodiments, the initial aqueous treatment formulation comprises at least 2% wt/wt, or at least 2.5% w/t, at least 3% wt/wt, or at least 4% w/t, or at least 5% wt/wt, or at least 6% wt/wt, or at least 7% wt/wt, or at least 8% wt/wt, or at least 9% wt/wt, or at least 10% wt/wt of surfactant(s). For example, one or more of the surfactants present in the initial aqueous treatment formulation (e.g. at least 50% or at least 75% or at least 90% by weight of surfactants in the treatment formulation) may be a solid at 60° C., thus contributing to the low evaporative load. In some embodiments, the relatively high concentration of the surfactant in initial the aqueous treatment formulation may serve to make the aqueous treatment formulation less hydrophilic, thereby reducing a tendency of the aqueous treatment formulation to bead on the release surface of the ITM in step S101 and/or S105. In some embodiments, because the surfactant is a wetting agent, the relatively high concentration of the surfactant may be useful for spreading aqueous ink-droplets (or counteracting any tendency of the ink droplet to contract) over the surface of the dried ink film during steps S109 and/or S113, thereby increasing a coverage of the resulting ink dot which eventually resides on the substrate.
      • B3: Presence (e.g. at relatively high concentration) of non-ionic surfactants—In some embodiments, the initial aqueous treatment formulation comprises at least 5% (e.g. at least 6%, at least 7%, at least 8%, at least 9%, or at least 10%) wt./wt. non-ionic surfactant. In some embodiments, a solubility of this non-ionic surfactant in water is at least 7% at 25° C., and typically higher. The unit “dynes/cm” is used interchangeably with “mN/m”.
      • B4: Moderately hydrophilic initial aqueous treatment formulation—In some embodiments, the initial aqueous treatment formulation is only moderately hydrophilic—e.g. having a static surface tension at 25° C. of at most 32 dynes/cm (e.g. between 20 and 32 dynes/cm) or at most 30 dynes/cm (e.g. between 20 and 32 dynes/cm) or at most 28 dynes/cm (e.g. between 20 and 32 dynes/cm). Because the release surface of the ITM has moderately hydrophobic (or moderately hydrophilic) properties, it may not be useful to employ an initial aqueous treatment formulation having high hydrophilicity, which would cause beading of the aqueous treatment formulation on the surface of the ITM in steps S101 and/or S105. This may be especially important for situations where the thickness of the wet treatment layer is thin, and it is desired to avoid bare patches so the resulting thin dried treatment film is continuous.
      • B5: Presence of a water-soluble polymer which forms a polymer matrix (e.g. upon drying in step S105 of FIG. 21 or upon drying in step S213 of FIG. 2 )—In some embodiments, the initial aqueous formulation comprises at least 1.5% (e.g. at least 2%, at least 2.5%, or at least 3%) by weight, of at least one water soluble, polymer, more particularly, a matrix forming polymer, having a solubility in water of at least 5% at 25° C. Such polymer(s) include but are not limited to polyvinyl alcohol (PVA), water-soluble cellulose, including derivatives thereof, such as hydroxypropyl methyl cellulose, PVP, polyethylene oxide, and acrylic. In some embodiments, the formation of the polymer matrix promotes forming of the film and/or imbues the dried treatment film with desired elasticity and/or cohesiveness or tensile strength, even when the dried treatment film is quite thin.
      • B6: Relatively low viscosity before application to the ITM in step S101 of FIG. 12 (or before application to the ITM in step S209 of FIG. 2 )—As will be discussed below, in step S101 of FIG. 12 (or in step S209 of FIG. 2 ) the inventors have found it to be desirable to apply a thin but relatively uniform wet layer of aqueous treatment formulation. Towards this end, the 25° C. dynamic viscosity of the initial aqueous treatment formulation may be at most 100 cP or at most 80 cP or at most 40 cP or at most 30 cP. Alternatively, or additionally, the 25° C. dynamic viscosity of the initial aqueous treatment formulation may be at least 8 cP or at least 10 cP or at least 12 cP or at least 14 cP—for example, within a range of 8 to 100 cP, 10 to 100 cP, 12 to 100 cP, 14 to 100 cP, 10 to 60 cP, or 12 to 40 cP.
  • In some embodiments, this feature might be particularly useful when applying the treatment formulation to the ITM as it moves at high speeds (e.g. past an applicator arrangement—for example, a stationary applicator arrangement).
      • B7: Devoid of organic solvents such as glycerol—In some embodiments, a presence of low vapor pressure organic solvents might retard the drying of the treatment formulation on the surface of the ITM in step S105 and/or result in a treatment film lacking desired elasticity and/or cohesiveness or tensile strength desired for the transfer step S117. In some embodiments, the formulation is devoid of organic solvents, irrespective of their vapor pressure in the pure state, and/or comprises at most 3%, at most 2%, at most 1%, or at most 0.5%, or at most 0.25% or at most 0.1% by weight, organic solvents. In particular, in some embodiments, the formulation is devoid of organic solvents and/or comprises at most 3%, at most 2%, at most 1%, or at most 0.5%, or at most 0.25% or at most 0.1% by weight, glycerol. In some embodiments, the formulation is completely devoid of glycerol.
      • B8: Comprising water-absorbing materials—In some embodiments, the initial aqueous treatment formulation comprises a solid water-absorbing agent that is selected to absorb water from the ink when the water-absorbing agent is disposed within the solid, dried treatment film. For example, such solid water-absorbing agents may have a melting point (i.e., when in a pure state) of at most 60° C. or at most 50° C. or at most 40° C. or at most 30° C. or at most 25° C. The concentration of the solid water-absorbing agent may be—for example, at least 1.5% or at least 2% or at least 2.5% or at least 3% wt./wt. Examples of such water-absorbing agents include but are not limited to sucrose, urea, sorbitol, and isomalt.
      • B9: Having at most a low concentration of flocculants containing polyvalent cations (such as calcium chloride)—In some embodiments, it is believed that these compounds are not good for the image quality.
    A Discussion of Step S99 of FIG. 12 Potential Features of the AQUEOUS INK:
      • Feature C1: In some embodiments (e.g. related to the method of FIG. 2 or of FIG. 12 ), the ink provides one or more features of (any combination of features) disclosed in PCT/IB13/51755 or US2015/0025179, PCT/IB14/02395 or U.S. Ser. No. 14/917,461, all of which are hereby incorporated by reference. Exemplary features include but are not limited to: having at least one of (i) a viscosity of 2 to 25 cP at least one temperature in the range of 20-60° C. and (ii) a surface tension of not more than 50 milliNewton/m at least one temperature in the range of 20-60° C.; and wherein at least one of the following two statements is true:
      • (1) the ink is such that, when substantially dried, (a) at least one temperature in the range of 90° C. to 195° C., the dried ink has a first dynamic viscosity in the range of 1,000,000 (1×106) cP to 300,000,000 (3×108) cP, and (b) at least one temperature in the range of 50° C. to 85° C., the dried ink has a second dynamic viscosity of at least 80,000,000 (8×107) cP, wherein the second dynamic viscosity exceeds the first dynamic viscosity; and (2) the weight ratio of the resin to the colorant is at least 1:1.
  • For example, the water-based inkjet ink formulation comprises: a solvent containing water and, optionally, a co-solvent, said water constituting at least 8 wt. % of the formulation; at least one colorant dispersed or at least partly dissolved within said solvent, said colorant constituting at least 1 wt. % of the formulation; and an organic polymeric resin, which is dispersed or at least partially dissolved within said solvent, the resin constituting 6 to 40 wt. % of the formulation, wherein the average molecular weight of said resin is at least 8,000.
    • A Discussion of Step S105 of FIG. 12
      • Feature D1: The dried treatment layer formed in step S105 is thin but not a monolayer (e.g. significantly thicker than a monolayer)—e.g. having a thickness of at least 20 nanometers, and typically, at most 100 nanometers. In some embodiments, the dried treatment layer is extremely thin, having a thickness of at most 80 nanometers, or at most 75 nanometers, or at most 70 nanometers, or at most 65 nanometers, or at most 60 nanometers, or at most 55 nanometers, or at most 50 nanometers, or at most 45 nanometers, or at most 40 nanometers or at most 35 nanometers. Nevertheless, in different embodiments, even if the dried treatment film is extremely thin, it is thicker than monolayers or monolayer-type constructs. Thus, in different embodiments, a thickness of the dried treatment layer may be at least 25 nanometers or at least nanometers or at least 40 nanometers or at least 50 nanometers. In some embodiments, providing this much ‘bulk’ (i.e. minimum thickness features—e.g. together with other feature(s) described below) facilitates formation of a dried treatment film that is cohesive and/or elastic— this may be useful in step S117 where it is desirable for the dried treatment film (i.e. at that stage bearing the dried ink image thereon) to maintain its structural integrity as it is transferred from the ITM to the substrate.
  • In some embodiments, the dried treatment formulation may add an undesired gloss to the resulting ink image after transfer to substrate—thus, the ability to form a thin but cohesive dried treatment layer may be useful. The thinness of the layer also facilitates evaporation and drying of the layer into a film.
      • Feature D2: The dried treatment film formed on the ITM in step S105 is continuous and is devoid of ‘bare patches’ thereon, despite the thinness or extreme thinness. As will be discussed below, in some embodiments, in order to achieve this (i.e. especially for thin or very thin layers), both of the following may be required: (i) the initially-applied wet layer applied in step S101 is continuous and devoid of bare-patches, even if the initially-applied wet layer is relatively thin, having a thickness of at most about 1μ (or at most 0.8μ or at most 0.6μ or at most 0.4μ and more typically, at most 0.3μ, at most 0.25μ, or at most 0.2μ, and/or at least 0.1μ) and (ii) the drying process of step S105 occurs very quickly, where the viscosity of the drying treatment formulation increases very rapidly (e.g. by a factor of at least 100 or at least 1000 or at least 10,000 within at most 100 milliseconds, at most 50 milliseconds, within at most 40 milliseconds, within at most 30 milliseconds, within at most 25 milliseconds, within at most 20 milliseconds, within at most 15 milliseconds or within at most 10 milliseconds). Because the ITM release layer has hydrophobic properties and the treatment formulation is aqueous and more hydrophilic, when the aqueous treatment formulation is applied to the ITM release layer, the aqueous treatment formulation may undergo beading. However, if the viscosity increases rapidly after application of the wet treatment layer, the higher viscosity treatment formulation may better resist beading than a formulation of lower viscosity. In some embodiments and as discussed above in feature “B1”, the aqueous treatment formulation may be rich in solids and/or include a low evaporative load—this may facilitate a rapid increase in viscosity.
  • Another anti-beading feature (i.e. anti-beading of the treatment formulation in steps S101-S105) useful for obtaining a continuous dried treatment film may relate to the relative properties of (i) the release surface of the ITM which in some embodiments has hydrophobic properties but is not overly hydrophobic (see feature (see Feature “BA”); and (ii) the aqueous treatment formulation which in some embodiments has hydrophilic properties but is not overly hydrophilic (see feature “B4”). When the static surface tension between the aqueous treatment formulation and the release layer of the ITM may be relatively small, there is less of a driving force towards beading, and the viscosity of the aqueous treatment formation (e.g. as it rapidly increases) may be sufficient to prevent beading.
  • As will be discussed above, despite the only moderate hydrophobicity of the release layer of the ITM (see feature “A3”), the ITM release layer may have specific properties (see feature “A5”), that limit an adhesion between the ITM release layer and the dried treatment film—thus, even if the treatment surface is only moderately hydrophobic to avoid beading of treatment formulation thereon in steps S101 and/or S105, it may be possible (e.g. thanks at least in part to feature “B2”) to avoid paying a ‘price’ for this benefit in step S117 when it is desired later to minimize adhesion forces between the release layer of the ITM and the dried treatment film.
      • Feature D3. The dried treatment film formed on the ITM in step S105 is characterized by an extremely low surface roughness—in some embodiments, the surface roughness may be characterized by an average roughness Ra (a commonly used one-dimensional roughness parameter) of at most 20 nanometers or at most 18 nanometers or at most 16 nanometers or at most 15 nanometers or at most 14 nanometers or at most 12 nanometers or at most 10 nanometers or at most 9 nanometers or at most 8 nanometers or at most 7 nanometers or at most 6 nanometers. The dried treatment film formed on the ITM may have an Ra of at least 3 nanometers or at least 5 nanometers.
  • In some embodiments, it may be possible to achieve such a low roughness average Ra even for thin or extremely thin dried treatment films formed in step S105—e.g. even when a ratio between the roughness average Ra and the thickness of the dried treatment layer is at least 0.02 or at least 0.03 or at least 0.04 or at least 0.05 or at least 0.06 or at least 0.07 or at least 0.08 or at least 0.9 or at least 0.1 or at least 0.11 or at least 0.12 or at least 0.13 or at least 0.14 or at least 0.15 or at least 0.16 or at least 0.17 or at least 0.18 or at least 0.19 or at least 0.2.
  • In some embodiments, the dried treatment film to which the aqueous ink droplets are deposited and a surface (e.g. upper surface of) of the dried treatment film are characterized by a dimensionless ratio between (i) an average roughness Ra and (ii) a thickness of the dried treatment layer, wherein the dimensionless ratio is at most 0.5, at most 0.4, at most 0.3, at most 0.25, at most 0.2, at most 0.15, or at most 0.1, and optionally, at least 0.02 or at least 0.03 or at least 0.04 or at least 0.05 or at least 0.06 or at least 0.07 or at least 0.08.
      • Feature D4—In some embodiments, it is possible to obtain a continuous dry film covering an entirety of a rectangle of at least 10 cm by 1 meter, or an entirety of 1 m2, 3 m2, or 10 m2. The film may have a thickness or average thickness of at most 120 nm, at most 100 nm, at most 80 nm, at most 60 nm, at most 50 nm, or at most 40 nm, and typically, at least 20 nm, at least 25 nm, or at least 30 nm.
  • A Discussion of step S109-S117
  • In different embodiments, steps S109 and/or S113 and/or S117 may be performed to provide one or more of the following process-related features:
      • Feature E1—In some embodiments, step S117 is performed at a low transfer temperature (e.g. at most 90 or 80 or 75 or 70 or 65 or 60° C.—due to thermoplastic properties and/or tensile strength), even when the image is transferred to an uncoated substrate. In some embodiments, providing a low-temperature transfer step may be useful to reduce or avoid clogging of the ink-jet heads, and/or may also be useful for making the printing process, as a whole, more environmentally friendly.
  • In some embodiments, both the dried treatment film and the dried ink image are tacky at the transfer temperature and are thus amenable to being peeled cleanly away from the release layer, even at a relatively low temperature. This property may be at least partially attributed to the chemistry of the initial aqueous treatment solution. In some embodiments, the chemistry and structure of the release layer (see, for example, feature ‘A5’) may also be useful for providing a low-temperature transfer process in step S117.
      • Feature E2: Spreading—the manner in which droplets are deposited onto the film (e.g. the wetting angle) and the physical and/or chemical properties of the treatment film [A2 and/or A3 and/or A8—also the nanoparticles in the ink may contribute] is such as that a radius of an ink-dot exceeds a radius of the precursor droplet immediately upon impact on the dried treatment film—e.g. each droplet increases in size beyond the size resulting from spreading of the droplet caused by the impact energy of the droplet. [Dmax=2·Rmax, or Dimpact−max=2·Rimpact−max].
  • FIGS. 13A-13E schematically describe a process whereby an ink droplet is deposited on an ITM (e.g. a release surface thereof). In FIG. 13A, an ink droplet moves towards the ITM. FIGS. 13B and 13C describe the ink droplet immediately after collision between (i) the droplet and (ii) the ITM (or the dried treatment film thereon). Kinetic energy of the droplet causes deformation of the droplet—this is illustrated in FIGS. 13B to 13C. In particular, kinetic energy of the droplet causes the droplet to expand outwards—FIG. 13C shows a maximum radius of the droplet upon impact—i.e. the maximum increase of the radius due to deformation caused by kinetic energy of the droplet. After the droplet reaches this maximum radius (“R upon impact” or “R max impact”, used interchangeably), e.g. within 10 milliseconds of impact, due to kinetic energy-driven droplet deformation, the droplet (or a successor dot thereof since each droplet eventually becomes an ink dot upon drying—first the dot resides on the ITM (e.g. via the dried treatment film) as shown in FIG. 13D, and after transfer the ink droplet resides on substrate as shown in FIG. 13E). The droplet or dot successor thereof may further expand due to physicochemical forces or chemical interactions. This is a spreading phenomenon that is schematically illustrated by comparing FIG. 13C or 13D with 13B. Once again, it is noted that FIGS. 13A-13E are schematic and there is no requirement that the deformed droplet will have the specific shapes illustrated in FIGS. 13A-13E.
  • General Comment about FIGS. 2 and 12 —In some embodiments, step S201 of FIG. 2 may be performed to provide any feature or combination of features of step S91 of FIG. 12 . In some embodiments, step S205 of FIG. 2 may be performed to provide any feature or combination of features of step S95 of FIG. 12 . In some embodiments, step S209 of FIG. 2 may be performed to provide any feature or combination of features of step S101 of FIG. 12 . In some embodiments, step S213 of FIG. 2 may be performed to provide any feature or combination of features of step S105 of FIG. 12 . In some embodiments, step S217 of FIG. 2 may be performed to provide any feature or combination of features of step S109 of FIG. 12 . In some embodiments, step S221 of FIG. 2 may be performed to provide any feature or combination of features of step S113 of FIG. 12 . In some embodiments, step S225 of FIG. 2 may be performed to provide any feature or combination of features of step S117 of FIG. 12 .
  • Without wishing to be limited by theory, the inventors believe that the ultra-smooth surface of the dried treatment film enables the spreading of the ink dots to occur in an even and controlled manner, such that the formation of disadvantageous rivulets and the like is appreciably mitigated or averted. The resulting ink dot shape is fairly similar in quality to the superior shape (convexity, roundness, edge sharpness) attained in Landa Corporation's Application No. PCT/IB2013/000840, which is incorporated by reference, for all purposes, as if fully set forth herein. This is particularly surprising in view of the spreading mechanism utilized by the present disclosure, as compared with the surface-tension controlled drop pinning and contraction disclosed in that application.
  • Dot and convexity measurements were performed on various dot images of the present invention, in accordance with the procedures disclosed by PCT/IB2013/000840. In addition, dot and convexity measurements were performed substantially as described hereinbelow:
    • Image Acquisition Method
  • The acquisition of the dot images was performed using an LEXT (Olympus) OLS3000 microscope. The images were taken with an X100 and X20 optical zoom. The color images were saved in uncompressed format (Tiff) having a resolution of 640×640 pixels.
  • In addition, in order to measure the dot thickness and diameter, a ZYGO microscope having a X100 lens was used.
    • About the Analysis
  • The basic parameters of interest (and their units) included in this work are:
  •
    Diameter - fit to a circle [Ddot] [mic]
    Perimeter [P] [mic]
    Measured area [A] [pix{circumflex over ( )}2]
    Minimal convex shape area [CSA] [pix{circumflex over ( )}2]
    Optical uniformity [STD] [8 bit tone value]
    Thickness [Hdot] [mic]
  • From these parameters, the following were calculated:
  •
    Aspect ratio: Raspect = Ddot/Hdot [dimensionless]
    Dot Roundness: ER = P2/(4π · A) [dimensionless]
    DRdot: ER − 1 [dimensionless]
    Convexity: CX = AA/CSA [dimensionless]
    Non-convexity: Dcdot = 1 − CX [dimensionless]
  • The analysis was done using the MATLAB image processing tool, utilizing, where possible, the above-referenced analysis procedure applied in WO2013/132418.
    • Blanket
  • The ITM may be manufactured in the inventive manner described by FIGS. 15-20 and in the description associated therewith. Such an ITM may be particularly suitable for the Nanographic Printing™ technologies of Landa Corporation.
  • With reference now to FIG. 14 , the figure schematically shows a section through a carrier 10. In all the drawings, to distinguish it from the layers that form part of the finished article, the carrier 10 is shown as a solid black line. Carrier 10 has a carrier contact surface 12.
  • In some embodiments, carrier contact surface 12 may be a well-polished flat surface having a roughness (Ra) of at most about 50 nm, at most 30 nm, at most 20 m, at most 15 nm, at most 12 nm, or more typically, at most 10 nm, at most 7 nm, or at most 5 nm. In some embodiments, carrier contact surface 12 may between 1 and 50 nm, between 3 and 25 nm, between 3 and 20 nm, or between 5 nm and 20 nm.
  • The hydrophilic properties of the carrier contact surface 12 are described hereinbelow.
  • In some embodiments, carrier 10 may be inflexible, being formed, for example, of a sheet of glass or thick sheet of metal.
  • In some embodiments, carrier 10 may advantageously be formed of a flexible foil, such as a flexible foil mainly consisting of, or including, aluminum, nickel, and/or chromium. In one embodiment, the foil is a sheet of aluminized PET (polyethylene terephthalate, a polyester), e.g., PET coated with fumed aluminum metal. The top coating of aluminum may be protected by a polymeric coating, the sheet typically having a thickness of between 0.05 mm and 1.00 mm so as to remain flexible but difficult to bend through a small radius, so as to avert wrinkling.
  • In some embodiments, carrier 10 may advantageously be formed of an antistatic polymeric film, for example, a polyester film such as PET. The anti-static properties of the antistatic film may be achieved by various means known to those of skill in the art, including the addition of various additives (such as an ammonium salt) to the polymeric composition.
  • In a step of the present ITM manufacturing method, the results of which are shown in FIG. 15 , a fluid first curable composition (illustrated as 36 in FIG. 22B) is provided and a layer 16 is formed therefrom on carrier contact surface 12, layer 16 constituting an incipient release layer having an outer ink-transfer surface 14.
  • The fluid first curable composition of layer 16 may include an elastomer, typically made of a silicone polymer, for example, a polydimethylsiloxane, such as a vinyl-terminated polydimethylsiloxane.
  • In some embodiments, the fluid first curable material includes a vinyl-functional silicone polymer, e.g., a vinyl-silicone polymer including at least one lateral vinyl group in addition to the terminal vinyl groups, for example, a vinyl-functional polydimethyl siloxane.
  • In some exemplary embodiments, the fluid first curable material includes a vinyl-terminated polydimethylsiloxane, a vinyl-functional polydimethylsiloxane including at least one lateral vinyl group on the polysiloxane chain in addition to the terminal vinyl groups, a crosslinker, and an addition-cure catalyst, and optionally further includes a cure retardant.
  • As is known in the art, the curable adhesive composition may include any suitable amount of addition cure catalyst, typically at most 0.01% of the pre-polymer, on a per mole basis.
  • Exemplary formulations for the fluid first curable material are provided hereinbelow in the Examples.
  • Layer 16 of the fluid first curable composition is applied to carrier contact surface 12, and is subsequently cured. Layer 16 may be spread to the desired thickness using, for example, a doctor blade (a knife on a roll), without allowing the doctor blade to contact the surface that will ultimately act as the ink-transfer surface 14 of the ITM, such that imperfections in the doctor blade will not affect the quality of the finished product. After curing, “release” layer 16 may have a thickness of between about 2 micrometers and about 200 micrometers. An apparatus in which such step and method can be implemented is schematically illustrated in FIGS. 22A and 22B.
  • For example, the above-detailed release layer formulation may be uniformly applied upon a PET carrier, leveled to a thickness of 5-200 micrometers (μ), and cured for approximately 2-10 minutes at 120-130° C. Surprisingly, the hydrophobicity of the ink transfer surface of the release layer so prepared, as assessed by its receding contact angle (RCA) with a 0.5-5 microliter (μl) droplet of distilled water, may be around 60°, whereas the other side of the same release layer (which served to approximate the hydrophobicity of a layer conventionally prepared with an air interface) may have an RCA that is significantly higher, typically around 90°. PET carriers used to produce ink-transfer surface 14 may typically display an RCA of around 40° or less. All contact angle measurements were performed with a Contact Angle analyzer—Krüss™ “Easy Drop” FM40Mk2 and/or a Dataphysics OCA15 Pro (Particle and Surface Sciences Pty. Ltd., Gosford, NSW, Australia).
  • In a subsequent step of the method, the results of which are shown in FIG. 16 , an additional layer 18, referred to as a compliance layer, is applied to layer 16, on the side opposite to ink-transfer surface 14. Compliance layer 18 is an elastomeric layer that allows layer 16 and its outermost surface 14 to follow closely the surface contour of a substrate onto which an ink image is impressed. The attachment of compliance layer 18 to the side opposite to ink-transfer surface 14 may involve the application of an adhesive or bonding composition in addition to the material of compliance layer 18. Generally, compliance layer 18 may typically have a thickness of between about 100 micrometers and about 300 micrometers or more.
  • While compliance layer 18 may have the same composition as that of release layer 16, material and process economics may warrant the use of less expensive materials. Moreover, compliance layer 18 typically is selected to have mechanical properties (e.g., greater resistance to tension) that differ from release layer 16. Such desired differences in properties may be achieved, by way of example, by utilizing a different composition with respect to release layer 16, by varying the proportions between the ingredients used to prepare the formulation of release layer 16, and/or by the addition of further ingredients to such formulation, and/or by the selection of different curing conditions. For instance, the addition of filler particles may favorably increase the mechanical strength of compliance layer 18 relative to release layer 16.
  • In some embodiments, compliance layer 18 may include various rubbers. Preferably such rubbers are stable at temperatures of at least 100° C. and may include rubbers such as alkyl acrylate copolymer rubbers (ACM), methyl vinyl silicone rubber (VMQ), ethylene propylene diene monomer rubber (EPDM), fluoroelastomer polymers, nitrile butadiene rubber (NBR), ethylene acrylic elastomer (EAM), and hydrogenated nitrile butadiene rubber (HNBR).
  • As a non-limiting example, Silopren® LSR 2530 (Momentive Performance Materials Inc., Waterford NY), a two-component liquid silicone rubber, in which the two components are mixed at a 1:1 ratio, was applied to the cured release layer 16 previously described. The silicone rubber mixture was metered/leveled with a knife blade to obtain an incipient compliance layer 18 having a thickness of about 250 micrometers, which was then cured for approximately 5 minutes at 150-160° C.
  • In a subsequent step of the method, the results of which are shown in FIG. 17 , a reinforcement layer or support layer 20 is constructed on compliance layer 18. Support layer 20 typically contains a fiber reinforcement, in the form of a web or a fabric, to provide support layer with sufficient structural integrity to withstand stretching when the ITM is held in tension in the printing system. Support layer 20 is formed by coating the fiber reinforcement with a resin that is subsequently cured and remains flexible after curing.
  • Alternatively, support layer 20 may be separately formed as a reinforcement layer, including such fibers embedded and/or impregnated within the independently cured resin. In this case, support layer 20 may be attached to compliance layer 18 via an adhesive layer, optionally eliminating the need to cure the support layer 20 in situ. Generally, support layer 20, whether formed in situ on compliance layer 18 or separately, may have a thickness of between about 100 micrometers and about 500 micrometers, part of which is attributed to the thickness of the fibers or the fabric, which thickness generally varies between about 50 micrometers and about 300 micrometers. However, the support layer thickness is not limiting. For heavy-duty applications, by way of example, the support layer may have a thickness of more than 200 micrometers, more than 500 micrometers, or 1 mm or more.
  • For example, to the multi-layered ITM structure described herein, including a vinyl-functionalized release coating 16 and a two-component silicone rubber compliance layer 18, was applied a support layer 20 including woven fabric of glass fibers. The glass fiber fabric, having a thickness of about 100 micrometers, was a plain weave fabric having 16 yarns/cm in perpendicular directions. The glass fiber fabric was embedded into a curable fluid including a liquid silicone rubber Silopren® LSR 2530 corresponding to the compliance layer. Overall, the resulting support layer 20 had a thickness of about 200 micrometers and was cured at 150° C. for approximately 2-5 minutes. Preferably, more dense weave fabrics (e.g., having 24×23 yarns/cm) may be used.
  • Following the in situ formation, or attachment, of support layer 20, additional layers may be built up on the reverse side thereof, as required. FIG. 18 shows an optional felt blanket 22 secured (e.g., by a cured adhesive or resin) to the reverse side of support layer 20, and FIG. 19 shows a high friction layer 24 coated onto the reverse side of blanket 22. As will be appreciated by persons skilled in the art, various relatively soft rubbers may serve for the preparation of a layer having high friction properties, silicone elastomers being but an example of such rubbers. In the absence of an intervening layer such as blanket 22, high friction layer 24 may be attached directly to support layer 20.
  • As mentioned, all layers (e.g., 18, 20, 22, 24, or any intervening adhesive or priming layer and the like) added to the release layer of the ITM jointly form the base of the structure, as shown with respect to base 200 in FIG. 21C.
  • Before the ITM is used, it is necessary to remove carrier 10 to expose ink-transfer surface 14 of release layer 16, as illustrated in FIG. 20 . Typically, the finished product can simply be peeled away from carrier 10.
  • If the carrier 10 is a flexible foil, it may be preferred to leave it in place on the ITM until such time as the ITM is to be installed into a printing system. The foil will act to protect the ink-transfer surface 14 of the ITM during storage, transportation and installation. Additionally, carrier 10 can be replaced, following completion of the manufacturing process, by an alternative foil that is suitable as a protective film.
  • FIGS. 22A to 22D schematically illustrate an apparatus 90 in which the ITM may be manufactured. FIG. 22A provides a schematic overview of such an apparatus 90 having an unwinding roller 40 and a winding roller 42 moving a flexible loop conveyor 100. Along the path followed by conveyor 100 can be positioned a dispensing station 52, able to dispense curable fluid compositions suitable for the desired ITMs, a leveling station 54, able to control the thickness of the curable layer as it moves downstream of the station, and a curing station 56, able to at least partially cure the layer enabling it to serve as incipient layer for a subsequent step, if any. The dispensing station 52, the leveling station 54 and the curing station 56 constitute a layer forming station 50 a. As illustrated by 50 b, apparatus 90 may optionally include more than one layer forming station. Furthermore, a forming station 50 may include additional sub-stations, illustrated by a dispensing roller 58 in station 50 a.
  • In some embodiments, the need for loop conveyor 100 is obviated: carrier 10 is directly tensioned between rollers 40 and 42. Unprocessed carrier 10 is unwound from unwinding roller 40, and after passing through stations 50 a and 50 b, is rewound onto winding roller 42.
  • Though not illustrated in the figure, the apparatus may further include upstream of the dispensing station a “surface treatment” station facilitating the subsequent application of a curable composition, or its attachment to the carrier contact surface or incipient layer as the case may be. As mentioned in relation with the carrier, the optional surface treatment station (not shown) can be suitable for physical treatment (e.g., corona treatment, plasma treatment, ozonation, etc.).
  • FIG. 22B schematically illustrates how in a forming station 50 of apparatus 90, a carrier 10 placed on conveyor 100 can be coated. At dispensing station 52, the curable composition 36 of release layer 16 is applied to carrier contact surface 12. As carrier 10 is driven in the direction of the arrow, the curable composition 36 is leveled to a desired thickness at leveling station 54, for instance, by using a doctor blade. As the leveled layer proceeds downstream, it enters curing station 56, configured so as to at least partially cure curable composition 36, enabling the formation of incipient layer 16 at the exit side of the curing station. Such exemplary steps have been described in connection with FIGS. 16 and 17 .
  • FIGS. 22C and 22D schematically illustrate how additional layers (forming the base) can be applied. In FIG. 22C, a curable composition 38 is dispensed at dispensing station 52 (which can be same or different than the station having served to coat the carrier with the release layer 16, as illustrated in FIG. 9B). Curable composition 38 is leveled to a desired thickness at leveling station 54, then enters curing station 56, and exits curing station 56 sufficiently cured to serve as incipient layer 18 for a subsequent step, and so on. Such an exemplary step has been described in connection with FIG. 18 . With reference now to FIG. 22C, FIG. 22C schematically depicts a curable composition 39 being applied at dispensing station 52. The backbone of a support layer (e.g., a fabric) can be delivered by dispensing roller 58. The exemplary fabric can be submerged into the curable composition at a station 60 prior to their entry into curing station 56. In such a manner, a support layer 20 can be formed at the exit side of the curing station.
  • FIGS. 21A and 21B schematically illustrate how defects would appear in a section of an outer layer 80 (e.g., a release layer) prepared according to the above-described method of the art. FIG. 21A illustrates different phenomena relating to air bubbles, which may be entrapped in any curable composition if the curing occurs before such bubbles can be eliminated (e.g., by degassing). As can be seen in the figure, as tiny bubbles 82 migrate towards the air interface, the orientation of layer 80 during manufacturing over a body 800, hence the direction of migration, being indicated by an arrow, they can merge into larger bubbles. The bubbles, independently of their size, may either remain entrapped within the bulk of the layer or on its surface, the upper part of the bubbles envelope forming protrusions 84. When bubbles adjacent to the surface burst while the curing of the layer is advanced, craters 86 may remain, even if the segment of the envelope of the bubbles protruding from the surface has disappeared. These phenomena therefore typically provide a “gradient” of air bubbles, the upper sections being generally either populated by larger bubbles than the lower sections and/or having a higher density of bubbles per cross section area or per volume, lower and higher being relative to the orientation of the layer during its manufacturing. The impact of bubbles-derived defects on the surface is self-evident, the heterogeneity of the surface typically negatively affecting any subsequent interplay, for instance with an ink image. With time, such ITM being typically operated under tension and/or under pressure, craters may widen and merge to form more significant fissures. Thus, such phenomena may affect the structural integrity of the surface and any mechanical property such integrity would have conferred to the ITM.
  • FIG. 21B schematically illustrates different phenomena relating to solid contaminants, such as dust. Though in the present illustration, the dust is represented as being in addition to air bubbles, this need not be necessarily the case, each such surface or layer defect able to occur independently. As can be seen in the figure, solid contaminants may remain upon the surface. If the settling of contaminants occurs after the outer layer 80 is cured, then such contaminants 92 may even be removed by suitable cleaning of the outer surface. Still, such a phenomenon is undesirable, as it would require additional processing of such an ITM before being able to use it. If such contaminations occur while the layer is still uncured, then the contaminants can be either entrapped on the surface of layer 80, (e.g., contaminant 94, which appears to be “floating”), or can even be submerged within the release layer, (e.g., contaminant 96). As can be readily understood, larger/heavier contaminants may sink more deeply than smaller ones.
  • Unlike methods known in the art, the method disclosed herein includes forming a layer of a fluid first curable material with one side of the layer contacting a carrier contact surface, the layer constituting an incipient release layer. The carrier contact surface functions to protect the incipient release layer, giving the ink transfer layer desired properties, while the carrier acts as a physically robust support structure onto which other layers are added to form the ITM, until the ITM is complete. As a result, many potential sources of defect are avoided. Moreover, the finish of the ink transfer surface is primarily, if not exclusively, determined by the carrier contact surface.
  • FIG. 21C schematically illustrates a section through an outer layer 16 (e.g., a release layer) prepared according to the present method. For comparison with previous drawings, the section is shown without a carrier and in the same orientation as FIGS. 8A and 8B, though the manufacturing is performed in inversed orientation as shown by the arrow. The base 200, which, as shall be detailed hereinafter, is attached to the first outer layer 16 after the layer is at least partially cured, is therefore not equivalent to body 800 already serving as support during the manufacturing process. For the sole sake of illustration, layer 16 is represented as including an important number of bubbles 82, but this need not be the case. However, if present, such bubbles would display a distinct pattern than those previously described. First, as the now uppermost ink transfer surface 14 of layer 16 was previously in contact with a carrier, no protrusions can be observed, the release layer being therefore devoid of phenomena such as previously illustrated by surface protruding bubbles 84. Likewise, craters previously illustrated as cavities 86 are very unlikely, as they would imply using an incompatible curable layer and carrier. As according to the present method, the curable material due to form the outer layer is to suitably wet the carrier, it is believed that substantially no air bubbles can be entrapped between the carrier and the incipient layer formed thereon. Thus, if at all present, such bubbles would be disposed in the bulk of the layer. However, as the manufacturing is performed in inverted orientation as compared to conventional methods, the gradient of bubbles would, for the same reason, be inverted. Thus, and as depicted in FIG. 21C, tiny bubbles would be closer to the outer surface than larger bubbles, which would be closer to the base.
  • The inventive release layer structures of the present invention, produced from addition-cure formulations, may contain substantially no functional groups, or an insubstantial amount (e.g., an insubstantial amount of OH groups), covalently attached within the polymer matrix. Such functional groups may include moieties such as C═O, S═O, and OH, by way of example.
  • Because these release layer structures contain, at most, an insubstantial amount of such functional groups, it would be expected that the release layers thereof would be highly hydrophobic. The inventors have surprisingly found, however, that the release layer surfaces produced by the present method may actually be somewhat hydrophilic, and appreciably more hydrophilic than corresponding release layers, i.e., release layers having the same composition, but manufactured using the conventional curing technique in which the release layer is exposed to air (“standard air curing”). Without wishing to be bound by theory, the inventors believe that the intimate contact between the carrier contact surface and the incipient release layer surface, the somewhat hydrophilic properties of the carrier contact surface are induced in the release layer surface.
  • As discussed hereinabove, ITM release layers having low surface energies may facilitate transfer of the dried ink image to the printing substrate. However, during the ink reception stage, the aqueous ink drops jetted onto such a low-energy, hydrophobic release layer tend to bead after the initial impact, thereby compromising image quality. Higher-energy, less hydrophobic release layers may mitigate this effect, but are detrimental to image transfer quality. The inventors have found that the release layer structures of the present invention typically have release surfaces of characteristically moderated hydrophobicity, as manifested by receding contact angles for distilled water of at most 80°, or at most 70°, typically, at most 60°, or at most 50°, and more typically, 30°-60°, 35°-60°, 30°-55°, 30°-50°, 30°-45°, or 35°-50°. Surprisingly, however, both the ink reception and the transfer of the dry, heated ink image may be of good quality. It must be emphasized that yet lower values of the receding contact angle (and the dynamic contact angle discussed hereinbelow) may be achieved by employing carrier surfaces having higher hydrophilicity (lower contact angles with respect to drops of distilled water), and/or by corona (or similar) treatment.
  • Without wishing to be bound by theory, the inventors believe that the above-described induced surface properties improve the interactions between polar groups (e.g., O—Si—O) on the release layer surface and corresponding polar moieties (e.g., OH groups in the water) in the aqueous liquids (e.g., aqueous inkjet inks) deposited thereon, thereby contributing to the reception of the jetted ink drops. Subsequently, after drying the ink and heating of the ink film to transfer temperatures, these interactions are weakened, enabling complete transfer of the dry or substantially dry ink image. Thus, the performance of the inventive release layer structure—at both the ink reception stage and the ink film transfer stage—is appreciably better than would have been expected for a release layer having moderate hydrophobicity, but devoid of the special surface structure and properties induced by the carrier contact surface.
    • EXAMPLES
  • Reference is now made to the following examples, which together with the above descriptions, illustrate the invention in a non-limiting fashion.
    • List of Materials Used:
  • CAS
    Ingredient Supplier Number Description
    DMS-V35 Resin Gelest 68083-19-2 Vinyl terminated polydimethyl siloxane
    Viscosity 5,000 mPa · s
    MW ~49,500
    Vinyl ~0.018-0.05 mmol/g
    VQM-146 Resin Gelest 68584-83-8 20-25% Vinyl resin in DMS V46
    Viscosity 50,000-60,000 mPa · s
    Vinyl ~0.18-0.23 mmol/g
    Inhibitor
    600 Evonik 204-070-5 Mix of divinylpolydimethylsiloxane and
    Cure Retardant 2-methylbut-3-yn-2-ol
    Viscosity 900 mPa · s
    Vinyl 0.11 mmol/g
    SIP6831.2 Catalyst Gelest 68478-92-2 Platinum divinyltetramethyldisiloxane
    Platinum 2.1-2.4%
    Polymer RV 5000 Evonik Vinyl-functional polydimethyl siloxanes
    (XPRV 5000) Viscosity 3000 mPa · s
    Resin Vinyl 0.4 mmol/g
    Crosslinker
    100 Evonik Polydimethyl siloxanes including SiH
    Crosslinker groups in the polymer chain
    Hydride 7.8 mmol/g
    HMS-301 Gelest 68037-59-2 Poly(dimethylsiloxane-co-methyl-
    Crosslinker hydrosiloxane), trimethylsilyl terminated
    Hydride 4.2 mmol/g
    Silsurf A010-D-UP Siltech 134180-76-0 polyether siloxane copolymer
    Additive
    SilGrip SR 545 Momentive 56275-01-5 Silicone-based resin containing “MQ”
    Functional MQ resin groups
    Viscosity 11 mPa · s
    Aluminized PET Hanita Ltd. NR Aluminized polyester film
    Skyroll SH
    92 SKC Inc. NR Anti-static polyester film
    Skyroll SH 76 SKC Inc. NR Untreated polyester film
  • The carriers used as substrates in the production of the release layer surface include (1) an anti-static polyester film (Examples 1-7); (2) an untreated polyester film i.e., not anti-static (Example 11); and (3) an aluminized polyester film (Example 10).
    • Example 1
  • The ITM release layer of Example 1 had the following composition (wt./wt.):
  • Name Parts
    DMS-V35 70
    XPRV-5000 30
    VQM-146 40
    Inhibitor 600 5
    SIP6831.2 0.1
    Crosslinker 12
    HMS-301
  • The release layer was prepared substantially as described in the present blanket preparation procedure, provided below.
    • Blanket Preparation Procedure (for Release Layers Cured Against a Carrier Surface)
  • All components of the release layer formulation were thoroughly mixed together. The desired thickness of the incipient release layer was coated on a PET sheet, using a rod/knife (other coating methods may also be used), followed by curing for 3 minutes at 150° C. Subsequently, Siloprene LSR 2530 was coated on top of the release layer, using a knife, to achieve a desired thickness. Curing was then performed at 150° C. for 3 minutes. An additional layer of Siloprene LSR 2530 was then coated on top of the previous (cured) silicone layer, and fiberglass fabric was incorporated into this wet, fresh layer such that wet silicone penetrated into the fabric structure. Curing was then performed at 150° C. for 3 minutes. A final layer of Siloprene LSR 2530 was then coated onto the fiberglass fabric and, once again, curing was performed at 150° C. for 3 minutes. The integral blanket structure was then cooled to room temperature and the PET was removed.
    • Example 2
  • The ITM release layer of Example 2 has the following composition:
  • Component Name Parts
    DMS-V35 70
    XPRV-5000 30
    VQM-146 40
    Inhibitor 600 5
    SIP6831.2 0.1
    Crosslinker HMS-301 12
    Silsurf A010-D-UP 5

    The blanket was prepared substantially as described in Example 1.
    • Example 3
  • The ITM release layer of Example 3 has the following composition:
  • Component Name Parts
    DMS-V35 70
    XPRV-5000 30
    VQM-146 40
    Inhibitor 600 5
    SIP6831.2 0.1
    Crosslinker 100 6.5
    Silsurf A010-D-UP 5
  • The blanket was prepared substantially as described in Example 1.
    • Example 4
  • The ITM release layer of Example 4 has the following composition:
  • Component Name Parts
    DMS-V35 100
    VQM-146 40
    Inhibitor 600 3
    SIP6831.2 0.1
    Crosslinker HMS-301 5
  • The blanket was prepared substantially as described in Example 1.
    • Example 5
  • The ITM release layer of Example 5 was prepared from Silopren® LSR 2530 (Momentive Performance Materials Inc., Waterford, NY), a two-component liquid silicone rubber, in which the two components are mixed at a 1:1 ratio. The blanket was prepared substantially as described in Example 1.
    • Example 6
  • The ITM release layer of Example 6 has a composition that is substantially identical to that of Example 4, but includes SR545 (Momentive Performance Materials Inc., Waterford, NY), a commercially available silicone-based resin containing polar groups. The polar groups are of the “MQ” type, where “M” represents Me3SiO and “Q” represents SiO4. The full composition is provided below:
  • Component Name Parts
    DMS-V35 100
    VQM-146 40
    SR545 5
    Inhibitor 600 3
    SIP6831.2 0.1
    Crosslinker HMS-301 5

    The blanket was prepared substantially as described in Example 1.
    • Example 7
  • The ITM release layer of Example 7 has a composition that is substantially identical to that of Example 6, but includes polymer RV 5000, which includes vinyl-functional polydimethyl siloxanes having a high density of vinyl groups, as described hereinabove. The full composition is provided below:
  • Component Name Parts
    DMS-V35 70
    RV 5000 30
    VQM-146 40
    Inhibitor 600 5
    SIP6831.2 0.1
    Crosslinker HMS-301 12
    SR545 5
  • The blanket was prepared substantially as described in Example 1.
    • Comparative Examples 1A-1F
  • ITM release layers were prepared as “corresponding release layers” or “reference release layers” to the compositions of Examples 1-6, such that the corresponding release layers (designated Comparative Examples 1A-1F) had the identical compositions as Examples 1-6, respectively. However, during the curing of the release layer, the release layer surface (or “ink reception surface”) was exposed to air (“standard air curing”), according to a conventional preparation procedure, provided below.
    • Comparative Blanket Preparation Procedure (for Release Layers Exposed to Air During Curing)
  • A first layer of Siloprene LSR 2530 was coated on a PET sheet, using a rod/knife, followed by curing for 3 min at 150° C., to achieve the desired thickness. An additional layer of Siloprene LSR 2530 was then coated on top of the previous (cured) silicone layer, and fiberglass fabric was incorporated into this wet, fresh layer such that wet silicone penetrated into the fabric structure. Siloprene LSR 2530 was then coated on top of the fiberglass fabric, and curing ensued at 150° C. for 3 minutes. Prior to forming the incipient release layer, all components of the release layer formulation were thoroughly mixed together. The release layer was coated on top of cured Siloprene LSR 2530 to achieve the desired thickness, and was subsequently cured at 150° C. for 3 minutes, while the release layer surface was exposed to air.
    • Example 8
  • Contact angles of drops of distilled water on release layer surfaces were measured using a dedicated Dataphysics OCA15 Pro contact angle measuring device (Particle and Surface Sciences Pty. Ltd., Gosford, NSW, Australia). The procedure used for performing the Receding Contact Angle (RCA) and Advancing Contact Angle (ACA) measurements is a conventional technique elaborated by Dr. Roger P. Woodward (“Contact Angle Measurements Using the Drop Shape Method”, inter alia, www.firsttenangstroms.com/pdfdocs/CAPaper.pdf).
  • The results for Examples 1-6 are provided below, along with the results for the release layers produced according to Comparative Examples 1A-1F.
  • In virtually all cases, the release surfaces produced against the carrier surfaces exhibited lower Receding Contact Angles than the identical formulation, cured in air. More typically, the release surfaces produced against the carrier surfaces exhibited Receding Contact Angles that were lower by at least 5°, at least 7°, at least 10°, at least 12°, or at least 15°, or were lower within a range of 5°-30°, 7°-30°, 10°-30°, 5°-25°, 5°-22°, 7°-25°, or 10°-25°.
    • Example 9
  • The release surfaces produced in Examples 1-6 and the respective release surfaces produced in Comparative Examples 1A-1F were aged at 160° C. for 2 hours, to simulate the aging of the release layer under extended operating conditions. Receding Contact Angles were measured, and the results are provided below:
  • Release Surface Release Surface
    VS. PET vs. Air
    RCA RCA Comparative RCA RCA
    Release before after release before after
    formulation aging aging formulation aging aging
    Example 1 75° 80° Comparative 95° 95°
    Example 1A
    Example 2 45° 60° Comparative 65° 65°
    Example 1B
    Example 3 40° 50° Comparative 63° 65°
    Example 1C
    Example 4 65° 62° Comparative 79° 75°
    Example 1D
    Example 5 70° 74° Comparative 80° 80°
    Example 1E
    Example 6 56° 70° Comparative 74° 70°
    Example 1F
  • With regard to the comparative examples, it is evident that the receding contact angle is substantially maintained after performing the aging process. With regard to inventive Examples 1-6, however, it is evident that the receding contact angle increases, typically by 4°-15°, after performing the aging process. Without wishing to be bound by theory, the inventors believe that the increase in contact angle in the inventive release layer structures may be attributed to a loss in hydrophilic behavior (or increased hydrophobic behavior) due to some change in the position of the polar groups (e.g., Si—O—Si) at the release layer surface.
    • Example 10
  • A blanket including a release layer of the composition of Example 2 was prepared substantially as described in Example 1, but against an aluminized PET carrier surface.
    • Example 11
  • A release layer having the release layer composition of Example 2 was prepared substantially as described in Example 1, but against a commercially available PET carrier surface that was not subjected to an anti-static pre-treatment.
    • Example 12
  • The release layers produced in Examples 2, 10, and 11, in accordance with the present invention, were subjected to contact angle measurements, to determine both the advancing contact angle and the receding contact angle. The results are provided below:
  • Release formulation Carrier film RCA vs. Carrier
    Example 10 Aluminized PET 62°
    Example 11 PET without anti-static 62°
    treatment
    Example 2 PET with anti-static 45°
    treatment

    Examples 10 and 11 exhibited receding contact angles that were about 30° less than the receding contact angle of the same composition cured with the release layer exposed to air. The release layer surface of Example 2, prepared against an anti-static PET carrier surface, displayed a receding contact angles that was about 50° less than the receding contact angle of the same composition prepared while exposed to air.
    • Example 13
  • The carrier surfaces utilized in Examples 2, 10, and 11 were subjected to contact angle measurements, to determine both the advancing contact angle and the receding contact angle. The results are provided below:
  • CA of carrier
    Carrier film ACA RCA
    Aluminized PET
    80° 40°
    PET without antistatic 70° 40°
    treatment
    PET with antistatic 40° 20°
    treatment

    It may be seen from the receding contact angles obtained that the three carrier surfaces exhibit hydrophilic behavior, and that the PET subjected to anti-static treatment exhibits the greatest degree of hydrophilic behavior (20° RCA vs. 40° RCA).
  • Significantly, the hydrophilic behavior of the carrier surfaces has been at least partially induced in the respective release surfaces: the formulation cured while exposed to air has an RCA of 65°; the same formulation, prepared against an antistatic PET surface, has an RCA of 45°; the anti-static PET carrier used displays an RCA of 20°. Thus, the inventive release layer structure has a release surface whose hydrophilicity/hydrophobicity properties lie in between the properties of the same formulation, cured in air, and the carrier surface itself.
    • Example 14
  • Release layer surface energies were calculated for ink reception surfaces of the following Examples: Example 1A, cured under exposure to air; Example 1, cured against an anti-static PET surface; and Example 1, cured against an anti-static PET surface and then subjected to the standard aging procedure at 160° C., for 2 hours. The three Examples have the identical chemical formulation.
  • For each of these examples, the total surface energy was calculated using the classic “harmonic mean” method (also known as the Owens-Wendt Surface Energy Model, see, by way of example, KRUSS Technical Note TN306e). The results are provided below:
  • Total Surface
    Release formulation Energy J/m2
    Example 1A -- Air Cured 20.9
    Example 1 -- Aged 22.6
    Example 1 26.1
  • In Example 1A, cured under exposure to air, the release layer surface is extremely hydrophobic, and the total surface energy of the surface is low, 20.9 J/m2, as expected. This is fairly close to the literature value for surface energy, for polydimethylsiloxane (PDMS). Significantly, Example 1, which was cured against an anti-static PET surface, exhibited a total surface energy of about 26 J/m2, which is moderately less hydrophobic than the “air-cured” sample. After this formulation was subjected to the standard aging procedure, the total surface energy decreased from about 26 J/m2 to under 23 J/m2. This result would appear to corroborate the RCA results obtained for the various aged and un-aged materials of this exemplary formulation.
    • Example 15
  • Release layer surface energies were calculated for ink reception surfaces of the following Examples: Example 2A, cured under exposure to air; Example 2, cured against an anti-static PET surface; and Example 2, cured against an anti-static PET surface and then subjected to the standard aging procedure at 160° C., for 2 hours. The three Examples have the identical chemical formulation.
  • As in Example 14, the total surface energy was calculated using the classic “harmonic mean” method. The results are provided below:
  • Total Surface
    Release formulation Energy (J/m2)
    Example 2A -- Air Cured 34.6
    Example 2 -- Aged 39.9
    Example 2 49.1
  • In Example 2A, cured under exposure to air, the release layer surface is less hydrophobic than the release layer of Example 1A, the total surface energy of the surface being about 35 J/m2. Example 2, cured against an anti-static PET surface, exhibited a total surface energy of about 49 J/m2, which is significantly less hydrophobic than the “air-cured” sample. After this formulation was subjected to the standard aging procedure, the total surface energy decreased from about 49 J/m2 to about 40 J/m2. This result would appear to corroborate the RCA results obtained for the various aged and un-aged materials of this exemplary formulation.
    • Example 16
  • The temperature on the blanket surface is maintained at 75° C. The image (typically a color gradient of 10-100%) is printed at a speed of 1.7 m/sec on the blanket, at a resolution of 1200 dpi. An uncoated paper (A4 Xerox Premium Copier Paper, 80 gsm) is set between the pressure roller and the blanket and the roller is pressed onto blanket, while the pressure is set to 3 bar. The roller moves on the paper, applying pressure on the contact line between blanket and paper and promoting the transfer process. In some cases, incomplete transfer may be observed, with an ink residue remaining on the blanket surface. In order to evaluate the extent of that ink residue, glossy paper (A4 Burgo glossy paper 130 gsm) is applied on the blanket similarly to the uncoated paper and the transfer process is again performed. Any ink that remained on blanket and was not transferred to the uncoated paper will be transferred to the glossy paper. Thus, the glossy paper may be evaluated for ink residue, according to the following scale (% of image surface area):
      • A—no visible residue
      • B—1-5% visible residue
      • C—more than 5% visible residue
        Results of the evaluation are provided below:
  • Release formulation Transfer grade
    Example 4 B
    Example 1 B
    Example 2 A
    Example 3 A
    Example 6 C
    • Example 17
  • Example 16 was repeated for the release surfaces of Examples 2 and 3, but at a printing speed of 3.4 msec on the blanket. Both release surfaces retained a transfer grade of A.
    • Example 18
  • The ITM release layer compositions of Examples 2 and 3 were cured against a PET substrate according to the procedure provided in Example 1. The ITM release layer compositions of Examples 2 and 3 were cured against air, according to the procedure provided in Comparative Examples 1B and 1C. The samples were then subjected to dynamic contact angle (DCA) measurements at 10 seconds and subsequently at 70 seconds, according to the following procedure:
  • The drop is placed onto a smooth PTFE film surface with as little drop falling as possible, so that kinetic energy does not spread the drop. A pendant drop is then formed. Subsequently, the specimen is raised until it touches the bottom of the drop. If the drop is large enough, the adhesion to the surface will pull it off the tip of the needle. The needle tip is positioned above the surface at such a height that the growing pendant drop will touch the surface and detach before it falls free due to its own weight.
  • The dynamic contact angle is then measured at 10 seconds and at 70 seconds. The results are provided below:
  • Dynamic contact angle
    Cured against PET Cured against Air
    Example after 10 sec after 70 sec after 10 sec after 70 sec
    Ex
    2 105° 97° 114° 103°
    Ex 3  87° 70° 113°  94°
  • It is observed that the initial measurement of the dynamic contact angle, at 10 seconds, provides a strong indication of the hydrophilicity of the release layer surface. The subsequent measurement at 70 seconds provides an indication of the extent to which any liquid (such as a polyether glycol functionalized polydimethyl siloxane) disposed within the release layer has been incorporated into the drop. Such incorporation may further reduce the measured DCA.
  • Thus, the samples cured against PET exhibit substantially lower (more hydrophilic) initial DCA measurements (105°, 87°) relative to the hydrophilic initial DCA measurements (114°, 113°) of the respective samples cured against air. In addition to displayed hydrophilicity, the samples cured against PET exhibited a drop in DCA of 8 to 17° between the first and second measurements.
  • As used herein in the specification and in the claims section that follows, the term “receding contact angle” or “RCA”, refers to a receding contact angle as measured using a Dataphysics OCA15 Pro Contact Angle measuring device, or a comparable Video-Based Optical Contact Angle Measuring System, using the above-described Drop Shape Method, at ambient temperatures. The analogous “advancing contact angle”, or “ACA”, refers to an advancing contact angle measured substantially in the same fashion.
  • As used herein in the specification and in the claims section that follows, the term “dynamic contact angle” or “DCA”, refers to a dynamic contact angle as measured using a Dataphysics OCA15 Pro Contact Angle measuring device, or a comparable Video-Based Optical Contact Angle Measuring System, using the method elaborated by Dr. Roger P. Woodward in the above-referenced “Contact Angle Measurements Using the Drop Shape Method”, at ambient temperatures, and as elaborated hereinabove in the Examples Section.
  • As used herein in the specification and in the claims section that follows, the term “standard aging procedure” refers to an accelerated aging protocol performed on each tested release layer at 160° C., for 2 hours, in a standard convection oven.
  • As used herein in the specification and in the claims section that follows, the term “standard air curing” refers to a conventional curing process for curing the release layer, described with respect to Comparative Examples 1A-1F, in which, during the curing of the release layer, the release layer surface (or “ink reception surface”) is exposed to air.
  • As used herein in the specification and in the claims section that follows, the term “bulk hydrophobicity” is characterized by a receding contact angle of a droplet of distilled water disposed on an inner surface of the release layer, the inner surface formed by exposing an area of the cured silicone material within the release layer.
  • As used herein in the specification and in the claims section that follows, the term “mainly includes”, with respect to a component within a formulation, refers to a weight content of at least 50%.
  • As opposed to small molecules, which may have a unique molecular weight readily derived from their chemical formula, generally provided in grams/mole, polymers and other macromolecules typically exist as a diverse population of distinct molecules, which are therefore characterized by an average molecular weight often expressed in Daltons. The molecular weight or average molecular weight of materials are generally provided by the manufacturer or supplier. but can be independently determined by known analytical methods, including for instance gel permeation chromatography, high pressure liquid chromatography (HPLC) or matrix-assisted laser desorption/ionization time-of-flight mass spectroscopy MALDI-TOF MS. Average molecular weight (D50) may be based on the number of particles in the population (“DN50”) or may be based on the volume of particles (Dv50). These measurements may be obtained by various known methods (e.g., DLS, microscopy).
    • Examples C1-C6
  • Exemplary compositions C1-C6 of the aqueous treatment formulation used in conjunction with the present invention are provided in the Table hereinbelow.
    • Example C7
  • Composition C7 of the aqueous treatment formulation used in conjunction with the present invention is provided in the Table hereinbelow:
  • Solution
    Concentration of
    Formulation starting component in
    Concentration water prior to adding
    in % wt/wt in to treatment
    final formulation in
    formulation Components wt/wt %
    C-7 3.75 Polyvinyl alcohol PVA6-88 15.00
    0.25 High MW PEI Loxanol P 25.00
    6.50 Solid water absorbing sugar 100.00
    agent
    6.00 Non-ionic surfactant tween20 100.00
    0.20 Microbicide Mergal ® K12N 100.00
    water 100.0

    Figure US20230331016A1-20231019-P00999
  • Figure US20230331016A1-20231019-P00899
    Figure US20230331016A1-20231019-P00899
    Figure US20230331016A1-20231019-P00899
    Figure US20230331016A1-20231019-P00899
     C1
    Figure US20230331016A1-20231019-P00899
     C2
    Figure US20230331016A1-20231019-P00899
     C3
    Figure US20230331016A1-20231019-P00899
     C4
    Figure US20230331016A1-20231019-P00899
     C5
    Figure US20230331016A1-20231019-P00899
     C6
    Figure US20230331016A1-20231019-P00899
    Figure US20230331016A1-20231019-P00899
    Figure US20230331016A1-20231019-P00899
     PVA
    Figure US20230331016A1-20231019-P00899
    		 Polyvinyl Alcohol
    Figure US20230331016A1-20231019-P00899
    Figure US20230331016A1-20231019-P00899
    Figure US20230331016A1-20231019-P00899
    Figure US20230331016A1-20231019-P00899
    Figure US20230331016A1-20231019-P00899
    Figure US20230331016A1-20231019-P00899
    Figure US20230331016A1-20231019-P00899
    Figure US20230331016A1-20231019-P00899
    H2O by BYK LP X
    Figure US20230331016A1-20231019-P00899
     silicone surfactant
    Figure US20230331016A1-20231019-P00899
    Figure US20230331016A1-20231019-P00899
    Figure US20230331016A1-20231019-P00899
    Figure US20230331016A1-20231019-P00899
    Figure US20230331016A1-20231019-P00899
    Figure US20230331016A1-20231019-P00899
    Figure US20230331016A1-20231019-P00899
    balanced
    Figure US20230331016A1-20231019-P00899
    Figure US20230331016A1-20231019-P00899
     siloxane
    Figure US20230331016A1-20231019-P00899
     wetting
    agent
    Figure US20230331016A1-20231019-P00899
    TWEEN80
    Figure US20230331016A1-20231019-P00899
     Non-ionic Surfactant
    Figure US20230331016A1-20231019-P00899
    Figure US20230331016A1-20231019-P00899
    Figure US20230331016A1-20231019-P00899
    Figure US20230331016A1-20231019-P00899
    Figure US20230331016A1-20231019-P00899
    Figure US20230331016A1-20231019-P00899
    Figure US20230331016A1-20231019-P00899
    TWEEN20
    Figure US20230331016A1-20231019-P00899
     Non
    Figure US20230331016A1-20231019-P00899
    ionic Surfactant
    Figure US20230331016A1-20231019-P00899
    Figure US20230331016A1-20231019-P00899
    Figure US20230331016A1-20231019-P00899
    Figure US20230331016A1-20231019-P00899
    Figure US20230331016A1-20231019-P00899
    Figure US20230331016A1-20231019-P00899
    Figure US20230331016A1-20231019-P00899
    LOXANOL P
    Figure US20230331016A1-20231019-P00899
     High MW PEI
    Figure US20230331016A1-20231019-P00899
    Figure US20230331016A1-20231019-P00899
    Figure US20230331016A1-20231019-P00899
    Figure US20230331016A1-20231019-P00899
    Figure US20230331016A1-20231019-P00899
    Figure US20230331016A1-20231019-P00899
    Figure US20230331016A1-20231019-P00899
    SUCROSE
    Figure US20230331016A1-20231019-P00899
     Solid water
    Figure US20230331016A1-20231019-P00899
    Figure US20230331016A1-20231019-P00899
    Figure US20230331016A1-20231019-P00899
    Figure US20230331016A1-20231019-P00899
    Figure US20230331016A1-20231019-P00899
    Figure US20230331016A1-20231019-P00899
    Figure US20230331016A1-20231019-P00899
    Figure US20230331016A1-20231019-P00899
    		 absorbing agent
    Figure US20230331016A1-20231019-P00899
    Figure US20230331016A1-20231019-P00899
    Figure US20230331016A1-20231019-P00899
    Figure US20230331016A1-20231019-P00899
    Figure US20230331016A1-20231019-P00899
    Figure US20230331016A1-20231019-P00899
    Figure US20230331016A1-20231019-P00899
    Figure US20230331016A1-20231019-P00899
    		 silicone surfactant
    Figure US20230331016A1-20231019-P00899
    Figure US20230331016A1-20231019-P00899
    Figure US20230331016A1-20231019-P00899
    Figure US20230331016A1-20231019-P00899
    Figure US20230331016A1-20231019-P00899
    Figure US20230331016A1-20231019-P00899
    Figure US20230331016A1-20231019-P00899
    Figure US20230331016A1-20231019-P00899
    Figure US20230331016A1-20231019-P00899
     siloxane
    Figure US20230331016A1-20231019-P00899
    Figure US20230331016A1-20231019-P00899
    Figure US20230331016A1-20231019-P00899
    Figure US20230331016A1-20231019-P00899
    Figure US20230331016A1-20231019-P00899
    Figure US20230331016A1-20231019-P00899
    Figure US20230331016A1-20231019-P00899
    copolymer
    Figure US20230331016A1-20231019-P00899
     wetting
    Figure US20230331016A1-20231019-P00899
    Figure US20230331016A1-20231019-P00899
    Figure US20230331016A1-20231019-P00899
    Figure US20230331016A1-20231019-P00899
    Figure US20230331016A1-20231019-P00899
    Figure US20230331016A1-20231019-P00899
    Figure US20230331016A1-20231019-P00899
    agent
    Figure US20230331016A1-20231019-P00899
    Figure US20230331016A1-20231019-P00899
    Figure US20230331016A1-20231019-P00899
    Figure US20230331016A1-20231019-P00899
    Figure US20230331016A1-20231019-P00899
    Figure US20230331016A1-20231019-P00899
    Figure US20230331016A1-20231019-P00899
    Figure US20230331016A1-20231019-P00899
    Figure US20230331016A1-20231019-P00899
    HARTAINE
    Figure US20230331016A1-20231019-P00899
    Figure US20230331016A1-20231019-P00899
    Figure US20230331016A1-20231019-P00899
    Figure US20230331016A1-20231019-P00899
    Figure US20230331016A1-20231019-P00899
    Figure US20230331016A1-20231019-P00899
    Figure US20230331016A1-20231019-P00899
    Figure US20230331016A1-20231019-P00899
    ABC Betaine
    Figure US20230331016A1-20231019-P00899
    Figure US20230331016A1-20231019-P00899
    Figure US20230331016A1-20231019-P00899
    Figure US20230331016A1-20231019-P00899
    Figure US20230331016A1-20231019-P00899
    Figure US20230331016A1-20231019-P00899
    Figure US20230331016A1-20231019-P00899
    BYK
    Figure US20230331016A1-20231019-P00899
    Figure US20230331016A1-20231019-P00899
     silicone surfactant
    Figure US20230331016A1-20231019-P00899
    Figure US20230331016A1-20231019-P00899
    Figure US20230331016A1-20231019-P00899
    Figure US20230331016A1-20231019-P00899
    Figure US20230331016A1-20231019-P00899
    Figure US20230331016A1-20231019-P00899
    Figure US20230331016A1-20231019-P00899
    Figure US20230331016A1-20231019-P00899
     modified
    Figure US20230331016A1-20231019-P00899
    Figure US20230331016A1-20231019-P00899
    Figure US20230331016A1-20231019-P00899
    Figure US20230331016A1-20231019-P00899
    Figure US20230331016A1-20231019-P00899
    Figure US20230331016A1-20231019-P00899
    Figure US20230331016A1-20231019-P00899
    siloxane
    Figure US20230331016A1-20231019-P00899
    Figure US20230331016A1-20231019-P00899
    Figure US20230331016A1-20231019-P00899
    Figure US20230331016A1-20231019-P00899
    Figure US20230331016A1-20231019-P00899
    Figure US20230331016A1-20231019-P00899
    Figure US20230331016A1-20231019-P00899
    BYKETOL PC
    Figure US20230331016A1-20231019-P00899
    Figure US20230331016A1-20231019-P00899
    Figure US20230331016A1-20231019-P00899
    Figure US20230331016A1-20231019-P00899
    Figure US20230331016A1-20231019-P00899
    Figure US20230331016A1-20231019-P00899
    Figure US20230331016A1-20231019-P00899
    Figure US20230331016A1-20231019-P00899
    Total solids
    Figure US20230331016A1-20231019-P00899
    Figure US20230331016A1-20231019-P00899
    Figure US20230331016A1-20231019-P00899
    Figure US20230331016A1-20231019-P00899
    Figure US20230331016A1-20231019-P00899
    Figure US20230331016A1-20231019-P00899
    Figure US20230331016A1-20231019-P00899
    Figure US20230331016A1-20231019-P00899
    Figure US20230331016A1-20231019-P00899
    %
    Figure US20230331016A1-20231019-P00899
    Figure US20230331016A1-20231019-P00899
    Figure US20230331016A1-20231019-P00899
    Figure US20230331016A1-20231019-P00899
    Figure US20230331016A1-20231019-P00899
    Figure US20230331016A1-20231019-P00899
    Figure US20230331016A1-20231019-P00899
    Figure US20230331016A1-20231019-P00899
    Viscosity
    Figure US20230331016A1-20231019-P00899
    Figure US20230331016A1-20231019-P00899
    Figure US20230331016A1-20231019-P00899
    Figure US20230331016A1-20231019-P00899
    Figure US20230331016A1-20231019-P00899
    Figure US20230331016A1-20231019-P00899
    Figure US20230331016A1-20231019-P00899
    Figure US20230331016A1-20231019-P00899
    Figure US20230331016A1-20231019-P00899
    [cP]
    Figure US20230331016A1-20231019-P00899
    Figure US20230331016A1-20231019-P00899
    Figure US20230331016A1-20231019-P00899
    Figure US20230331016A1-20231019-P00899
    Figure US20230331016A1-20231019-P00899
    Figure US20230331016A1-20231019-P00899
    Figure US20230331016A1-20231019-P00899
    Surface
    Figure US20230331016A1-20231019-P00899
    Figure US20230331016A1-20231019-P00899
    Figure US20230331016A1-20231019-P00899
    Figure US20230331016A1-20231019-P00899
    Figure US20230331016A1-20231019-P00899
    Figure US20230331016A1-20231019-P00899
    Figure US20230331016A1-20231019-P00899
    Figure US20230331016A1-20231019-P00899
    Figure US20230331016A1-20231019-P00899
    Tension
    Figure US20230331016A1-20231019-P00899
    Figure US20230331016A1-20231019-P00899
    Figure US20230331016A1-20231019-P00899
    Figure US20230331016A1-20231019-P00899
    Figure US20230331016A1-20231019-P00899
    Figure US20230331016A1-20231019-P00899
    Figure US20230331016A1-20231019-P00899
    [mN/m]
    Figure US20230331016A1-20231019-P00899
    Figure US20230331016A1-20231019-P00899
    Figure US20230331016A1-20231019-P00899
    Figure US20230331016A1-20231019-P00899
    Figure US20230331016A1-20231019-P00899
    Figure US20230331016A1-20231019-P00899
    Figure US20230331016A1-20231019-P00899
    Evaporation
    Figure US20230331016A1-20231019-P00899
    Figure US20230331016A1-20231019-P00899
    Figure US20230331016A1-20231019-P00899
    Figure US20230331016A1-20231019-P00899
    Figure US20230331016A1-20231019-P00899
    Figure US20230331016A1-20231019-P00899
    Figure US20230331016A1-20231019-P00899
    Figure US20230331016A1-20231019-P00899
    Figure US20230331016A1-20231019-P00899
    Figure US20230331016A1-20231019-P00899
    Figure US20230331016A1-20231019-P00899
    Figure US20230331016A1-20231019-P00899
    Figure US20230331016A1-20231019-P00899
    Figure US20230331016A1-20231019-P00899
    Figure US20230331016A1-20231019-P00899
    Figure US20230331016A1-20231019-P00899
    Figure US20230331016A1-20231019-P00899
    Figure US20230331016A1-20231019-P00899
    Figure US20230331016A1-20231019-P00899
    indicates data missing or illegible when filed
    • Examples X1-X3
  • Additional aqueous treatment formulations, are provided in Examples X1-X3.
  • conc components
    X1 3.75% PVA6-88
    1.50% byk lpx 23289
    0.25% Loxanol P
    6.50% sugar
    1.10% tego 280
    12.00% Tergitol 15-5-9
    water
    % solids: 25.10%
  • conc components
    X2 3.75% PVA6-88
    1.50% byk lpx 23289
    0.25% Loxanol P
    6.50% sugar
    1.10% tego 280
    12.00% Triton X-35
    water
    % solids: 25.10%
  • conc components
    X3 3.75% PVA6-88
    1.50% byk lpx 23289
    0.25% Loxanol P
    6.50% sugar
    1.10% tego 280
    6.00% Tween 80
    6.00% SPAN 80
    water
    % solids: 25.10%
    • Preparation of Pigments
  • Pigments used in the examples described below are generally supplied with initial particle size of a few micrometers. Such pigments were ground to submicron range in presence of the dispersing agent, the two materials being fed to the milling device (bead mill) as an aqueous mixture. The progress of milling was controlled on the basis of particle size measurements (for example, a Malvern or Nanosizer instrument). The milling was stopped when the average particle size (dv50) reached 70 to 100 nm.
    • Exemplary Ink Composition
  • In the present example, the preparation of an ink composition is described: Heliogen® Blue D7079 was milled with Disperbyk® 190, as described, and the materials were mixed in the following proportion:
  •
    Heliogen ® Blue D7079 30 g
    Disperbyk ® 190 (40%) 30 g
    Water 140 g
    Total 200 g
  • The milled concentrate, now having a Dv50 of less than 100 nm, typically between 70 and 100 nm, and was further diluted with 50 g water and extracted from the milling device at ca. 12 wt. % pigment concentration. The millbase concentrate was further processed as below described for the preparation of an ink composition.
  • In a first stage, 2.4 g of sodium dodecanoate were added to 200 g of the millbase concentrate to yield a millbase. The mixture was stirred to homogeneity (5′ magnetic stirrer at 50 rpm) and incubated at 60° C. for 1 day. The mixture was then left to cool down to ambient temperature.
  • In a second stage, ink ingredients were added to the millbase as follows:
  •
    Millbase Concentrate (from stage 1) 202.4 g
    Joncryl ® 538 (46.5%) 154.8 g
    BYK ® 349 5 g
    BYK ® 333 2 g
    Propylene Glycol 240 g
    Water 595.8 g
    Total 1200 g
  • The mixture was stirred for 30 minutes at ambient temperature, resulting in an ink-jettable ink composition having a viscosity of less than 10 cP.
    • Dot Gain
  • Dot gain refers to the increase in dot size over the initial, spherical drop diameter. The dot gain is determined by the ratio of the final dot diameter to the initial drop diameter. It is highly desirable to find a way to increase dot size without having to increase drop volume.
  • Utilizing the inventive technologies disclosed herein, the inventors attained dot gains of at least 1.3, 1.4, or 1.5, and more typically, at least 1.6, 1.7, or at least 1.8, or within a range of 1.5 to 2.1, 1.5 to 2.1, 1.6 to 2.0, or 1.7 to 2.0.
  • For example, using drops having a volume of 6.3 picoliters (D=22.9 micrometers), and using various aqueous treatment formulations of the present invention, the dried ink dots obtained were within a diameter range of 40 to 45 micrometers.
  • As used herein in the specification and in the claims section that follows, the terms “hydrophobicity” and “hydrophilicity” and the like, may be used in a relative sense, and not necessarily in an absolute sense.
  • As used herein in the specification and in the claims section that follows, the term “functional group” refers to a group or moiety attached to the polymer structure of the release layer and having a higher polarity than the O—Si—O group of conventional addition-cured silicones. Various examples are provided herein. The inventors observe that pure addition cure polydimethyl siloxane polymer contains O—Si—O, SiO4, Si—CH3 and C—C groups, and that most other functional groups will have a higher dipole, such that they may be considered “functional”. It will be appreciated by those of skill in the art that such functional groups, may have a tendency or strong tendency to react with components typically present in aqueous inks utilized in indirect inkjet printing, at process temperatures of up to 120° C.
  • Unless otherwise defined, all technical and scientific terms used herein have the same meaning as commonly understood by one of ordinary skill in the art to which the invention pertains. In case of conflict, the specification, including definitions, will take precedence.
  • In the description and claims of the present disclosure, each of the verbs, “comprise” “include” and “have”, and conjugates thereof, are used to indicate that the object or objects of the verb are not necessarily a complete listing of members, components, elements, steps or parts of the subject or subjects of the verb. These terms encompass the terms “consisting of” and “consisting essentially of”.
  • As used herein, the singular form “a”, “an” and “the” include plural references and mean “at least one” or “one or more” unless the context clearly dictates otherwise.
  • Unless otherwise stated, the use of the expression “and/or” between the last two members of a list of options for selection indicates that a selection of one or more of the listed options is appropriate and may be made.
  • As used herein in the specification and in the claims section that follows, the term “%” refers to percent by weight, unless specifically indicated otherwise. For examples, the % in the context of formulation components are wt % of the final formulation.
  • Similarly, the term “ratio”, as used herein in the specification and in the claims section that follows, refers to a weight ratio, unless specifically indicated otherwise.
  • In the disclosure, unless otherwise stated, adjectives such as “substantially” and “about” that modify a condition or relationship characteristic of a feature or features of an embodiment of the present technology, are to be understood to mean that the condition or characteristic is defined to within tolerances that are acceptable for operation of the embodiment for an application for which it is intended.
  • While this disclosure has been described in terms of certain embodiments and generally associated methods, alterations and permutations of the embodiments and methods will be apparent to those skilled in the art. The present disclosure is to be understood as not limited by the specific embodiments described herein, but only by the scope of the appended claims.

Claims (29)

1. An aqueous treatment formulation comprising:
a. at least 1.5%, by weight, of at least one water soluble polymer having a solubility in water of at least 5% at 25° C.;
b. at least 5%, by weight, of a first non-ionic surfactant having a solubility in water of at least 7%, at 25° C.; and
c. a second non-ionic, silicone-containing surfactant having a solubility in water of at least 1%, at 25° C.;
d. a carrier liquid containing water, said water making up at least 55%, by weight of the aqueous treatment formulation;
said aqueous treatment formulation optionally including at least one of or both of:
v. a water absorbing agent; and vi. polyethyleneimine (PEI),
wherein said aqueous treatment formulation has all of the following properties:
i. a static surface tension within a range of 20 and 40 mN/m at 25° C.;
ii. a 25° C. dynamic viscosity that is at least 10 cP; and
iii. a 60° C. evaporation load of at most 7.5:1, by weight.
2. The aqueous treatment formulation of claim 1 wherein said water soluble polymer is a polyvinyl alcohol and the aqueous treatment formulation additionally comprises said polyethyleneimine (PEI) having an average molecular weight of 200,000 to 2,000,000 g/mol.
3. The aqueous treatment formulation of claim 1, wherein a concentration of said first non-ionic surfactant within said aqueous treatment formulation, by weight, is within the range of 6.5-18%.
4. The aqueous treatment formulation of claim 1, wherein said second, non-ionic silicone-containing surfactant includes a polysiloxane-polyoxyalkylene copolymer, and wherein a concentration of said polysiloxane-polyoxyalkylene copolymer is at least 0.3%, at least 0.5%, at least 0.75%, or at least 1.0%, by weight, and further optionally, at most 5%, at most 4%, at most 3%, at most 2.5%, at most 2%, or at most 1.75%, by weight.
5. The aqueous treatment formulation of claim 1, wherein said aqueous treatment formulation further includes said water absorbing agent.
6-7. (canceled)
8. The aqueous treatment formulation of any one of claim 1, wherein a concentration of quaternary ammonium salt within said aqueous treatment formulation, by weight, is at most 0.8%.
9. The method of claim 1, wherein said water soluble polymer is selected from at least one of the group consisting of polyvinyl alcohol, water-soluble cellulose, polyvinylpyrrolidone (PVP), polyethylene oxide, and a water-soluble acrylate.
10. (canceled)
11. The method of claim 1, wherein a concentration of polyethyleneimine or said polyethyleneimine within said aqueous treatment formulation, by weight, is within a range of 0.1 to 1%, and wherein an average molecular weight of said polyethyleneimine is 200,000 to 3,000,000 g/mol.
12. (canceled)
13. The aqueous treatment formulation of claim 1, wherein said first non-ionic surfactant is, mainly includes, or includes a polyethoxylated sorbitan ester.
14-15. (canceled)
16. The aqueous treatment formulation of claim 13, wherein the HLB number of said first non-ionic surfactant is within a range of 14.5 to 20.
17-18. (canceled)
19. The aqueous treatment formulation of claim 1, wherein a concentration of said water soluble polymer is within a range of 2.0 to 8%.
20-22. (canceled)
23. The aqueous treatment formulation of claim 1, wherein said solubility in water of said at least one water soluble polymer, at 25° C., is at least 10%, by weight.
24. The aqueous treatment formulation of claim 1, wherein said solubility in water of said first non-ionic surfactant, at 25° C., is at least 12%, by weight.
25. The aqueous treatment formulation of claim 1, wherein said water absorbing agent is selected whereby, when said aqueous treatment solution is evaporated to form a solid film, said water absorbing agent acts as a water absorber that absorbs water from said aqueous treatment solution.
26. (canceled)
27. The aqueous treatment formulation of claim 1, wherein a concentration of said second non-ionic surfactant within said aqueous treatment formulation, by weight, is within a range of 1-18%.
28-34. (canceled)
35. method of claim 1, wherein functional groups within said silicone based release layer surface of the provided ITM make up at most 3%, by weight, of said addition-cured silicone material.
36-53. (canceled)
54. An article of manufacture comprising:
(A) a quantity of the aqueous treatment formulation of claim 1; and
(B) an intermediate transfer member (ITM) comprising a silicone-based release layer surface that is sufficiently hydrophilic to satisfy at least one of the following properties: (i) a receding contact angle of a drop of distilled water deposited on the silicone-based release layer surface is at most 60°; and (ii) a 10-second dynamic contact angle (DCA) of a drop of distilled water deposited on the silicone-based release layer surface is at most 108°
55. The article of manufacture of claim 54 wherein functional groups within said silicone based release layer surface of the provided ITM make up at most 3%, by weight, of said addition-cured silicone material.
56. A method comprising:
(A) providing a quantity of the aqueous treatment formulation of claim 1; and
(B) applying the quantity of the aqueous treatment formulation to a silicone-based release layer surface of an intermediate transfer member (ITM), said silicone-based release layer surface being, before said applying, sufficiently hydrophilic to satisfy at least one of the following properties: (i) a receding contact angle of a drop of distilled water deposited on the silicone-based release layer surface is at most 60′; and (ii) a 10-second dynamic contact angle (DCA) of a drop of distilled water deposited on the silicone-based release layer surface is at most 108°
57. The method of claim 56 wherein functional groups within said silicone based release layer surface of the provided ITM make up at most 3%, by weight, of said addition-cured silicone material.
US18/134,190 2017-12-07 2023-04-13 Digital printing process and method Abandoned US20230331016A1 (en)

Priority Applications (1)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
US18/134,190 US20230331016A1 (en) 2017-12-07 2023-04-13 Digital printing process and method

Applications Claiming Priority (5)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
US201762596050P 2017-12-07 2017-12-07
US201762595594P 2017-12-07 2017-12-07
PCT/IB2018/059761 WO2019111223A1 (en) 2017-12-07 2018-12-07 Digital printing process and method
US202016767640A 2020-05-28 2020-05-28
US18/134,190 US20230331016A1 (en) 2017-12-07 2023-04-13 Digital printing process and method

Related Parent Applications (2)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/IB2018/059761 Continuation WO2019111223A1 (en) 2017-12-07 2018-12-07 Digital printing process and method
US16/767,640 Continuation US11679615B2 (en) 2017-12-07 2018-12-07 Digital printing process and method

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
US20230331016A1 true US20230331016A1 (en) 2023-10-19

Family

ID=66751392

Family Applications (2)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
US16/767,640 Active 2040-01-30 US11679615B2 (en) 2017-12-07 2018-12-07 Digital printing process and method
US18/134,190 Abandoned US20230331016A1 (en) 2017-12-07 2023-04-13 Digital printing process and method

Family Applications Before (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
US16/767,640 Active 2040-01-30 US11679615B2 (en) 2017-12-07 2018-12-07 Digital printing process and method

Country Status (3)

Country Link
US (2) US11679615B2 (en)
JP (2) JP7273038B2 (en)
WO (1) WO2019111223A1 (en)

Cited By (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US12358277B2 (en) 2019-03-31 2025-07-15 Landa Corporation Ltd. Systems and methods for preventing or minimizing printing defects in printing processes

Families Citing this family (26)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US11809100B2 (en) 2012-03-05 2023-11-07 Landa Corporation Ltd. Intermediate transfer members for use with indirect printing systems and protonatable intermediate transfer members for use with indirect printing systems
US12053978B2 (en) 2012-03-05 2024-08-06 Landa Corporation Ltd. Digital printing system
US9498946B2 (en) 2012-03-05 2016-11-22 Landa Corporation Ltd. Apparatus and method for control or monitoring of a printing system
US9643403B2 (en) 2012-03-05 2017-05-09 Landa Corporation Ltd. Printing system
US11104123B2 (en) 2012-03-05 2021-08-31 Landa Corporation Ltd. Digital printing system
CN104271356B (en) 2012-03-05 2016-10-19 兰达公司 Digital printing process
MX381618B (en) 2012-03-05 2025-03-12 Landa Corp Ltd INK FILM STRUCTURES
GB2536489B (en) 2015-03-20 2018-08-29 Landa Corporation Ltd Indirect printing system
US11806997B2 (en) 2015-04-14 2023-11-07 Landa Corporation Ltd. Indirect printing system and related apparatus
GB201609463D0 (en) 2016-05-30 2016-07-13 Landa Labs 2012 Ltd Method of manufacturing a multi-layer article
CN114148098B (en) 2016-05-30 2025-03-07 兰达公司 Digital printing methods
CN112428691B (en) 2016-05-30 2022-09-27 兰达公司 Digital printing method and system
JP7225230B2 (en) 2017-11-19 2023-02-20 ランダ コーポレイション リミテッド digital printing system
US11707943B2 (en) 2017-12-06 2023-07-25 Landa Corporation Ltd. Method and apparatus for digital printing
WO2019111223A1 (en) * 2017-12-07 2019-06-13 Landa Corporation Ltd. Digital printing process and method
CN112399918B (en) 2018-06-26 2023-01-31 兰达公司 Intermediate Transmission Components of Digital Printing System
US10994528B1 (en) 2018-08-02 2021-05-04 Landa Corporation Ltd. Digital printing system with flexible intermediate transfer member
US12001902B2 (en) 2018-08-13 2024-06-04 Landa Corporation Ltd. Correcting distortions in digital printing by implanting dummy pixels in a digital image
JP7246496B2 (en) 2018-10-08 2023-03-27 ランダ コーポレイション リミテッド Friction reduction means for printing systems and methods
US11787170B2 (en) 2018-12-24 2023-10-17 Landa Corporation Ltd. Digital printing system
CN114746813A (en) 2019-11-25 2022-07-12 兰达公司 Drying inks using infrared radiation in digital printing
US11321028B2 (en) 2019-12-11 2022-05-03 Landa Corporation Ltd. Correcting registration errors in digital printing
JP7657229B2 (en) 2019-12-29 2025-04-04 ランダ コーポレイション リミテッド Printing method and system
EP4264377A4 (en) 2021-02-02 2024-11-13 Landa Corporation Ltd. REDUCING DISTORTIONS IN PRINTED IMAGES
EP4453661A4 (en) * 2022-02-03 2026-01-07 Landa Corp Ltd TREATMENT FORMULAS FOR USE WITH INTERMEDIATE TRANSFER ELEMENTS
JPWO2025134568A1 (en) * 2023-12-21 2025-06-26

Citations (6)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US9573361B2 (en) * 2011-10-06 2017-02-21 Canon Kabushiki Kaisha Image-forming method
US9969182B2 (en) * 2016-04-19 2018-05-15 Canon Kabushiki Kaisha Image recording method, and treatment liquid and liquid set used therein
US20190389230A1 (en) * 2016-05-30 2019-12-26 Landa Corporation Ltd. Digital printing process
US20190389196A1 (en) * 2010-04-23 2019-12-26 Landa Corporation Ltd. Digital printing process
US20220119659A1 (en) * 2019-01-03 2022-04-21 Landa Corporation Ltd. Formulations for use with an intermediate transfer member of indirect printing systems and printing processes utilizing same
US11679615B2 (en) * 2017-12-07 2023-06-20 Landa Corporation Ltd. Digital printing process and method

Family Cites Families (842)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
GB748821A (en) 1950-09-29 1956-05-09 British Broadcasting Corp Improvements in and relating to television cameras
US2839181A (en) 1954-12-31 1958-06-17 Adamson Stephens Mfg Co Movable tubular conveyor belt
NL235287A (en) 1958-01-20
US3053319A (en) 1960-12-14 1962-09-11 Beloit Iron Works Web dewatering apparatus
US3697551A (en) 1968-12-31 1972-10-10 Hercules Inc Silane sulfonyl azides
BE758713A (en) 1969-11-12 1971-05-10 Rhone Poulenc Sa IMINOXYORGANOXYSILANES
NL175512C (en) 1970-04-17 1984-11-16 Jonkers Cornelius Otto METHOD FOR OPERATING A BELT CONVEYOR AND LOAD CONVEYOR SUITABLE FOR CARRYING OUT THIS METHOD
JPS4843941A (en) 1971-10-07 1973-06-25
CA977818A (en) 1972-06-30 1975-11-11 Carl H. Hertz Liquid jet recorder with contact image transfer to plural continuous paper webs
US3902798A (en) 1974-03-15 1975-09-02 Magicam Inc Composite photography system
JPS50137744A (en) 1974-04-20 1975-11-01
US3935055A (en) 1974-08-30 1976-01-27 Nupla Corporation Assembly tool for use in attaching fiberglass tool handles
US3914540A (en) 1974-10-03 1975-10-21 Magicam Inc Optical node correcting circuit
US3947113A (en) 1975-01-20 1976-03-30 Itek Corporation Electrophotographic toner transfer apparatus
DE2632243C3 (en) 1976-07-17 1979-08-30 Heidelberger Druckmaschinen Ag, 6900 Heidelberg Transfer drum for printing machines that can be adjusted to variable sheet lengths
US4093764A (en) 1976-10-13 1978-06-06 Dayco Corporation Compressible printing blanket
JPS5578904A (en) 1978-12-11 1980-06-14 Haruo Yokoyama Teeth of slide fastner
JPS5581163A (en) 1978-12-13 1980-06-18 Ricoh Co Ltd Recorder
JPS57121446U (en) 1981-01-24 1982-07-28
JPS57159865A (en) 1981-03-27 1982-10-02 Toray Silicone Co Ltd Primer composition for bonding
JPS58174950A (en) 1982-04-08 1983-10-14 Manabu Fukuda Rotary press printing band type relief plate
GB2129333B (en) 1982-08-23 1986-11-19 Canon Kk Recording medium
US4520048A (en) 1983-01-17 1985-05-28 International Octrooi Maatschappij "Octropa" B.V. Method and apparatus for coating paper and the like
JPS59171975A (en) 1983-03-19 1984-09-28 Ricoh Co Ltd Transfer type electrostatic recording method
US4538156A (en) 1983-05-23 1985-08-27 At&T Teletype Corporation Ink jet printer
JPS6076343A (en) 1983-10-03 1985-04-30 Toray Ind Inc Ink jet dying
JPS60199692A (en) 1984-03-23 1985-10-09 Seiko Epson Corp printing device
AU4406785A (en) 1984-06-18 1986-01-24 Gillette Company, The Pigmented aqueous ink compositions and method
US4555437A (en) 1984-07-16 1985-11-26 Xidex Corporation Transparent ink jet recording medium
US4575465A (en) 1984-12-13 1986-03-11 Polaroid Corporation Ink jet transparency
JPS6223783A (en) 1985-07-25 1987-01-31 Canon Inc Thermal transfer recording method
US4792473A (en) 1986-10-31 1988-12-20 Endura Tape, Inc. Self adhesive wallboard tape
JPS63274572A (en) 1987-05-01 1988-11-11 Canon Inc Image forming device
JP2529651B2 (en) 1987-06-22 1996-08-28 大阪シ−リング印刷株式会社 Thermal transfer ink and thermal transfer sheet using the same
US4867830A (en) 1988-05-26 1989-09-19 Chung Nan Y Method of tabbing pressure sensitive tape
US4853737A (en) 1988-05-31 1989-08-01 Eastman Kodak Company Roll useful in electrostatography
US4976197A (en) 1988-07-27 1990-12-11 Ryobi, Ltd. Reverse side printing device employing sheet feed cylinder in sheet-fed printer
US5039339A (en) 1988-07-28 1991-08-13 Eastman Kodak Company Ink composition containing a blend of a polyester and an acrylic polymer
US5062364A (en) 1989-03-29 1991-11-05 Presstek, Inc. Plasma-jet imaging method
EP0425439B1 (en) 1989-10-26 1995-08-02 Ciba-Geigy Ag Aqueous printing ink for ink-jet printing
US5190582A (en) 1989-11-21 1993-03-02 Seiko Epson Corporation Ink for ink-jet printing
US6009284A (en) 1989-12-13 1999-12-28 The Weinberger Group, L.L.C. System and method for controlling image processing devices from a remote location
JPH03248170A (en) 1990-02-27 1991-11-06 Fujitsu Ltd Double-sided printing mechanism
US5075731A (en) 1990-03-13 1991-12-24 Sharp Kabushiki Kaisha Transfer roller device
JPH0698814B2 (en) 1990-03-13 1994-12-07 富士ゼロックス株式会社 Reproducing method of ink recording medium
US5012072A (en) 1990-05-14 1991-04-30 Xerox Corporation Conformable fusing system
US5365324A (en) 1990-10-12 1994-11-15 Canon Kabushiki Kaisha Multi-image forming apparatus
US5099256A (en) 1990-11-23 1992-03-24 Xerox Corporation Ink jet printer with intermediate drum
CA2059867A1 (en) 1991-02-13 1992-08-14 Miles Inc. Binder and vehicle for inks and other color formulations
US5128091A (en) 1991-02-25 1992-07-07 Xerox Corporation Processes for forming polymeric seamless belts and imaging members
US5246100A (en) 1991-03-13 1993-09-21 Illinois Tool Works, Inc. Conveyor belt zipper
US5352507A (en) 1991-04-08 1994-10-04 W. R. Grace & Co.-Conn. Seamless multilayer printing blanket
US5777576A (en) 1991-05-08 1998-07-07 Imagine Ltd. Apparatus and methods for non impact imaging and digital printing
US5575873A (en) 1991-08-06 1996-11-19 Minnesota Mining And Manufacturing Company Endless coated abrasive article
DE69130425T3 (en) 1991-08-14 2005-06-09 Hewlett-Packard Indigo B.V. TWO-SIDED PRESSURE UNIT
JP3223927B2 (en) 1991-08-23 2001-10-29 セイコーエプソン株式会社 Transfer type recording device
WO1993007000A1 (en) 1991-10-04 1993-04-15 Indigo N.V. Ink-jet printer
JPH05147208A (en) 1991-11-30 1993-06-15 Mita Ind Co Ltd Ink jet printer
JP2778331B2 (en) 1992-01-29 1998-07-23 富士ゼロックス株式会社 Ink jet recording device
JPH06171076A (en) 1992-12-07 1994-06-21 Seiko Epson Corp Transfer type inkjet printer
US5349905A (en) 1992-03-24 1994-09-27 Xerox Corporation Method and apparatus for controlling peak power requirements of a printer
JP3036226B2 (en) 1992-04-20 2000-04-24 富士ゼロックス株式会社 Transfer material transfer device for image forming equipment
TW219419B (en) 1992-05-21 1994-01-21 Ibm Mobile data terminal with external antenna
JPH06954A (en) 1992-06-17 1994-01-11 Seiko Epson Corp Inkjet recording method
US5623296A (en) 1992-07-02 1997-04-22 Seiko Epson Corporation Intermediate transfer ink jet recording method
US5264904A (en) 1992-07-17 1993-11-23 Xerox Corporation High reliability blade cleaner system
EP0583168B1 (en) 1992-08-12 1998-10-28 Seiko Epson Corporation Method and device for ink jet recording
JPH06100807A (en) 1992-09-17 1994-04-12 Seiko Instr Inc Recording ink
US5502476A (en) 1992-11-25 1996-03-26 Tektronix, Inc. Method and apparatus for controlling phase-change ink temperature during a transfer printing process
US5902841A (en) 1992-11-25 1999-05-11 Tektronix, Inc. Use of hydroxy-functional fatty amides in hot melt ink jet inks
US5305099A (en) 1992-12-02 1994-04-19 Joseph A. Morcos Web alignment monitoring system
JP3314971B2 (en) 1993-01-28 2002-08-19 理想科学工業株式会社 Emulsion ink for stencil printing
JP3074105B2 (en) 1993-05-13 2000-08-07 株式会社桜井グラフィックシステムズ Sheet reversing mechanism of sheet-fed printing press
JPH06345284A (en) 1993-06-08 1994-12-20 Seiko Epson Corp Belt conveyor and intermediate transfer type ink jet recording apparatus using the same
US5333771A (en) 1993-07-19 1994-08-02 Advance Systems, Inc. Web threader having an endless belt formed from a thin metal strip
US5677719A (en) 1993-09-27 1997-10-14 Compaq Computer Corporation Multiple print head ink jet printer
JPH07112841A (en) 1993-10-18 1995-05-02 Canon Inc Sheet conveying apparatus and image forming apparatus
JPH07186453A (en) 1993-12-27 1995-07-25 Toshiba Corp Color image forming device
TW339028U (en) 1994-02-14 1998-08-21 Manfred R Kuehnle Transport apparatus with electrostatic substrate retention
JPH07238243A (en) 1994-03-01 1995-09-12 Seiko Instr Inc Recording ink
US5642141A (en) 1994-03-08 1997-06-24 Sawgrass Systems, Inc. Low energy heat activated transfer printing process
JPH07278490A (en) 1994-04-06 1995-10-24 Dainippon Toryo Co Ltd Aqueous coating composition
EP0685420B1 (en) 1994-06-03 1998-08-05 Ferag AG Method for controlling the manufacture of printed products and assembly for carrying out the method
US5614933A (en) 1994-06-08 1997-03-25 Tektronix, Inc. Method and apparatus for controlling phase-change ink-jet print quality factors
US5907015A (en) 1994-08-02 1999-05-25 Lord Corporation Aqueous silane adhesive compositions
NL9401352A (en) 1994-08-22 1996-04-01 Oce Nederland Bv Device for transferring toner images.
JPH0862999A (en) 1994-08-26 1996-03-08 Toray Ind Inc Intermediate transfer body and image forming method using same
US5929129A (en) 1994-09-19 1999-07-27 Sentinel Products Corp. Crosslinked foamable compositions of silane-grafted, essentially linear polyolefins blended with polypropylene
US5932659A (en) 1994-09-19 1999-08-03 Sentinel Products Corp. Polymer blend
EP0702032B1 (en) 1994-09-19 2002-11-27 Sentinel Products Corp. Cross-linked foam structures of essentially linear polyolefines and process for manufacture
US5883144A (en) 1994-09-19 1999-03-16 Sentinel Products Corp. Silane-grafted materials for solid and foam applications
JP3720396B2 (en) 1994-10-17 2005-11-24 富士写真フイルム株式会社 Thermal transfer recording material
IL111845A (en) 1994-12-01 2004-06-01 Hewlett Packard Indigo Bv Imaging apparatus and method and liquid toner therefor
US6108513A (en) 1995-04-03 2000-08-22 Indigo N.V. Double sided imaging
IL113235A (en) 1995-04-03 2006-07-17 Hewlett Packard Indigo Bv Double sided imaging
US5532314A (en) 1995-05-03 1996-07-02 Lord Corporation Aqueous silane-phenolic adhesive compositions, their preparation and use
JPH08333531A (en) 1995-06-07 1996-12-17 Xerox Corp Water-base ink-jet ink composition
US5679463A (en) 1995-07-31 1997-10-21 Eastman Kodak Company Condensation-cured PDMS filled with zinc oxide and tin oxide mixed fillers for improved fusing member materials
US5780412A (en) 1995-08-09 1998-07-14 The Sherwin-Williams Company Alkaline-stable hard surface cleaning compounds combined with alkali-metal organosiliconates
TW300204B (en) 1995-08-25 1997-03-11 Avery Dennison Corp
JPH09123432A (en) 1995-11-02 1997-05-13 Mita Ind Co Ltd Transfer ink jet recorder
US5683841A (en) 1995-11-17 1997-11-04 Fuji Photo Film Co., Ltd. Method for preparation of waterless lithographic printing plate by electrophotographic process
JP3301295B2 (en) 1995-12-01 2002-07-15 東洋インキ製造株式会社 Method for producing finely divided pigment
US6554189B1 (en) 1996-10-07 2003-04-29 Metrologic Instruments, Inc. Automated system and method for identifying and measuring packages transported through a laser scanning tunnel
JP3597289B2 (en) 1995-12-28 2004-12-02 花王株式会社 Stretchable material, method for producing the same, and product using the same
EP0784244B1 (en) 1996-01-10 2003-03-12 Canon Kabushiki Kaisha Intermediate transfer member and electrophotographic apparatus including same
US6811840B1 (en) 1996-02-23 2004-11-02 Stahls' Inc. Decorative transfer process
WO1997036210A1 (en) 1996-03-28 1997-10-02 Minnesota Mining And Manufacturing Company Perfluoroether release coatings for organic photoreceptors
JPH09268266A (en) 1996-04-01 1997-10-14 Toyo Ink Mfg Co Ltd Ink jet recording liquid
JP3758232B2 (en) 1996-04-15 2006-03-22 セイコーエプソン株式会社 Image carrier belt drive mechanism
US5660108A (en) 1996-04-26 1997-08-26 Presstek, Inc. Modular digital printing press with linking perfecting assembly
JPH09300678A (en) 1996-05-20 1997-11-25 Mitsubishi Electric Corp Recording device
JP3737562B2 (en) 1996-05-31 2006-01-18 富士写真フイルム株式会社 Image forming apparatus
JP3225889B2 (en) 1996-06-27 2001-11-05 富士ゼロックス株式会社 Toner for electrostatic latent image developer, method for producing the same, electrostatic latent image developer, and image forming method
US6025453A (en) 1996-07-26 2000-02-15 The United States Of America As Represented By The Secretary Of The Navy Linear inorganic-organic hybrid copolymers containing random distribution of boranyl, silyl, or siloxyl, and acetylenic units
EP0876914B1 (en) 1996-08-01 2001-01-17 Seiko Epson Corporation Ink jet recording method using two liquids
US5736250A (en) 1996-08-08 1998-04-07 Xerox Corporation Crosslinked latex polymer surfaces and methods thereof
JP3802616B2 (en) 1996-08-19 2006-07-26 シャープ株式会社 Inkjet recording method
EP0825029B1 (en) 1996-08-22 2002-05-02 Sony Corporation Printer and printing method
US5889534A (en) 1996-09-10 1999-03-30 Colorspan Corporation Calibration and registration method for manufacturing a drum-based printing system
US5733698A (en) 1996-09-30 1998-03-31 Minnesota Mining And Manufacturing Company Release layer for photoreceptors
JPH10119429A (en) 1996-10-11 1998-05-12 Arkwright Inc Ink jet ink absorption film composite
US5978638A (en) 1996-10-31 1999-11-02 Canon Kabushiki Kaisha Intermediate transfer belt and image forming apparatus adopting the belt
JPH10130597A (en) 1996-11-01 1998-05-19 Sekisui Chem Co Ltd Curable adhesive sheet and method for producing the same
US5777650A (en) 1996-11-06 1998-07-07 Tektronix, Inc. Pressure roller
JP3216799B2 (en) 1996-11-13 2001-10-09 松下電工株式会社 Heat fixing roll
US6221928B1 (en) 1996-11-15 2001-04-24 Sentinel Products Corp. Polymer articles including maleic anhydride
JP2938403B2 (en) 1996-12-13 1999-08-23 住友ゴム工業株式会社 Printing blanket
US6072976A (en) 1996-12-17 2000-06-06 Bridgestone Corporation Intermediate transfer member for electrostatic recording
US5761595A (en) 1997-01-21 1998-06-02 Xerox Corporation Intermediate transfer members
US6071368A (en) 1997-01-24 2000-06-06 Hewlett-Packard Co. Method and apparatus for applying a stable printed image onto a fabric substrate
GB2321616B (en) 1997-01-29 1999-11-17 Bond A Band Transmissions Ltd Band joining system
US5698018A (en) 1997-01-29 1997-12-16 Eastman Kodak Company Heat transferring inkjet ink images
US6354700B1 (en) 1997-02-21 2002-03-12 Ncr Corporation Two-stage printing process and apparatus for radiant energy cured ink
US5891934A (en) 1997-03-24 1999-04-06 Hewlett-Packard Company Waterfast macromolecular chromophores using amphiphiles
US6720367B2 (en) 1997-03-25 2004-04-13 Seiko Epson Corporation Ink composition comprising cationic, water-soluble resin
US6024018A (en) 1997-04-03 2000-02-15 Intex Israel Technologies Corp., Ltd On press color control system
DE69810001T2 (en) 1997-04-28 2003-04-17 Seiko Epson Corp., Tokio/Tokyo Ink composition for producing a lightfast image
WO1998055901A1 (en) 1997-06-03 1998-12-10 Indigo N.V. Intermediate transfer blanket and method of producing the same
KR200147792Y1 (en) 1997-06-30 1999-06-15 윤종용 Wet electrophotographic printer
JP2002508015A (en) 1997-06-30 2002-03-12 ビーエーエスエフ アクチェンゲゼルシャフト Pigment formulations for inkjet printing
JPH1184893A (en) 1997-07-07 1999-03-30 Fuji Xerox Co Ltd Intermediate transfer body and image forming device using the same
KR200151066Y1 (en) 1997-07-18 1999-07-15 윤종용 Color laser printer
JPH1191147A (en) 1997-07-22 1999-04-06 Ricoh Co Ltd Image forming method and apparatus
US5865299A (en) 1997-08-15 1999-02-02 Williams; Keith Air cushioned belt conveyor
US6397034B1 (en) 1997-08-29 2002-05-28 Xerox Corporation Fluorinated carbon filled polyimide intermediate transfer components
AU3749297A (en) 1997-09-11 1999-03-25 Scapa Group Plc Filter belt guide
US6053307A (en) 1997-09-19 2000-04-25 Honda Sangyo Kabushiki Kaisha Apparatus for changing and guiding running direction of conveyor belt
US6045817A (en) 1997-09-26 2000-04-04 Diversey Lever, Inc. Ultramild antibacterial cleaning composition for frequent use
US6827018B1 (en) 1997-09-26 2004-12-07 Heidelberger Druckmaschinen Ag Device and method for driving a printing machine with multiple uncoupled motors
JPH11106081A (en) 1997-10-01 1999-04-20 Ricoh Co Ltd Photosensitive belt stopping mechanism of electrophotographic device
US6471803B1 (en) 1997-10-24 2002-10-29 Ray Pelland Rotary hot air welder and stitchless seaming
US6024786A (en) 1997-10-30 2000-02-15 Hewlett-Packard Company Stable compositions of nano-particulate unmodified pigments and insoluble colorants in aqueous microemulsions, and principle of stability and methods of formation thereof
JPH11138740A (en) 1997-11-05 1999-05-25 Nikka Kk Manufacture of doctor blade
JP3634952B2 (en) 1997-11-18 2005-03-30 株式会社金陽社 Manufacturing method of transfer belt for electronic equipment
JP4033363B2 (en) 1997-11-28 2008-01-16 リコープリンティングシステムズ株式会社 Transfer belt and electrophotographic apparatus using the same
KR100252101B1 (en) 1997-12-12 2000-04-15 윤종용 Developer Supply Method of Wet Developer
DE69818411T2 (en) 1997-12-26 2004-06-24 Ricoh Co., Ltd. Inkjet printing using a viscosity-improving layer
US6155669A (en) 1998-01-08 2000-12-05 Xerox Corporation Pagewidth ink jet printer including a printbar mounted encoding system
US6126777A (en) 1998-02-20 2000-10-03 Lord Corporation Aqueous silane adhesive compositions
US6199971B1 (en) 1998-02-24 2001-03-13 Arrray Printers Ab Direct electrostatic printing method and apparatus with increased print speed
US6213580B1 (en) 1998-02-25 2001-04-10 Xerox Corporation Apparatus and method for automatically aligning print heads
US6499822B1 (en) 1998-04-27 2002-12-31 Canon Kabushiki Kaisha Method and apparatus for forming an image on a recording medium with contraction and expansion properties
JPH11327315A (en) 1998-05-12 1999-11-26 Brother Ind Ltd Transfer device and image forming device
US6912952B1 (en) 1998-05-24 2005-07-05 Hewlett-Packard Indigo B.V. Duplex printing system
CA2332972A1 (en) 1998-05-24 1999-12-02 Indigo N.V. Printing system
US6109746A (en) 1998-05-26 2000-08-29 Eastman Kodak Company Delivering mixed inks to an intermediate transfer roller
US6234625B1 (en) 1998-06-26 2001-05-22 Eastman Kodak Company Printing apparatus with receiver treatment
US6625331B1 (en) 1998-07-03 2003-09-23 Minolta Co., Ltd. Image forming apparatus
US6195112B1 (en) 1998-07-16 2001-02-27 Eastman Kodak Company Steering apparatus for re-inkable belt
EP0985715B1 (en) 1998-09-01 2011-10-12 Mitsubishi Chemical Corporation Recording liquid, printed product and ink jet recording method
JP2000094660A (en) 1998-09-22 2000-04-04 Brother Ind Ltd Image forming device
JP2000103052A (en) 1998-09-29 2000-04-11 Brother Ind Ltd Image forming device
JP2000108320A (en) 1998-09-30 2000-04-18 Brother Ind Ltd Image forming device
JP2000108337A (en) 1998-09-30 2000-04-18 Brother Ind Ltd Image forming device
JP2000108334A (en) 1998-09-30 2000-04-18 Brother Ind Ltd Image forming device
US6166105A (en) 1998-10-13 2000-12-26 Eastman Kodak Company Process for making an ink jet ink
US6053438A (en) 1998-10-13 2000-04-25 Eastman Kodak Company Process for making an ink jet ink
JP2000141710A (en) 1998-11-10 2000-05-23 Brother Ind Ltd Image forming device
JP2000141883A (en) 1998-11-18 2000-05-23 Ricoh Co Ltd Ink jet recording method, recording material reproducing method, recording material, and ink
JP2000169772A (en) 1998-12-07 2000-06-20 Toyo Ink Mfg Co Ltd Ink jet recording liquid and ink jet recording method using the same
JP2000168062A (en) 1998-12-09 2000-06-20 Brother Ind Ltd Inkjet printer
US7239407B1 (en) 1998-12-16 2007-07-03 Silverbrook Research Pty Ltd Controller for controlling printing on both surfaces of a sheet of print media
US6586100B1 (en) 1998-12-16 2003-07-01 Nexpress Solutions Llc Fluorocarbon-silicone interpenetrating network useful as fuser member coating
US6262207B1 (en) 1998-12-18 2001-07-17 3M Innovative Properties Company ABN dispersants for hydrophobic particles in water-based systems
US5991590A (en) 1998-12-21 1999-11-23 Xerox Corporation Transfer/transfuse member release agent
EP1013466A3 (en) 1998-12-22 2001-05-02 E.I. Du Pont De Nemours And Company Intermediate ink-receiver sheet for transfer printing
JP2000190468A (en) 1998-12-25 2000-07-11 Brother Ind Ltd Image forming device
JP3943742B2 (en) 1999-01-11 2007-07-11 キヤノン株式会社 Image forming apparatus and intermediate transfer belt
US6455132B1 (en) 1999-02-04 2002-09-24 Kodak Polychrome Graphics Llc Lithographic printing printable media and process for the production thereof
US6678068B1 (en) 1999-03-11 2004-01-13 Electronics For Imaging, Inc. Client print server link for output peripheral device
US7304753B1 (en) 1999-03-11 2007-12-04 Electronics For Imaging, Inc. Systems for print job monitoring
JP2000343025A (en) 1999-03-31 2000-12-12 Kyocera Corp Printing scraping blade and processing method thereof
US6270074B1 (en) 1999-04-14 2001-08-07 Hewlett-Packard Company Print media vacuum holddown
JP2002542091A (en) 1999-04-23 2002-12-10 フォト、ウエア、インコーポレーテッド Coated transfer sheet containing thermosetting or UV curable material
AUPP996099A0 (en) 1999-04-23 1999-05-20 Silverbrook Research Pty Ltd A method and apparatus(sprint01)
JP2000337464A (en) 1999-05-27 2000-12-05 Fuji Xerox Co Ltd Endless belt and image forming device
US6917437B1 (en) 1999-06-29 2005-07-12 Xerox Corporation Resource management for a printing system via job ticket
DE19934282A1 (en) 1999-07-21 2001-01-25 Degussa Aqueous dispersions of soot
US6335046B1 (en) 1999-07-29 2002-01-01 Sara Lee Bakery Group, Inc. Method and apparatus for molding dough
US6136081A (en) 1999-08-10 2000-10-24 Eastman Kodak Company Ink jet printing method
US6770331B1 (en) 1999-08-13 2004-08-03 Basf Aktiengesellschaft Colorant preparations
US6261688B1 (en) 1999-08-20 2001-07-17 Xerox Corporation Tertiary amine functionalized fuser fluids
JP2001088430A (en) 1999-09-22 2001-04-03 Kimoto & Co Ltd Ink jet recording material
CN1182442C (en) 1999-10-15 2004-12-29 株式会社理光 Photoreceptor assembly and image forming device
JP3631129B2 (en) 1999-11-12 2005-03-23 キヤノン株式会社 Ink set and method for forming colored portion on recording medium
JP2001139865A (en) 1999-11-18 2001-05-22 Sharp Corp Aqueous ink composition
FR2801836B1 (en) 1999-12-03 2002-02-01 Imaje Sa SIMPLIFIED MANUFACTURING PRINTER AND METHOD OF MAKING
JP4196241B2 (en) 1999-12-07 2008-12-17 Ｄｉｃ株式会社 Water-based ink composition and method for producing water-based ink
JP2001347747A (en) 1999-12-24 2001-12-18 Ricoh Co Ltd Image viscosity setting method and apparatus, viscosity image transfer method and apparatus, viscosity image separation method and apparatus, and viscosity image setting apparatus, transfer apparatus, and image forming method and apparatus using the separation apparatus
US6461422B1 (en) 2000-01-27 2002-10-08 Chartpak, Inc. Pressure sensitive ink jet media for digital printing
JP2001206522A (en) 2000-01-28 2001-07-31 Nitto Denko Corp Endless belt with meandering prevention guide
US6741738B2 (en) 2000-03-13 2004-05-25 Tms, Inc. Method of optical mark recognition
US6530321B2 (en) 2000-03-21 2003-03-11 Day International, Inc. Flexible image transfer blanket having non-extensible backing
JP3782920B2 (en) 2000-03-28 2006-06-07 セイコーインスツル株式会社 Ink jet printer
JP2002020673A (en) 2000-04-10 2002-01-23 Seiko Epson Corp Method for producing pigment dispersion, pigment dispersion obtained by the method, ink for inkjet recording using the pigment dispersion, recording method and recorded matter using the ink
RU2180675C2 (en) 2000-05-11 2002-03-20 ЗАО "Резинотехника" Adhesive composition
EP1158029A1 (en) 2000-05-22 2001-11-28 Illinois Tool Works Inc. Novel ink jet inks and method of printing
US6540344B2 (en) 2000-06-21 2003-04-01 Canon Kabushiki Kaisha Ink-jet ink, ink set, method for ink-jet printing, ink-jet printing apparatus, ink-jet printing unit and ink cartridge
JP2002103598A (en) 2000-07-26 2002-04-09 Olympus Optical Co Ltd Printer
JP2002049211A (en) 2000-08-03 2002-02-15 Pfu Ltd Liquid development full color electrophotographic equipment
US6648468B2 (en) 2000-08-03 2003-11-18 Creo Srl Self-registering fluid droplet transfer methods
US6409331B1 (en) 2000-08-30 2002-06-25 Creo Srl Methods for transferring fluid droplet patterns to substrates via transferring surfaces
US6755519B2 (en) 2000-08-30 2004-06-29 Creo Inc. Method for imaging with UV curable inks
JP4756293B2 (en) 2000-08-31 2011-08-24 Ｄｉｃ株式会社 Advanced printing method
US6937259B2 (en) 2000-09-04 2005-08-30 Matsushita Electric Industrial Co., Ltd. Image forming device and recording intermediate belt mounting jig
DE60128306T2 (en) 2000-09-14 2008-01-10 Dai Nippon Printing Co., Ltd. Intermediate transfer recording medium and image imaging method
US6377772B1 (en) 2000-10-04 2002-04-23 Nexpress Solutions Llc Double-sleeved electrostatographic roller and method of using
US6357870B1 (en) 2000-10-10 2002-03-19 Lexmark International, Inc. Intermediate transfer medium coating solution and method of ink jet printing using coating solution
DE60134105D1 (en) 2000-10-13 2008-07-03 Dainippon Screen Mfg Printing press equipped with measuring device for measuring the color fields
JP4246367B2 (en) 2000-10-16 2009-04-02 株式会社リコー Printing device
DE10056703C2 (en) 2000-11-15 2002-11-21 Technoplot Cad Vertriebs Gmbh Inkjet printer with a piezo print head for ejecting lactate ink onto an uncoated print medium
US6363234B2 (en) 2000-11-21 2002-03-26 Indigo N.V. Printing system
US6633735B2 (en) 2000-11-29 2003-10-14 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Reduction of seam mark from an endless seamed organophotoreceptor belt
US7265819B2 (en) 2000-11-30 2007-09-04 Hewlett-Packard Development Company, L.P. System and method for print system monitoring
US6841206B2 (en) 2000-11-30 2005-01-11 Agfa-Gevaert Ink jet recording element
JP2002229276A (en) 2000-11-30 2002-08-14 Ricoh Co Ltd Image forming apparatus and method, and image forming system
JP2002169383A (en) 2000-12-05 2002-06-14 Ricoh Co Ltd Image forming apparatus and intermediate transfer member stop position control method for image forming apparatus
US6400913B1 (en) 2000-12-14 2002-06-04 Xerox Corporation Control registration and motion quality of a tandem xerographic machine using transfuse
US6475271B2 (en) 2000-12-28 2002-11-05 Xerox Corporation Ink jet ink compositions and printing processes
US6595615B2 (en) 2001-01-02 2003-07-22 3M Innovative Properties Company Method and apparatus for selection of inkjet printing parameters
US6680095B2 (en) 2001-01-30 2004-01-20 Xerox Corporation Crosslinking of fluoropolymers with polyfunctional siloxanes for release enhancement
JP2002234243A (en) 2001-02-09 2002-08-20 Hitachi Koki Co Ltd Inkjet recording method
US6623817B1 (en) 2001-02-22 2003-09-23 Ghartpak, Inc. Inkjet printable waterslide transferable media
US6843976B2 (en) 2001-02-27 2005-01-18 Noranda Inc. Reduction of zinc oxide from complex sulfide concentrates using chloride processing
DE10113558B4 (en) 2001-03-20 2005-09-22 Avery Dennison Corp., Pasadena Combined printer
JP4545336B2 (en) 2001-03-21 2010-09-15 株式会社リコー Belt drive device and image forming apparatus having the same
US20030018119A1 (en) 2001-03-28 2003-01-23 Moshe Frenkel Method and compositions for preventing the agglomeration of aqueous pigment dispersions
JP3802362B2 (en) 2001-04-03 2006-07-26 株式会社Ｐｆｕ Intermediate transfer member for color electrophotographic apparatus
EP1247821A3 (en) 2001-04-05 2003-10-15 Kansai Paint Co., Ltd. Pigment dispersing resin
DE10117504A1 (en) 2001-04-07 2002-10-17 Degussa Inject ink
US7244485B2 (en) 2001-04-11 2007-07-17 Xerox Corporation Imageable seamed belts having polyamide adhesive between interlocking seaming members
JP3676693B2 (en) 2001-04-27 2005-07-27 京セラミタ株式会社 Belt conveying apparatus and image forming apparatus
JP3994375B2 (en) 2001-05-11 2007-10-17 ニッタ株式会社 Conveyor belt with beads
US6753087B2 (en) 2001-05-21 2004-06-22 3M Innovative Properties Company Fluoropolymer bonding
US6630047B2 (en) 2001-05-21 2003-10-07 3M Innovative Properties Company Fluoropolymer bonding composition and method
US6551757B1 (en) 2001-05-24 2003-04-22 Eastman Kodak Company Negative-working thermal imaging member and methods of imaging and printing
JP2002371208A (en) 2001-06-14 2002-12-26 Canon Inc Ink jet ink for intermediate transfer recording and ink jet recording method
US6558767B2 (en) 2001-06-20 2003-05-06 Xerox Corporation Imageable seamed belts having polyvinylbutyral and isocyanate outer layer
JP3558056B2 (en) 2001-06-27 2004-08-25 セイコーエプソン株式会社 Image forming device
JP3496830B2 (en) 2001-06-28 2004-02-16 バンドー化学株式会社 V belt for high load transmission
US6896944B2 (en) 2001-06-29 2005-05-24 3M Innovative Properties Company Imaged articles comprising a substrate having a primed surface
US6806013B2 (en) 2001-08-10 2004-10-19 Samsung Electronics Co. Ltd. Liquid inks comprising stabilizing plastisols
US6945631B2 (en) 2001-08-17 2005-09-20 Fuji Photo Film Co., Ltd. Image forming method and apparatus
JP4045759B2 (en) 2001-08-20 2008-02-13 富士ゼロックス株式会社 Image forming method
US6714232B2 (en) 2001-08-30 2004-03-30 Eastman Kodak Company Image producing process and apparatus with magnetic load roller
JP2003076159A (en) 2001-09-07 2003-03-14 Ricoh Co Ltd Image forming device
US20030055129A1 (en) 2001-09-17 2003-03-20 Westvaco Corporation In Jet Inks
JP2003094795A (en) 2001-09-20 2003-04-03 Ricoh Co Ltd Image recording material and recording method thereof
JP2003114558A (en) 2001-10-03 2003-04-18 Yuka Denshi Co Ltd Endless belt and image forming apparatus
US6719423B2 (en) 2001-10-09 2004-04-13 Nexpress Solutions Llc Ink jet process including removal of excess liquid from an intermediate member
US6682189B2 (en) 2001-10-09 2004-01-27 Nexpress Solutions Llc Ink jet imaging via coagulation on an intermediate member
US6557992B1 (en) 2001-10-26 2003-05-06 Hewlett-Packard Development Company, L.P. Method and apparatus for decorating an imaging device
JP2003202761A (en) 2001-11-01 2003-07-18 Canon Inc Image forming apparatus and intermediate transfer unit detachable therefrom
JP2003145914A (en) 2001-11-07 2003-05-21 Konica Corp Ink jet recording method and ink jet recording device
US6639527B2 (en) 2001-11-19 2003-10-28 Hewlett-Packard Development Company, L.P. Inkjet printing system with an intermediate transfer member between the print engine and print medium
US6779885B2 (en) 2001-12-04 2004-08-24 Eastman Kodak Company Ink jet printing method
JP2003170645A (en) 2001-12-06 2003-06-17 Olympus Optical Co Ltd Recording sheet and image recorder
US6606476B2 (en) 2001-12-19 2003-08-12 Xerox Corporation Transfix component having haloelastomer and silicone hybrid material
AU2002317533A1 (en) 2002-01-07 2003-07-24 Rohm And Haas Company Process for preparing emulsion polymers and polymers formed therefrom
JP2003211770A (en) 2002-01-18 2003-07-29 Hitachi Printing Solutions Ltd Color image recorder
JP2003219271A (en) 2002-01-24 2003-07-31 Nippon Hoso Kyokai <Nhk> Multipoint virtual studio synthesis system
US6789887B2 (en) 2002-02-20 2004-09-14 Eastman Kodak Company Inkjet printing method
JP2003246135A (en) 2002-02-26 2003-09-02 Ricoh Co Ltd Image forming processing liquid and image forming method using the processing liquid
JP2003246484A (en) 2002-02-27 2003-09-02 Kyocera Corp Belt transport device
WO2003076319A1 (en) 2002-03-08 2003-09-18 Brother Kogyo Kabushiki Kaisha Image forming device and conveying belt used for the device
JP2003267580A (en) 2002-03-15 2003-09-25 Fuji Xerox Co Ltd Belt conveying device and image forming device using the same
US6743560B2 (en) 2002-03-28 2004-06-01 Heidelberger Druckmaschinen Ag Treating composition and process for toner fusing in electrostatographic reproduction
JP2003292855A (en) 2002-04-08 2003-10-15 Konica Corp Ink for inkjet recording and method for forming image
JP4393748B2 (en) 2002-04-19 2010-01-06 株式会社リコー Inkjet ink
US6911993B2 (en) 2002-05-15 2005-06-28 Konica Corporation Color image forming apparatus using registration marks
US6881458B2 (en) 2002-06-03 2005-04-19 3M Innovative Properties Company Ink jet receptive coating
US7084202B2 (en) 2002-06-05 2006-08-01 Eastman Kodak Company Molecular complexes and release agents
JP2004011263A (en) 2002-06-06 2004-01-15 Sumitomo Denko Steel Wire Kk Anchorage fixture for pc steel material
JP2004009632A (en) 2002-06-10 2004-01-15 Konica Minolta Holdings Inc Method for ink jet recording
JP4250748B2 (en) 2002-06-14 2009-04-08 フジコピアン株式会社 Transfer sheet and image transfer method
US6843559B2 (en) 2002-06-20 2005-01-18 Xerox Corporation Phase change ink imaging component with MICA-type silicate layer
JP2004025708A (en) 2002-06-27 2004-01-29 Konica Minolta Holdings Inc Inkjet recording method
JP2004034441A (en) 2002-07-02 2004-02-05 Konica Minolta Holdings Inc Image forming method
AT411605B (en) 2002-07-05 2004-03-25 Huyck Austria GEWEBEBAND SETUP
EP2237092A1 (en) 2002-07-15 2010-10-06 Tomoegawa Paper Co. Ltd. Production method for an optical fiber tape core
DE10235872A1 (en) 2002-07-30 2004-02-19 Ebe Hesterman Satellite printing machine for printing on arched substrates
US7066088B2 (en) 2002-07-31 2006-06-27 Day International, Inc. Variable cut-off offset press system and method of operation
DE10235027A1 (en) 2002-07-31 2004-02-12 Degussa Ag Aqueous colloidal frozen gas black suspension of mean particle size less than 200 nm useful for inks, ink jet inks, paints and printing colorants
ITBO20020531A1 (en) 2002-08-08 2004-02-09 Gd Spa TAPE JOINTING DEVICE AND METHOD.
JP2004077669A (en) 2002-08-13 2004-03-11 Fuji Xerox Co Ltd Image forming apparatus
JP4486498B2 (en) 2002-09-03 2010-06-23 ブルームバーグ・ファイナンス・エル・ピー Bezelless electronic display
JP4006374B2 (en) 2002-09-04 2007-11-14 キヤノン株式会社 Image forming method, image forming apparatus, and recorded product manufacturing method
AU2003259569A1 (en) 2002-09-04 2004-03-29 Canon Kabushiki Kaisha Image forming process and image forming apparatus
US6816693B2 (en) 2002-09-13 2004-11-09 Samsung Electronics Co. Ltd. Apparatus and method for removing carrier liquid from a photoreceptor surface or from a toned image on a photoreceptor
JP2004114377A (en) 2002-09-24 2004-04-15 Konica Minolta Holdings Inc Ink jet recording apparatus and ink used in this apparatus
CN100537216C (en) 2002-10-07 2009-09-09 日本写真印刷株式会社 Transfer material
JP2004148687A (en) 2002-10-30 2004-05-27 Mitsubishi Heavy Ind Ltd Variable cutoff printing machine
US6709096B1 (en) 2002-11-15 2004-03-23 Lexmark International, Inc. Method of printing and layered intermediate used in inkjet printing
DE10253447A1 (en) 2002-11-16 2004-06-03 Degussa Ag Aqueous, colloidal gas black suspension
JP4375652B2 (en) 2002-11-21 2009-12-02 日本ニュークローム株式会社 Doctor blade
US6758140B1 (en) 2002-12-31 2004-07-06 Eastman Kodak Company Inkjet lithographic printing plates
US6783228B2 (en) 2002-12-31 2004-08-31 Eastman Kodak Company Digital offset lithographic printing
US7407899B2 (en) 2003-01-10 2008-08-05 Milliken & Company Textile substrates having layered finish structure for improving liquid repellency and stain release
JP2004223956A (en) 2003-01-24 2004-08-12 Fuji Photo Film Co Ltd Transfer medium for inkjet recording and method for forming image
JP4264969B2 (en) 2003-01-29 2009-05-20 セイコーエプソン株式会社 Aqueous pigment ink composition, and recording method, recording system and recorded matter using the same
BRPI0407501A (en) 2003-02-14 2006-02-14 Daiichi Suntory Pharma Co Ltd glycolipids and synthetic method thereof as well as their synthetic intermediates, and synthetic method thereof
JP4239152B2 (en) 2003-02-17 2009-03-18 セイコーエプソン株式会社 Liquid composition
DE602004026800D1 (en) 2003-03-04 2010-06-10 Seiko Epson Corp Aqueous recording liquid and printed material containing dispersed pigments
DE10311219A1 (en) 2003-03-14 2004-09-30 Werner Kammann Maschinenfabrik Gmbh Method and device for printing on a web
JP4275455B2 (en) 2003-03-20 2009-06-10 株式会社リコー Intermediate transfer member, image forming apparatus, image forming method, and dry toner for image formation
US7162167B2 (en) 2003-03-28 2007-01-09 Canon Kabushiki Kaisha Image forming apparatus, method of adjusting developing unit of the apparatus, developing unit, and storage medium
US20040200369A1 (en) 2003-04-11 2004-10-14 Brady Thomas P. Method and system for printing press image distortion compensation
JP4266693B2 (en) 2003-04-24 2009-05-20 キヤノン株式会社 Image forming apparatus
US20040221943A1 (en) 2003-05-09 2004-11-11 Xerox Corporation Process for interlocking seam belt fabrication using adhesive tape with release substrate
US6984216B2 (en) 2003-05-09 2006-01-10 Troy Polymers, Inc. Orthopedic casting articles
US7055946B2 (en) 2003-06-12 2006-06-06 Lexmark International, Inc. Apparatus and method for printing with an inkjet drum
US20060135709A1 (en) 2003-06-20 2006-06-22 Nobuhiro Hasegawa Curing composition
JP4054721B2 (en) 2003-06-23 2008-03-05 キヤノン株式会社 Image forming method and image forming apparatus
JP4054722B2 (en) 2003-06-23 2008-03-05 キヤノン株式会社 Image forming method, image forming apparatus, and recorded product manufacturing method
KR100867045B1 (en) 2003-06-23 2008-11-04 캐논 가부시끼가이샤 Image forming method, image forming apparatus, intermediate transfer body used for image forming apparatus, and method of manufacturing the same
JP4674786B2 (en) 2003-06-24 2011-04-20 コニカミノルタビジネステクノロジーズ株式会社 Image forming apparatus and image forming method
EP1503326A1 (en) 2003-07-28 2005-02-02 Hewlett-Packard Development Company, L.P. Multicolor-printer and method of printing images
JP4216153B2 (en) 2003-09-17 2009-01-28 株式会社リコー Belt conveying apparatus and image forming apparatus using the same
JP3970826B2 (en) 2003-10-02 2007-09-05 株式会社リコー Image forming apparatus
US7128412B2 (en) 2003-10-03 2006-10-31 Xerox Corporation Printing processes employing intermediate transfer with molten intermediate transfer materials
DE10347034B4 (en) 2003-10-09 2006-11-09 J. S. Staedtler Gmbh & Co. Kg Using an ink
US7129858B2 (en) 2003-10-10 2006-10-31 Hewlett-Packard Development Company, L.P. Encoding system
DE10349049B3 (en) 2003-10-17 2005-06-09 Interroll Schweiz Ag Belt conveyor with separate guide shoes
US7447471B2 (en) 2003-10-23 2008-11-04 Hewlett-Packard Development Company, L.P. Ink heating on blanket by contact of a rotating hot surface
US6983692B2 (en) 2003-10-31 2006-01-10 Hewlett-Packard Development Company, L.P. Printing apparatus with a drum and screen
US20050103437A1 (en) 2003-11-19 2005-05-19 Carroll James M. Seaming iron with automatic traction
JP4006386B2 (en) 2003-11-20 2007-11-14 キヤノン株式会社 Image forming method and image forming apparatus
US7065308B2 (en) 2003-11-24 2006-06-20 Xerox Corporation Transfer roll engagement method for minimizing media induced motion quality disturbances
US7257358B2 (en) 2003-12-19 2007-08-14 Lexmark International, Inc. Method and apparatus for detecting registration errors in an image forming device
JP4091005B2 (en) 2004-01-29 2008-05-28 株式会社東芝 Electrophotographic equipment
JP2005224737A (en) 2004-02-16 2005-08-25 Mitsubishi Paper Mills Ltd Coating liquid removal method
US6966712B2 (en) 2004-02-20 2005-11-22 International Business Machines Corporation Method and system for minimizing the appearance of image distortion in a high speed inkjet paper printing system
JP2005234366A (en) 2004-02-20 2005-09-02 Ricoh Co Ltd Position shift amount detection method and image forming apparatus
US7442244B2 (en) 2004-03-22 2008-10-28 Seiko Epson Corporation Water-base ink composition
JP4010009B2 (en) 2004-03-25 2007-11-21 富士フイルム株式会社 Image recording apparatus and maintenance method
JP2005297234A (en) 2004-04-07 2005-10-27 Shin Etsu Chem Co Ltd Silicone rubber sheet for thermocompression bonding and manufacturing method thereof
DE102004021600A1 (en) 2004-05-03 2005-12-08 Gretag-Macbeth Ag Device for inline monitoring of print quality in sheetfed offset presses
JP2005319593A (en) 2004-05-06 2005-11-17 Nippon Paper Industries Co Ltd Inkjet recording medium
US20050266332A1 (en) 2004-05-28 2005-12-01 Pavlisko Joseph A Oil-free process for full color digital printing
JP2006001688A (en) 2004-06-16 2006-01-05 Ricoh Co Ltd Drive control apparatus, control method, and image forming apparatus
TWI347344B (en) 2004-06-29 2011-08-21 Dainippon Ink & Chemicals Aqueous cationic polyurethane resin dispersion, ink-jet receiving agent comprising the dispersion, and ink-jet recording medium using the same
CN100540584C (en) 2004-06-29 2009-09-16 大日本油墨化学工业株式会社 Cationic polyurethane resin aqueous dispersion, inkjet receptor containing same, and inkjet recording medium produced using same
US6989052B1 (en) 2004-06-30 2006-01-24 Xerox Corporation Phase change ink printing process
JP4391898B2 (en) 2004-07-06 2009-12-24 株式会社リコー Belt drive control device, belt device and image forming apparatus
KR101984416B1 (en) 2004-08-20 2019-05-30 헌터더글라스인코포레이티드 Apparatus and method for making a window covering having operable vanes
MX2007002722A (en) 2004-09-09 2007-05-16 Wella Ag Hair-conditioning composition.
US20060066704A1 (en) 2004-09-28 2006-03-30 Fuji Photo Film Co., Ltd. Image forming apparatus
JP2006095870A (en) 2004-09-29 2006-04-13 Fuji Photo Film Co Ltd Inkjet printer, recording method thereof and ink and recording medium used in this printer
US7550409B2 (en) 2004-09-30 2009-06-23 Dai Nippon Printing Co., Ltd. Protective layer thermal transfer film and printed article
US7264328B2 (en) 2004-09-30 2007-09-04 Xerox Corporation Systems and methods for print head defect detection and print head maintenance
JP2006102975A (en) 2004-09-30 2006-04-20 Fuji Photo Film Co Ltd Discharge device and image recording device
US7204584B2 (en) 2004-10-01 2007-04-17 Xerox Corporation Conductive bi-layer intermediate transfer belt for zero image blooming in field assisted ink jet printing
US7459491B2 (en) 2004-10-19 2008-12-02 Hewlett-Packard Development Company, L.P. Pigment dispersions that exhibit variable particle size or variable vicosity
EP1783182B1 (en) 2004-10-22 2009-12-23 Seiko Epson Corporation Inkjet recording ink
JP2006139029A (en) 2004-11-11 2006-06-01 Ricoh Co Ltd Mark forming method on moving body and moving body with mark
JP2006137127A (en) 2004-11-15 2006-06-01 Konica Minolta Medical & Graphic Inc Inkjet printer
JP4553690B2 (en) 2004-11-16 2010-09-29 サン美術印刷株式会社 Information carrying sheet and printing ink therefor
JP2006152133A (en) 2004-11-30 2006-06-15 Seiko Epson Corp Ink jet ink and ink jet recording apparatus
US7575314B2 (en) 2004-12-16 2009-08-18 Agfa Graphics, N.V. Dotsize control fluid for radiation curable ink-jet printing process
AU2005319179B2 (en) 2004-12-21 2011-10-13 Dow Global Technologies Llc Polypropylene-based adhesive compositions
US7134953B2 (en) 2004-12-27 2006-11-14 3M Innovative Properties Company Endless abrasive belt and method of making the same
RU2282643C1 (en) 2004-12-30 2006-08-27 Открытое акционерное общество "Балаковорезинотехника" Method of attaching cured rubbers based on acrylate rubbers to metallic surfaces
WO2006073696A1 (en) 2005-01-04 2006-07-13 Dow Corning Corporation Siloxanes and silanes cured by organoborane amine complexes
US20090098385A1 (en) 2005-01-18 2009-04-16 Forbo Siegling Gmbh Multi-layered belt
EP1845138B1 (en) 2005-01-18 2014-12-24 Canon Kabushiki Kaisha Ink, ink set, ink jet recording method, ink cartridge, and ink jet recording apparatus
US7677716B2 (en) 2005-01-26 2010-03-16 Hewlett-Packard Development Company, L.P. Latent inkjet printing, to avoid drying and liquid-loading problems, and provide sharper imaging
US7977408B2 (en) 2005-02-04 2011-07-12 Ricoh Company, Ltd. Recording ink, ink set, ink cartridge, ink record, inkjet recording apparatus and inkjet recording method
ATE433381T1 (en) 2005-02-18 2009-06-15 Taiyo Yuden Kk OPTICAL INFORMATION RECORDING MATERIAL AND METHOD FOR PRODUCING THE SAME
JP2006224583A (en) 2005-02-21 2006-08-31 Konica Minolta Holdings Inc Adhesion recovering method for transfer member, transfer apparatus, and image recording apparatus
JP2006234212A (en) 2005-02-23 2006-09-07 Matsushita Electric Ind Co Ltd refrigerator
WO2006091957A2 (en) 2005-02-24 2006-08-31 E.I. Dupont De Nemours And Company Selected textile medium for transfer printing
JP2006231666A (en) 2005-02-24 2006-09-07 Seiko Epson Corp Inkjet recording device
JP2006243212A (en) 2005-03-02 2006-09-14 Fuji Xerox Co Ltd Image forming apparatus
JP2006263984A (en) 2005-03-22 2006-10-05 Fuji Photo Film Co Ltd Inkjet recording method and device
US7322689B2 (en) 2005-04-25 2008-01-29 Xerox Corporation Phase change ink transfix pressure component with dual-layer configuration
US7296882B2 (en) 2005-06-09 2007-11-20 Xerox Corporation Ink jet printer performance adjustment
US7592117B2 (en) 2005-06-16 2009-09-22 Hewlett-Packard Development Company, L.P. System and method for transferring features to a substrate
JP2006347081A (en) 2005-06-17 2006-12-28 Fuji Xerox Co Ltd Method and equipment for forming pattern
JP4449831B2 (en) 2005-06-17 2010-04-14 富士ゼロックス株式会社 Ink receiving particles, marking material, ink receiving method, recording method, and recording apparatus
JP2007041530A (en) 2005-06-27 2007-02-15 Fuji Xerox Co Ltd Endless belt and image forming apparatus using the same
US7506975B2 (en) 2005-06-28 2009-03-24 Xerox Corporation Sticky baffle
US7233761B2 (en) 2005-07-13 2007-06-19 Ricoh Company, Ltd. Method and apparatus for transferring multiple toner images and image forming apparatus
JP2007025246A (en) 2005-07-15 2007-02-01 Seiko Epson Corp Image forming apparatus
GB0515052D0 (en) 2005-07-22 2005-08-31 Dow Corning Organosiloxane compositions
JP2007058154A (en) 2005-07-26 2007-03-08 Fuji Xerox Co Ltd Intermediate transfer belt, production method thereof and image-forming device
US7907872B2 (en) 2005-07-29 2011-03-15 Ricoh Company, Ltd. Imprinting apparatus and an image formation apparatus
US7673741B2 (en) 2005-08-08 2010-03-09 Inter-Source Recovery Systems Apparatus and method for conveying materials
JP4803356B2 (en) 2005-08-15 2011-10-26 セイコーエプソン株式会社 Ink set, recording method using the same, and recorded matter
US7655708B2 (en) 2005-08-18 2010-02-02 Eastman Kodak Company Polymeric black pigment dispersions and ink jet ink compositions
WO2007023987A1 (en) 2005-08-23 2007-03-01 Ricoh Company, Ltd. Ink for recording, and ink cartridge, ink recorded matter, inkjet recording apparatus and inkjet recording method using the same
JP4509891B2 (en) 2005-08-24 2010-07-21 株式会社東芝 Belt drive
US20070054981A1 (en) 2005-09-07 2007-03-08 Fuji Photo Film Co., Ltd Ink set and method and apparatus for recording image
JP2007069584A (en) 2005-09-09 2007-03-22 Fujifilm Corp Intermediate transfer rotating drum and method of manufacturing the same
CN101356245B (en) 2005-09-12 2013-02-13 电子影像公司 Metallic ink jet printing system for graphics applications
JP4783102B2 (en) 2005-09-14 2011-09-28 株式会社リコー Image forming apparatus and image forming control program
JP4725262B2 (en) 2005-09-14 2011-07-13 富士フイルム株式会社 Image forming apparatus
US7845786B2 (en) 2005-09-16 2010-12-07 Fujifilm Corporation Image forming apparatus and ejection state determination method
JP4743502B2 (en) 2005-09-20 2011-08-10 富士フイルム株式会社 Image forming apparatus
DE602006017946D1 (en) 2005-09-30 2010-12-16 Fujifilm Corp Recording material, planographic printing plate using this recording material, and method of manufacturing the planographic printing plate
US8122846B2 (en) 2005-10-26 2012-02-28 Micronic Mydata AB Platforms, apparatuses, systems and methods for processing and analyzing substrates
TWI415908B (en) 2005-10-31 2013-11-21 Dainippon Ink & Chemicals Manufacturing method of aqueous pigment dispersion and ink for ink-jet recording
JP4413854B2 (en) 2005-11-29 2010-02-10 株式会社東芝 Image forming apparatus
US7658486B2 (en) 2005-11-30 2010-02-09 Xerox Corporation Phase change inks
US7541406B2 (en) 2005-11-30 2009-06-02 Xerox Corporation Phase change inks containing curable isocyanate-derived compounds
US7655707B2 (en) 2005-12-02 2010-02-02 Hewlett-Packard Development Company, L.P. Pigmented ink-jet inks with improved image quality on glossy media
EP1963447A4 (en) 2005-12-22 2011-07-06 Ricoh Co Ltd Pigment dispersion, recording ink, ink cartridge, ink-jet recording method and ink-jet recording apparatus
US7926933B2 (en) 2005-12-27 2011-04-19 Canon Kabushiki Kaisha Ink jet printing method and ink jet printing apparatus
US7543815B2 (en) 2005-12-28 2009-06-09 Hewlett-Packard Development Company, L.P. Grippers malfunction monitoring
US7527359B2 (en) 2005-12-29 2009-05-05 Xerox Corporation Circuitry for printer
JP2007193005A (en) 2006-01-18 2007-08-02 Toshiba Corp Image forming apparatus, belt driving mechanism, and belt body driving method
JP2007190745A (en) 2006-01-18 2007-08-02 Fuji Xerox Co Ltd Pattern forming method and pattern forming apparatus
JP2007216673A (en) 2006-01-19 2007-08-30 Brother Ind Ltd Printing apparatus and transfer body
US8025388B2 (en) 2006-02-01 2011-09-27 Fujifilm Corporation Image forming apparatus and image forming method with decreased image transfer disturbance
JP4951990B2 (en) 2006-02-13 2012-06-13 富士ゼロックス株式会社 Elastic body roll and fixing device
ATE453509T1 (en) 2006-02-21 2010-01-15 Moore Wallace North Am Inc SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR HIGH-SPEED VARIABLE PRINTING OPERATIONS
JP2007253347A (en) 2006-03-20 2007-10-04 Ricoh Co Ltd Joining member manufacturing method, endless joining belt, fixing unit, intermediate transfer unit, image forming apparatus, and sheet joining apparatus
JP2007268802A (en) 2006-03-30 2007-10-18 Fujifilm Corp Image forming apparatus and image forming method
US8916247B2 (en) 2006-04-06 2014-12-23 Aisapack Holding S.A. Thermoplastic tubular packaging body with an embedded strip
US8199359B2 (en) 2006-04-28 2012-06-12 Kyocera Mita Corporation System and method for reducing visibility of registration errors in an image to be printed using a digital color printer by convolution with a laplacian kernel
JP4387374B2 (en) 2006-04-28 2009-12-16 シャープ株式会社 Image forming apparatus, image forming apparatus control method, program, and recording medium therefor
JP4752599B2 (en) 2006-05-08 2011-08-17 富士ゼロックス株式会社 Droplet discharge device
JP4752600B2 (en) 2006-05-08 2011-08-17 富士ゼロックス株式会社 Droplet discharge device
DE102006023111A1 (en) 2006-05-16 2007-11-22 Werner Kammann Maschinenfabrik Gmbh & Co. Kg Device for coating objects
JP2008006816A (en) 2006-06-02 2008-01-17 Fujifilm Corp Image forming apparatus and image forming method
US7712890B2 (en) 2006-06-02 2010-05-11 Fujifilm Corporation Image forming apparatus and image forming method
US20070285486A1 (en) 2006-06-08 2007-12-13 Xerox Corporation Low viscosity intermediate transfer coating
US7699922B2 (en) 2006-06-13 2010-04-20 Xerox Corporation Organic phase change carriers containing nanoparticles, phase change inks including same and methods for making same
JP4829843B2 (en) 2006-06-15 2011-12-07 キヤノン株式会社 Method for manufacturing recorded matter (printed matter) and image forming apparatus
US8011781B2 (en) 2006-06-15 2011-09-06 Canon Kabushiki Kaisha Method of producing recorded product (printed product) and image forming apparatus
CN101421110B (en) 2006-06-16 2011-07-27 佳能株式会社 Method for producing record product, and intermediate transfer body and image recording apparatus used therefor
JP4668853B2 (en) 2006-06-16 2011-04-13 株式会社リコー Electrophotographic photosensitive member, and image forming apparatus and process cartridge using the same
JP2008007652A (en) 2006-06-29 2008-01-17 Fujifilm Corp Azo dye, thermal transfer recording ink sheet, thermal transfer recording method, color toner, ink jet ink and color filter
JP5085893B2 (en) 2006-07-10 2012-11-28 富士フイルム株式会社 Image forming apparatus and ink set
JP2008036968A (en) 2006-08-07 2008-02-21 Fujifilm Corp Image recording apparatus and image recording method
JP2008044235A (en) 2006-08-16 2008-02-28 Fujifilm Corp Inkjet recording method and apparatus
JP2008049671A (en) 2006-08-28 2008-03-06 Fujifilm Corp Image forming apparatus and image forming method
WO2008026454A1 (en) 2006-08-31 2008-03-06 Konica Minolta Opto, Inc. Optical film, method for manufacturing the optical film, polarizing plate, and liquid crystal display device
US7887177B2 (en) 2006-09-01 2011-02-15 Fuji Xerox Co., Ltd. Ink-recipient particle, material for recording, recording apparatus and storage member for ink-recipient particle
JP4895729B2 (en) 2006-09-01 2012-03-14 富士フイルム株式会社 Inkjet recording device
JP4908117B2 (en) 2006-09-04 2012-04-04 富士フイルム株式会社 Ink set, image forming apparatus and method thereof
JP2008074018A (en) 2006-09-22 2008-04-03 Fujifilm Corp Image forming apparatus
JP4884151B2 (en) 2006-09-27 2012-02-29 株式会社リコー Position detection device, speed detection device, movement control device, belt conveyance device, rotating body drive device, and image forming device
US8460450B2 (en) 2006-11-20 2013-06-11 Hewlett-Packard Development Company, L.P. Rapid drying, water-based ink-jet ink
US7665817B2 (en) 2006-11-29 2010-02-23 Xerox Corporation Double reflex printing
JP2008137239A (en) 2006-11-30 2008-06-19 Kyocera Mita Corp Inkjet recording method and inkjet recorder
DE602006002039D1 (en) 2006-12-04 2008-09-11 C B G Acciai S R L Pre-scoop blade with curved lamellar profile and manufacturing process for the doctor blade
JP2008142962A (en) 2006-12-07 2008-06-26 Fuji Xerox Co Ltd Ink acceptive particle, material for recording, recording equipment and ink acceptive particle storing cartridge
US7754298B2 (en) 2006-12-11 2010-07-13 Hewlett-Packard Development Company, L.P. Intermediate transfer member and method for making same
GB0625530D0 (en) 2006-12-21 2007-01-31 Eastman Kodak Co Aqueous inkjet fluid
EP2097270B1 (en) 2006-12-27 2015-04-22 Ricoh Company, Ltd. Ink-media set, ink composition, ink cartridge, inkjet recording method, inkjet recording apparatus, and ink recorded matter
JP5144243B2 (en) 2006-12-28 2013-02-13 富士フイルム株式会社 Image forming method and image forming apparatus
US20080175612A1 (en) 2007-01-18 2008-07-24 Ricoh Company, Ltd. Motor control device and image forming apparatus
JP5135809B2 (en) 2007-01-26 2013-02-06 富士ゼロックス株式会社 Polyimide film and polyimide endless belt manufacturing apparatus, and polyimide film and polyimide endless belt manufacturing method
JP4367490B2 (en) 2007-01-26 2009-11-18 セイコーエプソン株式会社 Ink composition for ink jet recording, recording method, and recorded matter
EP2642343B1 (en) 2007-02-02 2015-10-07 Canon Kabushiki Kaisha Magenta toner and full-color image-forming method
JP2008194997A (en) 2007-02-15 2008-08-28 Fuji Xerox Co Ltd Belt rotating device and image forming device
JP2008200899A (en) 2007-02-16 2008-09-04 Fuji Xerox Co Ltd Ink acceptive particle, recording material, recording device and ink acceptive particle storage cartridge
US8733249B2 (en) 2007-02-20 2014-05-27 Goss International Americas, Inc. Real-time print product status
JP2008201564A (en) 2007-02-22 2008-09-04 Fuji Xerox Co Ltd Belt rotation device and image forming device
JP5170508B2 (en) 2007-03-16 2013-03-27 株式会社リコー Ink media set, ink jet recording method, recorded matter, and recording apparatus
JP4442627B2 (en) 2007-03-28 2010-03-31 ブラザー工業株式会社 Image recording device
JP2008246787A (en) 2007-03-29 2008-10-16 Fujifilm Corp Solvent absorber and image forming apparatus
JP2008246990A (en) 2007-03-30 2008-10-16 Nippon Paper Industries Co Ltd Inkjet recording medium
JP2008254203A (en) 2007-03-30 2008-10-23 Fujifilm Corp Inkjet recording apparatus and inkjet recording method
JP2008255135A (en) 2007-03-30 2008-10-23 Fujifilm Corp Ink and image forming method and apparatus
JP2008257118A (en) 2007-04-09 2008-10-23 Fuji Xerox Co Ltd Endless belt for image forming apparatus, belt stretching device for image forming apparatus, and image forming apparatus
US7706733B2 (en) 2007-04-10 2010-04-27 Xerox Corporation Mechanism for transfix member with idle movement
JP5386796B2 (en) 2007-05-24 2014-01-15 セイコーエプソン株式会社 Ink set for inkjet recording and inkjet recording method
JP5017684B2 (en) 2007-07-13 2012-09-05 株式会社リコー Belt device and image forming apparatus
JP2009025570A (en) 2007-07-19 2009-02-05 Ricoh Co Ltd Image forming apparatus, image carrier, and process cartridge
JP2009036914A (en) 2007-07-31 2009-02-19 Canon Inc Image forming apparatus and image forming method
JP2009037311A (en) 2007-07-31 2009-02-19 Dainippon Printing Co Ltd Surface film for polarizing plate and polarizing plate using the same
KR101154896B1 (en) 2007-08-06 2012-06-18 삼성전자주식회사 Fusing unit and image forming apparatus including the same
JP5213382B2 (en) 2007-08-09 2013-06-19 富士フイルム株式会社 Aqueous ink composition, ink set, and image recording method
JP2009045794A (en) 2007-08-17 2009-03-05 Fujifilm Corp Image forming method and image forming apparatus
MX2010001992A (en) 2007-08-20 2010-08-31 Moore Wallace North Am Inc Apparatus and methods for controlling application of a substance to a substrate.
JP2009045851A (en) 2007-08-21 2009-03-05 Fujifilm Corp Image forming method and apparatus
JP2009045885A (en) 2007-08-22 2009-03-05 Fuji Xerox Co Ltd Cooler, image forming device, and fixing device
JP5051887B2 (en) 2007-09-05 2012-10-17 富士フイルム株式会社 Liquid coating apparatus and method, and image forming apparatus
EP2037329B1 (en) 2007-09-13 2014-07-02 Ricoh Company, Ltd. Image forming apparatus belt unit, and belt driving control method
JP4960814B2 (en) 2007-09-18 2012-06-27 富士フイルム株式会社 Image forming apparatus and method of controlling image forming apparatus
JP2009069753A (en) 2007-09-18 2009-04-02 Oki Data Corp Belt rotating device and image forming apparatus
JP4931751B2 (en) 2007-09-25 2012-05-16 富士フイルム株式会社 Image forming apparatus and image forming method
US8042906B2 (en) 2007-09-25 2011-10-25 Fujifilm Corporation Image forming method and apparatus
JP5330763B2 (en) 2007-09-25 2013-10-30 富士フイルム株式会社 Image forming method and image forming apparatus
JP5247102B2 (en) 2007-09-26 2013-07-24 富士フイルム株式会社 Ink jet ink, method for producing the same, and ink set
JP2009083317A (en) 2007-09-28 2009-04-23 Fujifilm Corp Image forming method and image forming apparatus
JP2009083325A (en) 2007-09-28 2009-04-23 Fujifilm Corp Image forming method and ink jet recording apparatus
JP2009083314A (en) 2007-09-28 2009-04-23 Fujifilm Corp Image forming method and ink jet recording apparatus
JP2009083324A (en) 2007-09-28 2009-04-23 Fujifilm Corp Inkjet recording method
US7703601B2 (en) 2007-10-31 2010-04-27 Habasit Ag Hybrid mesh belt
JP2009116128A (en) 2007-11-07 2009-05-28 Fuji Xerox Co Ltd Fixing device and image forming apparatus
ITMO20070354A1 (en) 2007-11-23 2009-05-24 Tecno Europa Srl APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR DECORATING OBJECTS
CN101177057A (en) 2007-11-26 2008-05-14 杭州远洋实业有限公司 Technique for producing air cushion printing blanket
US7873311B2 (en) 2007-12-05 2011-01-18 Kabushiki Kaisha Toshiba Belt transfer device for image forming apparatus
JP2009148908A (en) 2007-12-18 2009-07-09 Fuji Xerox Co Ltd Intermediate transfer endless belt for inkjet recording and recording device
JP2009154330A (en) 2007-12-25 2009-07-16 Seiko Epson Corp Inkjet recording method and inkjet recording apparatus
JP4971126B2 (en) 2007-12-26 2012-07-11 富士フイルム株式会社 Liquid applicator
US7526229B1 (en) 2007-12-27 2009-04-28 Aetas Technology Incorporated Belt tension mechanism of an image forming device
WO2009087789A1 (en) 2008-01-04 2009-07-16 Sakura Color Products Corporation Fabric sheet changing in color with water
US7965414B2 (en) 2008-01-23 2011-06-21 Xerox Corporation Systems and methods for detecting image quality defects
JP5235432B2 (en) 2008-01-30 2013-07-10 キヤノン株式会社 Image forming apparatus
JP4513868B2 (en) 2008-02-12 2010-07-28 富士ゼロックス株式会社 Belt rotating device and recording device
JP2009190375A (en) 2008-02-18 2009-08-27 Fuji Xerox Co Ltd Ink acceptable particle and recording device
US8029123B2 (en) 2008-02-25 2011-10-04 Fuji Xerox Co., Ltd. Material set for recording and recording apparatus
JP5018547B2 (en) 2008-02-26 2012-09-05 富士ゼロックス株式会社 Recording device
JP2009203035A (en) 2008-02-28 2009-09-10 Seiko Epson Corp Belt skew correction control method, belt conveyance device, and recording device
JP2009208349A (en) 2008-03-04 2009-09-17 Fujifilm Corp Method for manufacturing protruding portion of nozzle plate, nozzle plate, inkjet head, and image forming device
JP2009214318A (en) 2008-03-07 2009-09-24 Fuji Xerox Co Ltd Recording device and recording material
JP4525778B2 (en) 2008-03-07 2010-08-18 富士ゼロックス株式会社 Material for recording
JP2009214439A (en) 2008-03-11 2009-09-24 Fujifilm Corp Inkjet recording device and imaging method
CN101249768B (en) 2008-03-17 2011-02-16 汕头市新协特种纸科技有限公司 Thermal transfer printing paper capable of ink-jet printing and preparation method thereof
JP5040766B2 (en) 2008-03-25 2012-10-03 富士ゼロックス株式会社 Recording device
US8342672B2 (en) * 2008-03-24 2013-01-01 Fuji Xerox Co., Ltd. Recording apparatus
JP5018585B2 (en) 2008-03-24 2012-09-05 富士ゼロックス株式会社 Recording device
JP5106199B2 (en) 2008-03-25 2012-12-26 富士フイルム株式会社 Image forming method and image forming apparatus
JP2009227909A (en) 2008-03-25 2009-10-08 Fujifilm Corp Ink set for inkjet, image recording method, and image recorder
JP2009226852A (en) 2008-03-25 2009-10-08 Fujifilm Corp Ink-jet recording device and recording method
JP2009233977A (en) 2008-03-26 2009-10-15 Fuji Xerox Co Ltd Material for recording and recording device
JP2009234219A (en) 2008-03-28 2009-10-15 Fujifilm Corp Image forming method and image forming apparatus
JP2009240925A (en) 2008-03-31 2009-10-22 Fujifilm Corp Apparatus and method for applying liquid, inkjet recording apparatus and method therefor
US8038280B2 (en) 2008-04-09 2011-10-18 Xerox Corporation Ink-jet printer and method for decurling cut sheet media prior to ink-jet printing
CN101981087B (en) 2008-04-22 2012-11-21 东亚合成株式会社 Curable composition and method for preparing organosilicon compound
EP3508346B1 (en) 2008-05-02 2022-11-30 Hewlett-Packard Development Company, L.P. Hard imaging device
JP2009271422A (en) 2008-05-09 2009-11-19 Ricoh Co Ltd Endless belt, belt device, intermediate transfer unit, and image forming apparatus
JP4591544B2 (en) 2008-05-21 2010-12-01 富士ゼロックス株式会社 Correction information creating apparatus, image forming apparatus, and program
JP5353059B2 (en) 2008-05-26 2013-11-27 株式会社リコー Image forming method
JP5137894B2 (en) 2008-05-27 2013-02-06 キヤノン株式会社 Color image forming apparatus
JP5006934B2 (en) 2008-06-03 2012-08-22 キヤノン株式会社 Image forming method and image forming apparatus
JP2010000712A (en) * 2008-06-20 2010-01-07 Fuji Xerox Co Ltd Image recording composition, image recording ink set, and recorder
JP5253013B2 (en) 2008-06-24 2013-07-31 富士フイルム株式会社 Image forming method and apparatus
JP5203065B2 (en) 2008-06-24 2013-06-05 富士フイルム株式会社 Liquid coating method and image forming apparatus
US8136476B2 (en) 2008-07-18 2012-03-20 Xerox Corporation Liquid layer applicator assembly
US7810922B2 (en) 2008-07-23 2010-10-12 Xerox Corporation Phase change ink imaging component having conductive coating
US8096650B2 (en) 2008-07-28 2012-01-17 Xerox Corporation Duplex printing with integrated image marking engines
JP5730764B2 (en) 2008-08-08 2015-06-10 サン−ゴバン パフォーマンス プラスティックス コーポレイション Thermal spray masking tape
JP2010054855A (en) 2008-08-28 2010-03-11 Fuji Xerox Co Ltd Image forming apparatus
US8087771B2 (en) 2008-08-29 2012-01-03 Xerox Corporation Dual blade release agent application apparatus
US7938528B2 (en) 2008-08-29 2011-05-10 Xerox Corporation System and method of adjusting blade loads for blades engaging image forming machine moving surfaces
JP5317598B2 (en) 2008-09-12 2013-10-16 キヤノン株式会社 Printer
JP5453750B2 (en) 2008-09-17 2014-03-26 株式会社リコー Ink set for inkjet recording and inkjet recording method
JP2010076215A (en) 2008-09-25 2010-04-08 Fuji Xerox Co Ltd Ink receptive particle, recording material and recording device
JP4803233B2 (en) 2008-09-26 2011-10-26 富士ゼロックス株式会社 Recording device
JP5435194B2 (en) 2008-10-08 2014-03-05 セイコーエプソン株式会社 INK JET RECORDING PRINTING METHOD AND WATER-BASED INK COMPOSITION
JP4780347B2 (en) 2008-10-10 2011-09-28 富士ゼロックス株式会社 Image forming apparatus and image forming method
WO2010042784A2 (en) 2008-10-10 2010-04-15 Massachusetts Institute Of Technology Method of hydrolytically stable bonding of elastomers to substrates
US8041275B2 (en) 2008-10-30 2011-10-18 Hewlett-Packard Development Company, L.P. Release layer
JP2010105365A (en) 2008-10-31 2010-05-13 Fuji Xerox Co Ltd Ink receptive particle, ink recording material, recording method, recording device and cartridge for storing ink receptive particle
US7857414B2 (en) 2008-11-20 2010-12-28 Xerox Corporation Printhead registration correction system and method for use with direct marking continuous web printers
WO2010073916A1 (en) 2008-12-26 2010-07-01 日本パーカライジング株式会社 Method of electrolytic ceramic coating for metal, electrolysis solution for electrolytic ceramic coating for metal, and metallic material
JP5370815B2 (en) 2009-01-30 2013-12-18 株式会社リコー Image forming apparatus
JP5568240B2 (en) 2009-02-02 2014-08-06 東レ・ダウコーニング株式会社 Curable silicone rubber composition
JP2010184376A (en) 2009-02-10 2010-08-26 Fujifilm Corp Inkjet recording apparatus and inkjet recording method
JP5089629B2 (en) 2009-02-19 2012-12-05 株式会社リコー Image forming apparatus and image forming method
JP5517474B2 (en) 2009-02-25 2014-06-11 三菱重工印刷紙工機械株式会社 Printing apparatus, printing method, sheet-fed printing press and rotary printing press
US8310178B2 (en) 2009-02-27 2012-11-13 Canon Kabushiki Kaisha Motor control apparatus and image forming apparatus
US8318271B2 (en) 2009-03-02 2012-11-27 Eastman Kodak Company Heat transferable material for improved image stability
JP5230490B2 (en) 2009-03-09 2013-07-10 富士フイルム株式会社 Image forming apparatus
JP2010214652A (en) 2009-03-13 2010-09-30 Fujifilm Corp Image forming apparatus and mist collecting method
JP2010214885A (en) 2009-03-18 2010-09-30 Mitsubishi Heavy Ind Ltd Blanket tension adjustment device and printing machine
US8229336B2 (en) 2009-03-24 2012-07-24 Fuji Xerox Co., Ltd. Endless belt, cartridge, and image forming apparatus
JP2010247528A (en) 2009-03-25 2010-11-04 Konica Minolta Holdings Inc Image forming method
JP2010228192A (en) 2009-03-26 2010-10-14 Fuji Xerox Co Ltd Intermediate transfer unit for inkjet recording and inkjet recorder
JP4849147B2 (en) 2009-03-26 2012-01-11 富士ゼロックス株式会社 Recording apparatus and recording material
JP5391772B2 (en) 2009-03-26 2014-01-15 富士ゼロックス株式会社 Recording device
JP2010228392A (en) 2009-03-27 2010-10-14 Nippon Paper Industries Co Ltd Ink-jet recording medium
US7910183B2 (en) 2009-03-30 2011-03-22 Xerox Corporation Layered intermediate transfer members
JP5303337B2 (en) 2009-03-31 2013-10-02 理想科学工業株式会社 Image control device
JP5627189B2 (en) 2009-03-31 2014-11-19 デュプロ精工株式会社 Liquid ejection device
JP5463713B2 (en) 2009-04-02 2014-04-09 凸版印刷株式会社 Doctor for gravure coating
JP5679637B2 (en) 2009-04-09 2015-03-04 キヤノン株式会社 Intermediate transfer body for transfer type ink jet recording, and transfer type ink jet recording method using the intermediate transfer body
JP2010247381A (en) 2009-04-13 2010-11-04 Ricoh Co Ltd Image forming method, image forming apparatus, processing liquid and recording liquid
JP5487702B2 (en) 2009-04-24 2014-05-07 セイコーエプソン株式会社 Method for manufacturing photoelectric conversion device
JP2010260204A (en) 2009-04-30 2010-11-18 Canon Inc Inkjet recording device
JP2010260956A (en) 2009-05-07 2010-11-18 Seiko Epson Corp Ink composition for inkjet recording
JP2010260287A (en) 2009-05-08 2010-11-18 Canon Inc Method for manufacturing recorded matter and image recording apparatus
JP5507883B2 (en) 2009-05-11 2014-05-28 理想科学工業株式会社 Image forming apparatus
US20100300604A1 (en) 2009-05-29 2010-12-02 William Krebs Goss Image transfer belt with controlled surface topography to improve toner release
JP5445328B2 (en) 2009-06-02 2014-03-19 株式会社リコー Image forming apparatus
JP2010281943A (en) 2009-06-03 2010-12-16 Ricoh Co Ltd Image forming apparatus
JP5179441B2 (en) 2009-06-10 2013-04-10 シャープ株式会社 Transfer device and image forming apparatus using the same
US8456586B2 (en) 2009-06-11 2013-06-04 Apple Inc. Portable computer display structures
CN201410787Y (en) 2009-06-11 2010-02-24 浙江创鑫木业有限公司 Character jetting device for wood floor
JP2011002532A (en) 2009-06-17 2011-01-06 Seiko Epson Corp Image forming apparatus and image forming method
JP2011025431A (en) 2009-07-22 2011-02-10 Fuji Xerox Co Ltd Image recorder
US8714731B2 (en) 2009-07-31 2014-05-06 Hewlett-Packard Development Company, L.P. Inkjet ink and intermediate transfer medium for inkjet printing
US8177352B2 (en) 2009-08-04 2012-05-15 Xerox Corporation Drum maintenance system for reducing duplex dropout
JP2011037070A (en) 2009-08-07 2011-02-24 Riso Kagaku Corp Ejection control mechanism and ejection control method of printer
JP5472791B2 (en) 2009-08-24 2014-04-16 株式会社リコー Image forming apparatus
JP5493608B2 (en) 2009-09-07 2014-05-14 株式会社リコー Transfer device and image forming apparatus
JP2011064850A (en) 2009-09-16 2011-03-31 Seiko Epson Corp Transfer device and image forming device
US8162428B2 (en) 2009-09-17 2012-04-24 Xerox Corporation System and method for compensating runout errors in a moving web printing system
JP5490474B2 (en) 2009-09-18 2014-05-14 富士フイルム株式会社 Image forming method and ink composition
JP5430315B2 (en) 2009-09-18 2014-02-26 富士フイルム株式会社 Image forming method and ink composition
JP4897023B2 (en) 2009-09-18 2012-03-14 富士フイルム株式会社 Ink composition, ink set, and inkjet image forming method
JP5444993B2 (en) 2009-09-24 2014-03-19 ブラザー工業株式会社 Recording device
JP2011067956A (en) 2009-09-24 2011-04-07 Fuji Xerox Co Ltd Particle scattering apparatus and image forming apparatus
JP2011073190A (en) 2009-09-29 2011-04-14 Fujifilm Corp Liquid supply apparatus and image forming apparatus
JP5304584B2 (en) 2009-10-14 2013-10-02 株式会社リコー Image forming apparatus, image forming method, and program
US8817078B2 (en) 2009-11-30 2014-08-26 Disney Enterprises, Inc. Augmented reality videogame broadcast programming
JP5633807B2 (en) 2009-11-30 2014-12-03 株式会社リコー Image forming apparatus, image carrier driving control method, and program for executing the method
US8371216B2 (en) 2009-12-03 2013-02-12 Mars, Incorporated Conveying and marking apparatus and method
JP5426351B2 (en) 2009-12-15 2014-02-26 花王株式会社 Ink set for inkjet recording
JP5743398B2 (en) 2009-12-16 2015-07-01 キヤノン株式会社 Image forming method and image forming apparatus
US8256857B2 (en) 2009-12-16 2012-09-04 Xerox Corporation System and method for compensating for small ink drop size in an indirect printing system
JP5093218B2 (en) 2009-12-17 2012-12-12 コニカミノルタビジネステクノロジーズ株式会社 Belt drive device and image forming apparatus
JP5546553B2 (en) 2009-12-18 2014-07-09 キヤノン株式会社 Image forming apparatus
US8282201B2 (en) 2009-12-21 2012-10-09 Xerox Corporation Low force drum maintenance filter
JP2011144271A (en) 2010-01-15 2011-07-28 Toyo Ink Sc Holdings Co Ltd Water-based pigment dispersion composition for inkjet
US8231196B2 (en) 2010-02-12 2012-07-31 Xerox Corporation Continuous feed duplex printer
JP5343890B2 (en) 2010-02-22 2013-11-13 株式会社リコー Image forming apparatus and image forming method
JP2011173325A (en) 2010-02-24 2011-09-08 Canon Inc Intermediate transfer member for transfer-type inkjet printing
JP2011173326A (en) 2010-02-24 2011-09-08 Canon Inc Image forming apparatus
JP5209652B2 (en) 2010-02-24 2013-06-12 三菱重工印刷紙工機械株式会社 Sheet-fed duplex printing machine
US20120088051A1 (en) 2010-03-09 2012-04-12 Avery Dennison Corporation Reconfigurable Multilayer Laminates and Methods
JP2011186346A (en) 2010-03-11 2011-09-22 Seiko Epson Corp Transfer device and image forming apparatus
JP5424945B2 (en) 2010-03-15 2014-02-26 キヤノン株式会社 Transfer ink jet recording method and transfer ink jet recording apparatus
JP5552856B2 (en) 2010-03-24 2014-07-16 セイコーエプソン株式会社 Inkjet recording method and recorded matter
JP5581764B2 (en) 2010-03-24 2014-09-03 信越化学工業株式会社 Silicone rubber composition and method for improving compression set resistance of cured antistatic silicone rubber
JP5579475B2 (en) 2010-03-26 2014-08-27 富士フイルム株式会社 Inkjet ink set and image forming method
JP5187338B2 (en) 2010-03-29 2013-04-24 ブラザー工業株式会社 Image forming apparatus
JP5062282B2 (en) 2010-03-31 2012-10-31 ブラザー工業株式会社 Recording device
US9160938B2 (en) 2010-04-12 2015-10-13 Wsi Corporation System and method for generating three dimensional presentations
JP5276041B2 (en) 2010-04-15 2013-08-28 株式会社まめいた Scouring tool
WO2017208152A1 (en) 2016-05-30 2017-12-07 Landa Corporation Ltd. Digital printing process and system
WO2011136191A1 (en) 2010-04-28 2011-11-03 富士フイルム株式会社 Stereoscopic image reproduction device and method, stereoscopic image capturing device, stereoscopic display device
US8362108B2 (en) 2010-04-28 2013-01-29 Canon Kabushiki Kaisha Transfer ink jet recording aqueous ink
US8303071B2 (en) 2010-05-11 2012-11-06 Xerox Corporation System and method for controlling registration in a continuous feed tandem printer
JP5488190B2 (en) 2010-05-12 2014-05-14 株式会社リコー Image forming apparatus and recording liquid
US9434201B2 (en) 2010-05-17 2016-09-06 Eastman Kodak Company Inkjet recording medium and methods therefor
JP5804773B2 (en) 2010-06-03 2015-11-04 キヤノン株式会社 Image forming apparatus
US8382270B2 (en) 2010-06-14 2013-02-26 Xerox Corporation Contact leveling using low surface tension aqueous solutions
JP2012020441A (en) 2010-07-13 2012-02-02 Canon Inc Transfer ink jet recording apparatus
JP2012022188A (en) 2010-07-15 2012-02-02 Sharp Corp Image forming apparatus
JP5822559B2 (en) 2010-07-15 2015-11-24 キヤノン株式会社 Pressure roller, image heating apparatus using the pressure roller, and method for manufacturing the pressure roller
US8496324B2 (en) 2010-07-30 2013-07-30 Hewlett-Packard Development Company, L.P. Ink composition, digital printing system and methods
JP5959805B2 (en) 2010-07-30 2016-08-02 キヤノン株式会社 Intermediate transfer body and transfer type ink jet recording method
US20120039647A1 (en) 2010-08-12 2012-02-16 Xerox Corporation Fixing devices including extended-life components and methods of fixing marking material to substrates
US8119315B1 (en) 2010-08-12 2012-02-21 Xerox Corporation Imaging members for ink-based digital printing comprising structured organic films
US8693032B2 (en) 2010-08-18 2014-04-08 Ricoh Company, Ltd. Methods and structure for improved presentation of job status in a print server
US8821979B2 (en) 2010-10-19 2014-09-02 N. R. Spuntech Industries Ltd. In-line printing process on wet non-woven fabric and products thereof
JP5822450B2 (en) 2010-10-21 2015-11-24 キヤノン株式会社 Inkjet recording method and inkjet recording apparatus
US8469476B2 (en) 2010-10-25 2013-06-25 Xerox Corporation Substrate media registration system and method in a printing system
US8573768B2 (en) 2010-10-25 2013-11-05 Canon Kabushiki Kaisha Recording apparatus
JP2012091454A (en) 2010-10-28 2012-05-17 Canon Inc Transfer inkjet recording method
JP2012096441A (en) 2010-11-01 2012-05-24 Canon Inc Image forming method and image forming apparatus
JP5699552B2 (en) 2010-11-09 2015-04-15 株式会社リコー Image forming apparatus
JP2012101433A (en) 2010-11-10 2012-05-31 Canon Inc Transfer type inkjet recording method and transfer type inkjet recording device
JP5725808B2 (en) * 2010-11-18 2015-05-27 キヤノン株式会社 Transfer type inkjet recording method
JP5800663B2 (en) * 2010-11-24 2015-10-28 キヤノン株式会社 Transfer type inkjet recording method
JP2012111194A (en) 2010-11-26 2012-06-14 Konica Minolta Business Technologies Inc Inkjet recording device
JP5669545B2 (en) 2010-12-03 2015-02-12 キヤノン株式会社 Transfer type inkjet recording method
DE102010060999A1 (en) 2010-12-03 2012-06-06 OCé PRINTING SYSTEMS GMBH Ink printing device for printing paper web, has predrying unit arranged between ink print head and transfer station adjacent to transfer band and drying ink print images on transfer band for increasing viscosity of ink
JP2012126008A (en) 2010-12-15 2012-07-05 Fuji Xerox Co Ltd Coating apparatus and image forming apparatus
US9605150B2 (en) 2010-12-16 2017-03-28 Presstek, Llc. Recording media and related methods
JP5283685B2 (en) 2010-12-17 2013-09-04 富士フイルム株式会社 Defect recording element detection apparatus and method, and image forming apparatus and method
US20120156375A1 (en) 2010-12-20 2012-06-21 Brust Thomas B Inkjet ink composition with jetting aid
TW201228831A (en) 2010-12-22 2012-07-16 Nippon Synthetic Chem Ind Transfer-printing laminated material
JP5459202B2 (en) 2010-12-28 2014-04-02 ブラザー工業株式会社 Inkjet recording device
US8824003B2 (en) 2011-01-27 2014-09-02 Ricoh Company, Ltd. Print job status identification using graphical objects
BR112013020594A2 (en) 2011-03-07 2016-10-18 Hewlett Packard Development Co transfer intermediate member, method for producing an offset fingerprint intermediate member, and method for adhering a silicone release layer to a rubber layer
JP5717134B2 (en) 2011-03-15 2015-05-13 大日精化工業株式会社 Emulsion binder, ink-jet aqueous pigment ink containing the same, and method for producing emulsion binder
TWI404638B (en) 2011-03-16 2013-08-11 Wistron Corp Method and transfer system for transferring film to workpiece by supercritical fluid
US9063472B2 (en) 2011-03-17 2015-06-23 Ricoh Company, Limited Image forming apparatus and belt tensioning unit
JP5720345B2 (en) 2011-03-18 2015-05-20 セイコーエプソン株式会社 Recording device
JP2012196787A (en) 2011-03-18 2012-10-18 Seiko Epson Corp Apparatus and method for ejecting liquid
JP5772121B2 (en) 2011-03-23 2015-09-02 セイコーエプソン株式会社 Image forming apparatus and image forming method
JP5333670B2 (en) 2011-03-25 2013-11-06 東レ株式会社 Black resin composition, resin black matrix substrate and touch panel
US8398223B2 (en) 2011-03-31 2013-03-19 Eastman Kodak Company Inkjet printing process
CN103476881A (en) 2011-04-29 2013-12-25 惠普发展公司，有限责任合伙企业 Thermal inkjet latex inks
CN102229294A (en) 2011-05-07 2011-11-02 广州市昌成陶瓷有限公司 Composite transfer printing method
CN102183854B (en) 2011-05-09 2012-11-21 深圳市华星光电技术有限公司 Panel alignment device and panel alignment method
US8538306B2 (en) 2011-05-23 2013-09-17 Xerox Corporation Web feed system having compensation roll
ES2529490T5 (en) 2011-06-01 2018-07-20 Koenig & Bauer Ag Printer and procedure to regulate a band tension
US8970704B2 (en) 2011-06-07 2015-03-03 Verizon Patent And Licensing Inc. Network synchronized camera settings
JP2013001081A (en) 2011-06-21 2013-01-07 Kao Corp Thermal transfer image receiving sheet
JP2013019950A (en) 2011-07-07 2013-01-31 Ricoh Co Ltd Belt device, and image forming apparatus
JP5836675B2 (en) 2011-07-13 2015-12-24 キヤノン株式会社 Image forming apparatus
US8434847B2 (en) 2011-08-02 2013-05-07 Xerox Corporation System and method for dynamic stretch reflex printing
JP2013060299A (en) 2011-08-22 2013-04-04 Ricoh Co Ltd Image forming apparatus
DE102011112116A1 (en) 2011-09-02 2013-03-07 Robert Bosch Gmbh Method for adjusting processing position of material web in e.g. digital inkjet printing machine, involves controlling resultant force in web section based on control variable for adjusting processing position of material web
US8573721B2 (en) 2011-09-07 2013-11-05 Xerox Corporation Method of increasing the life of a drum maintenance unit in a printer
US20130063558A1 (en) 2011-09-14 2013-03-14 Motion Analysis Corporation Systems and Methods for Incorporating Two Dimensional Images Captured by a Moving Studio Camera with Actively Controlled Optics into a Virtual Three Dimensional Coordinate System
JP6004626B2 (en) 2011-10-12 2016-10-12 キヤノン株式会社 Encoder system, apparatus with position detection function, and copying machine
JP5879905B2 (en) 2011-10-14 2016-03-08 富士ゼロックス株式会社 Image recording composition, image recording apparatus, and image recording method
US9333534B2 (en) 2011-10-27 2016-05-10 Hewlett-Packard Indigo B.V. Method of forming a release layer
US8714725B2 (en) 2011-11-10 2014-05-06 Xerox Corporation Image receiving member with internal support for inkjet printer
JP2013103474A (en) 2011-11-16 2013-05-30 Ricoh Co Ltd Transfer device and image formation device
JP6067967B2 (en) 2011-11-16 2017-01-25 スリーエム イノベイティブ プロパティズ カンパニー Thermally expandable adhesive sheet and manufacturing method thereof
JP2013121671A (en) 2011-12-09 2013-06-20 Fuji Xerox Co Ltd Image recording apparatus
JP2013125206A (en) 2011-12-15 2013-06-24 Canon Inc Image processor, image processing method, and program
EP2734375B1 (en) 2011-12-16 2015-06-03 Koenig & Bauer Aktiengesellschaft Web-fed printing press
JP5129883B1 (en) 2011-12-21 2013-01-30 アイセロ化学株式会社 Hydraulic transfer film
JP2013129158A (en) 2011-12-22 2013-07-04 Fuji Xerox Co Ltd Image forming apparatus
US8794727B2 (en) 2012-02-07 2014-08-05 Delphax Technologies Inc. Multiple print head printing apparatus and method of operation
US8596750B2 (en) 2012-03-02 2013-12-03 Eastman Kodak Company Continuous inkjet printer cleaning method
US10190012B2 (en) 2012-03-05 2019-01-29 Landa Corporation Ltd. Treatment of release layer and inkjet ink formulations
MX2014010683A (en) 2012-03-05 2014-10-17 Landa Corp Ltd Ink film constructions.
US9498946B2 (en) 2012-03-05 2016-11-22 Landa Corporation Ltd. Apparatus and method for control or monitoring of a printing system
US9902147B2 (en) 2012-03-05 2018-02-27 Landa Corporation Ltd. Digital printing system
US9643403B2 (en) 2012-03-05 2017-05-09 Landa Corporation Ltd. Printing system
CN104271356B (en) 2012-03-05 2016-10-19 兰达公司 Digital printing process
GB2514977A (en) 2012-03-05 2014-12-10 Landa Corp Ltd Apparatus and methods for monitoring operation of a printing system
WO2013132438A2 (en) 2012-03-05 2013-09-12 Landa Corporation Ltd. Protonatable intermediate transfer members for use with indirect printing systems
WO2013132420A1 (en) 2012-03-05 2013-09-12 Landa Corporation Limited Printing system
US10434761B2 (en) 2012-03-05 2019-10-08 Landa Corporation Ltd. Digital printing process
CA2866085A1 (en) 2012-03-05 2013-09-12 Benzion Landa Inkjet ink formulations
CN117341358A (en) 2012-03-05 2024-01-05 兰达公司 Control apparatus and method for digital printing system
US11104123B2 (en) 2012-03-05 2021-08-31 Landa Corporation Ltd. Digital printing system
GB2518169B (en) 2013-09-11 2015-12-30 Landa Corp Ltd Digital printing system
GB2513816B (en) 2012-03-05 2018-11-14 Landa Corporation Ltd Digital printing system
US11106161B2 (en) 2012-03-05 2021-08-31 Landa Corporation Ltd. Intermediate transfer members for use with indirect printing systems and protonatable intermediate transfer members for use with indirect printing systems
US9229664B2 (en) 2012-03-05 2016-01-05 Landa Corporation Ltd. Apparatus and methods for monitoring operation of a printing system
US20190152218A1 (en) 2012-03-05 2019-05-23 Landa Corporation Ltd. Correcting Distortions in Digital Printing
US10569534B2 (en) 2012-03-05 2020-02-25 Landa Corporation Ltd. Digital printing system
US9643400B2 (en) * 2012-03-05 2017-05-09 Landa Corporation Ltd. Treatment of release layer
MX381618B (en) 2012-03-05 2025-03-12 Landa Corp Ltd INK FILM STRUCTURES
WO2013132432A1 (en) 2012-03-05 2013-09-12 Landa Corporation Ltd. Intermediate transfer members for use with indirect printing systems
JP6185938B2 (en) 2012-03-05 2017-08-23 ランダ コーポレイション リミテッド Ink film construction
US10642198B2 (en) 2012-03-05 2020-05-05 Landa Corporation Ltd. Intermediate transfer members for use with indirect printing systems and protonatable intermediate transfer members for use with indirect printing systems
JP2013186361A (en) 2012-03-09 2013-09-19 Fuji Xerox Co Ltd Transfer member, process cartridge, and image forming apparatus
US9517618B2 (en) 2012-03-15 2016-12-13 Landa Corporation Ltd. Endless flexible belt for a printing system
JP6108694B2 (en) 2012-06-14 2017-04-05 キヤノン株式会社 Image processing apparatus, image processing method, and computer program
JP6035899B2 (en) 2012-06-27 2016-11-30 ブラザー工業株式会社 Belt device and image forming apparatus
JP2014008609A (en) 2012-06-27 2014-01-20 Seiko Epson Corp Method of manufacturing recorded matter
JP2014047005A (en) 2012-08-30 2014-03-17 Ricoh Co Ltd Sheet separation transport device, and image forming apparatus
JP2014050980A (en) 2012-09-05 2014-03-20 Canon Inc Transfer type image forming method and apparatus
JP6268766B2 (en) 2012-09-12 2018-01-31 株式会社リコー Image forming apparatus and image forming method
JP5966789B2 (en) * 2012-09-12 2016-08-10 株式会社リコー Inspection apparatus, image forming apparatus, and inspection method
JP2014094827A (en) 2012-11-12 2014-05-22 Panasonic Corp Conveyance device for base material and conveyance method for base material
EP2736247A1 (en) 2012-11-26 2014-05-28 Brainstorm Multimedia, S.L. A method for obtaining a virtual object within a virtual studio from a real object
CN102925002B (en) 2012-11-27 2014-07-16 江南大学 Preparation method of white paint ink used for textile inkjet printing
JP5750423B2 (en) 2012-11-30 2015-07-22 京セラドキュメントソリューションズ株式会社 CLEANING DEVICE, BELT CONVEYING DEVICE HAVING THE SAME, AND IMAGE FORMING DEVICE
EP2741144A2 (en) 2012-12-07 2014-06-11 Canon Kabushiki Kaisha Endless belt, belt driving device and image forming apparatus
US9174432B2 (en) 2012-12-17 2015-11-03 Xerox Corporation Wetting enhancement coating on intermediate transfer member (ITM) for aqueous inkjet intermediate transfer architecture
US9004629B2 (en) 2012-12-17 2015-04-14 Xerox Corporation Image quality by printing frequency adjustment using belt surface velocity measurement
US8764156B1 (en) 2012-12-19 2014-07-01 Xerox Corporation System and method for controlling dewpoint in a print zone within an inkjet printer
US8845072B2 (en) 2012-12-20 2014-09-30 Eastman Kodak Company Condensation control system for inkjet printing system
US20140175707A1 (en) 2012-12-21 2014-06-26 3M Innovative Properties Company Methods of using nanostructured transfer tape and articles made therefrom
JP6107141B2 (en) 2013-01-07 2017-04-05 株式会社リコー Image forming method and image forming apparatus
JP2014131843A (en) 2013-01-07 2014-07-17 Ricoh Co Ltd Image formation apparatus
US8801171B2 (en) 2013-01-16 2014-08-12 Xerox Corporation System and method for image surface preparation in an aqueous inkjet printer
JP6186645B2 (en) 2013-02-14 2017-08-30 株式会社ミヤコシ Transfer type inkjet printer device
JP2014162812A (en) 2013-02-21 2014-09-08 Seiko Epson Corp Ink composition and inkjet recording method
EP2778819A1 (en) 2013-03-12 2014-09-17 Thomson Licensing Method for shooting a film performance using an unmanned aerial vehicle
JP5862605B2 (en) 2013-05-09 2016-02-16 コニカミノルタ株式会社 Image forming apparatus
CN103627337B (en) 2013-05-14 2016-08-17 苏州邦立达新材料有限公司 A kind of thermohardening type is without impression silicone pressure sensitive adhesive tape and preparation method thereof
US9400456B2 (en) 2013-05-14 2016-07-26 Canon Kabushiki Kaisha Belt conveyor unit and image forming apparatus
US9392526B2 (en) 2013-05-28 2016-07-12 Cisco Technology, Inc. Protection against fading in a network ring
US9242455B2 (en) 2013-07-16 2016-01-26 Xerox Corporation System and method for transfixing an aqueous ink in an image transfer system
US9446586B2 (en) 2013-08-09 2016-09-20 The Procter & Gamble Company Systems and methods for image distortion reduction in web printing
US8917329B1 (en) 2013-08-22 2014-12-23 Gopro, Inc. Conversion between aspect ratios in camera
US9566780B2 (en) 2013-09-11 2017-02-14 Landa Corporation Ltd. Treatment of release layer
EP3044010B1 (en) 2013-09-11 2019-11-06 Landa Corporation Ltd. Release layer treatment formulations
GB201401173D0 (en) 2013-09-11 2014-03-12 Landa Corp Ltd Ink formulations and film constructions thereof
US9157001B2 (en) 2013-09-20 2015-10-13 Xerox Corporation Coating for aqueous inkjet transfer
US9126430B2 (en) 2013-09-20 2015-09-08 Xerox Corporation System and method for image receiving surface treatment in an indirect inkjet printer
US9273218B2 (en) 2013-09-20 2016-03-01 Xerox Corporation Coating for aqueous inkjet transfer
CN103568483A (en) 2013-10-14 2014-02-12 安徽华印机电股份有限公司 Printing device
US9033445B1 (en) 2013-10-25 2015-05-19 Eastman Kodak Company Color-to-color correction in a printing system
US9303185B2 (en) 2013-12-13 2016-04-05 Xerox Corporation Indirect printing apparatus employing sacrificial coating on intermediate transfer member
JP5967070B2 (en) 2013-12-25 2016-08-10 カシオ計算機株式会社 Printing method, printing apparatus, and control program therefor
US9193149B2 (en) * 2014-01-28 2015-11-24 Xerox Corporation Aqueous ink jet blanket
JP6632190B2 (en) 2014-03-25 2020-01-22 キヤノン株式会社 Liquid ejection device and liquid ejection method
JP6296870B2 (en) 2014-04-14 2018-03-20 キヤノン株式会社 Image recording method
JP6494173B2 (en) * 2014-04-17 2019-04-03 キヤノン株式会社 Method for producing intermediate transfer member
US9284469B2 (en) * 2014-04-30 2016-03-15 Xerox Corporation Film-forming hydrophilic polymers for transfix printing process
US20150315403A1 (en) 2014-04-30 2015-11-05 Xerox Corporation Sacrificial coating and indirect printing apparatus employing sacrificial coating on intermediate transfer member
US9227392B2 (en) 2014-05-21 2016-01-05 Eastman Kodak Company Slip sheet removal
US9428663B2 (en) 2014-05-28 2016-08-30 Xerox Corporation Indirect printing apparatus employing sacrificial coating on intermediate transfer member
US20150361288A1 (en) 2014-06-17 2015-12-17 Xerox Corporation Sacrificial coating compositions for indirect printing processes
EP3160749B1 (en) 2014-06-27 2019-07-24 Fujifilm Dimatix, Inc. High height ink jet printing
US9346301B2 (en) 2014-07-31 2016-05-24 Eastman Kodak Company Controlling a web-fed printer using an image region database
US9593255B2 (en) 2014-09-23 2017-03-14 Xerox Corporation Sacrificial coating for intermediate transfer member of an indirect printing apparatus
US9428664B2 (en) 2014-10-02 2016-08-30 Xerox Corporation Undercoat layer with low release force for aqueous printing transfix system
WO2016066233A1 (en) 2014-10-31 2016-05-06 Hewlett-Packard Indigo B.V. Electrostatic printing apparatus and intermediate transfer members
EP3017949B1 (en) 2014-11-06 2017-12-13 Canon Kabushiki Kaisha Intermediate transfer member and image forming method
CN104618642A (en) 2015-01-19 2015-05-13 宇龙计算机通信科技(深圳)有限公司 Photographing terminal and control method thereof
US9616697B2 (en) 2015-02-26 2017-04-11 LCY Chemical Corp. Blanket for transferring a paste image from an engraved plate to a substrate
GB2536489B (en) 2015-03-20 2018-08-29 Landa Corporation Ltd Indirect printing system
US9816000B2 (en) 2015-03-23 2017-11-14 Xerox Corporation Sacrificial coating and indirect printing apparatus employing sacrificial coating on intermediate transfer member
JP2016185688A (en) 2015-03-27 2016-10-27 株式会社日立産機システム Printing inspection apparatus, inkjet recording system, and printing distortion correcting method used for them
GB2537813A (en) 2015-04-14 2016-11-02 Landa Corp Ltd Apparatus for threading an intermediate transfer member of a printing system
US10703093B2 (en) 2015-07-10 2020-07-07 Landa Corporation Ltd. Indirect inkjet printing system
US9227429B1 (en) 2015-05-06 2016-01-05 Xerox Corporation Indirect aqueous inkjet printer with media conveyor that facilitates media stripping in a transfer nip
US9707751B2 (en) 2015-06-23 2017-07-18 Canon Kabushiki Kaisha Transfer-type ink jet recording apparatus
EP3115848B1 (en) 2015-06-26 2023-05-24 Oki Electric Industry Co., Ltd. Belt, transfer belt unit, and image forming apparatus
US9815271B2 (en) * 2015-07-28 2017-11-14 Canon Kabushiki Kaisha Intermediate transfer member, image recording apparatus, and image recording method
US9573349B1 (en) 2015-07-30 2017-02-21 Eastman Kodak Company Multilayered structure with water-impermeable substrate
CN105058999A (en) 2015-08-12 2015-11-18 河南卓立膜材料股份有限公司 Thermal transfer ribbon with night luminous function and preparation method thereof
US9327519B1 (en) 2015-09-28 2016-05-03 Xerox Corporation Sacrificial coating and indirect printing apparatus employing sacrificial coating on intermediate transfer member
JP6237742B2 (en) 2015-10-13 2017-11-29 コニカミノルタ株式会社 Image processing apparatus and image processing method
JP2017093178A (en) 2015-11-11 2017-05-25 三星電子株式会社Ｓａｍｓｕｎｇ Ｅｌｅｃｔｒｏｎｉｃｓ Ｃｏ．，Ｌｔｄ． Power supply for motor control
GB201602877D0 (en) 2016-02-18 2016-04-06 Landa Corp Ltd System and method for generating videos
JP6164323B1 (en) 2016-03-14 2017-07-19 東洋インキＳｃホールディングス株式会社 Water-based inkjet ink
CN105844621A (en) 2016-03-17 2016-08-10 阜阳市飞扬印务有限公司 Method for detecting quality of printed matter
WO2017208246A1 (en) 2016-05-30 2017-12-07 Landa Corporation Ltd. Digital printing process
GB201609463D0 (en) 2016-05-30 2016-07-13 Landa Labs 2012 Ltd Method of manufacturing a multi-layer article
IL262529B2 (en) 2016-05-30 2023-06-01 Landa Labs 2012 Ltd Method of manufacturing a multi-layer article
CN112428691B (en) 2016-05-30 2022-09-27 兰达公司 Digital printing method and system
US9649834B1 (en) 2016-06-25 2017-05-16 Xerox Corporation Stabilizers against toxic emissions in imaging plate or intermediate blanket materials
JP1562388S (en) 2016-07-08 2019-10-21
JP6811050B2 (en) 2016-07-26 2021-01-13 リンナイ株式会社 Thermal equipment
JP6112253B1 (en) 2016-09-28 2017-04-12 富士ゼロックス株式会社 Image forming apparatus
JP6784126B2 (en) 2016-09-30 2020-11-11 ブラザー工業株式会社 Sheet transfer device and image recording device
US10353321B2 (en) 2016-11-28 2019-07-16 Oki Data Corporation Belt unit with recesses having auxiliary recesses formed therein, transfer unit, and image forming unit including the belt unit
US10913835B2 (en) 2016-11-30 2021-02-09 Landa Labs (2012) Ltd. Thermal transfer printing
JP2018146850A (en) 2017-03-07 2018-09-20 富士ゼロックス株式会社 Lubrication device for belt-like member, fixing device, and image forming apparatus
JP6784228B2 (en) 2017-05-30 2020-11-11 京セラドキュメントソリューションズ株式会社 An intermediate transfer unit and an image forming apparatus equipped with an intermediate transfer unit
US10372067B2 (en) 2017-05-30 2019-08-06 Canon Kabushiki Kaisha Electrophotographic belt and electrophotographic image forming apparatus
JP2019018388A (en) 2017-07-12 2019-02-07 キヤノン株式会社 Recording device
CN114683686B (en) 2017-07-14 2025-06-10 兰达公司 Intermediate transfer member
US10926532B2 (en) 2017-10-19 2021-02-23 Landa Corporation Ltd. Endless flexible belt for a printing system
JP7225230B2 (en) 2017-11-19 2023-02-20 ランダ コーポレイション リミテッド digital printing system
WO2019102297A1 (en) 2017-11-27 2019-05-31 Landa Corporation Ltd. Digital printing system
CN112399918B (en) 2018-06-26 2023-01-31 兰达公司 Intermediate Transmission Components of Digital Printing System
JP7013342B2 (en) 2018-07-19 2022-01-31 東芝三菱電機産業システム株式会社 Multi-phase motor drive
US10994528B1 (en) 2018-08-02 2021-05-04 Landa Corporation Ltd. Digital printing system with flexible intermediate transfer member
US12001902B2 (en) 2018-08-13 2024-06-04 Landa Corporation Ltd. Correcting distortions in digital printing by implanting dummy pixels in a digital image
JP7246496B2 (en) 2018-10-08 2023-03-27 ランダ コーポレイション リミテッド Friction reduction means for printing systems and methods
US11321028B2 (en) 2019-12-11 2022-05-03 Landa Corporation Ltd. Correcting registration errors in digital printing

Patent Citations (6)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US20190389196A1 (en) * 2010-04-23 2019-12-26 Landa Corporation Ltd. Digital printing process
US9573361B2 (en) * 2011-10-06 2017-02-21 Canon Kabushiki Kaisha Image-forming method
US9969182B2 (en) * 2016-04-19 2018-05-15 Canon Kabushiki Kaisha Image recording method, and treatment liquid and liquid set used therein
US20190389230A1 (en) * 2016-05-30 2019-12-26 Landa Corporation Ltd. Digital printing process
US11679615B2 (en) * 2017-12-07 2023-06-20 Landa Corporation Ltd. Digital printing process and method
US20220119659A1 (en) * 2019-01-03 2022-04-21 Landa Corporation Ltd. Formulations for use with an intermediate transfer member of indirect printing systems and printing processes utilizing same

Cited By (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US12358277B2 (en) 2019-03-31 2025-07-15 Landa Corporation Ltd. Systems and methods for preventing or minimizing printing defects in printing processes

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
JP2021507826A (en) 2021-02-25
US11679615B2 (en) 2023-06-20
US20210001622A1 (en) 2021-01-07
WO2019111223A1 (en) 2019-06-13
JP7273038B2 (en) 2023-05-12
JP7422918B2 (en) 2024-01-26
JP2023109765A (en) 2023-08-08

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
US20230331016A1 (en) Digital printing process and method
US12240229B2 (en) Digital printing process and system
US11396190B2 (en) Digital printing process
US12384170B2 (en) Digital printing process
US10632740B2 (en) Digital printing process
EP3463897B1 (en) Digital printing process and system
WO2017208246A9 (en) Digital printing process
HK40069727A (en) Digital printing process
HK40069728A (en) Digital printing process
HK40047836A (en) Digital printing process and system
HK40007533B (en) Digital printing process

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
AS Assignment

Owner name: LANDA CORPORATION LTD., ISRAEL

Free format text: ASSIGNMENT OF ASSIGNORS INTEREST;ASSIGNORS:LANDA, BENZION;ABRAMOVICH, SAGI;LEVANON, MOSHE;AND OTHERS;SIGNING DATES FROM 20181209 TO 20191211;REEL/FRAME:063346/0173

STPP Information on status: patent application and granting procedure in general

Free format text: DOCKETED NEW CASE - READY FOR EXAMINATION

AS Assignment

Owner name: WINDER PTE. LTD., SINGAPORE

Free format text: LIEN;ASSIGNOR:LANDA CORPORATION LTD.;REEL/FRAME:068381/0762

Effective date: 20240613

STPP Information on status: patent application and granting procedure in general

Free format text: NON FINAL ACTION MAILED

STPP Information on status: patent application and granting procedure in general

Free format text: RESPONSE TO NON-FINAL OFFICE ACTION ENTERED AND FORWARDED TO EXAMINER

STPP Information on status: patent application and granting procedure in general

Free format text: ALLOWED -- NOTICE OF ALLOWANCE NOT YET MAILED

STPP Information on status: patent application and granting procedure in general

Free format text: NOTICE OF ALLOWANCE MAILED -- APPLICATION RECEIVED IN OFFICE OF PUBLICATIONS

STCB Information on status: application discontinuation

Free format text: ABANDONED -- FAILURE TO PAY ISSUE FEE